OWNER'S MANUAL
OWNER'S MANUAL
EXPLANATION OF GRAPHIC SYMBOLS:
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF
ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER
(OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS
INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED
SERVICE PERSONNEL.
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol,
within an equilateral triangle, is intended to
alert the user to the presence of uninsulated
“dangerous voltage” within the product’s
enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude
to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.
The exclamation mark within an equilateral
triangle is intended to alert the user to the
presence of important operating and
maintenance (servicing) instructions in the
literature accompanying the product.
IMPORTANT SAFETY AND INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
INSTRUCTION PERTAINING TO A RISK OF FIRE, ELECTRIC SHOCK, OR INJURY TO PERSONS.
WARNING
- When using electric products, basic precautions should always be followed, including the following:
1. Read all the Safety and Installation instructions and explanations of Graphic Symbols before using the product .
2. This product must be earthed. If it should malfunction or breakdown, grounding provides a path of least resistance for
electric current to reduce the risk of electric shock. This product is equipped with a cord having an equipment-grounding
conductor and a grounding plug. The plug must be plugged into an appropriate outlet that is properly installed and earthed in
accordance with all local codes and ordinances.
DANGER - Improper connection of the equipment-grounding conductor can result in a risk of electric shock. Check
with a qualified electrician or serviceman if you are in doubt as to whether the product is properly grounded. Do not modify
the plug provided with the product - if it will not fit the outlet, have a proper outlet installed by a qualified electrician.
3. To reduce the risk of injury, close supervision is necessary when this product is used near children.
4. Do not use this product near water - for example, near a bathtub, washbowl, kitchen sink, in a wet basement, or near a
swimming pool or the like.
5. This product should only be used by a stand or cart that is recommended by the manufacturer.
6. This product, either alone or in combination with an amplifier and headphones or speakers, may be capable of producing
sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. Do not operate for a long period of time at a high volume level or at a
level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult an audiologist.
7. This product should be located so that its location or position does not interfere with its proper ventilation.
8. This product should be located away from heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, or other products that produce
heat.
9. The product should be connected to a power supply only of the type described in the operating instructions or as marked
on the product.
10. This product may be equipped with a polarized line plug (one blade wider than the other). This is a safety feature. If you
are unable to insert the plug into the outlet, contact an electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety
purpose of the plug.
11. The power-supply cord of the product should be unplugged from the outlet when left unused for a long period of time.
When unplugging the power supply cord, do not pull on the cord, but grasp it by the plug.
12. Care should be taken so that objects do not fall and liquids are not spilled into the enclosure through openings.
13. The product should be serviced by qualified service personnel when:
A. The power-supply cord or the plug has been damaged; or
B. Objects have fallen, or liquid has been spilled into the product; or
C. The products has been exposed to rain; or
D. The product does not appear to be operating normally or exhibits a marked change in performance; or
E. The product has been dropped, or the enclosure damaged.
14. Do not attempt to service the product beyond that described in the user-maintenance instructions. All other servicing
should be referred to qualified service personnel.
15.
WARNING - Do not place objects on product power cord or place it in a position where anyone could trip
over, walk on or roll anything over it. Do not allow the product, or its bench, or its pedal board to rest on or to be installed
over power cords of any type. Improper installations of this type create the possibility of fire hazard and/or personal injury.
16. Electromagnetic interference (RFI). This electronic product utilizes digital sampled wave processing technology (S.W.P.) that
may adversely affect radio/tv reception. Read FCC information inside back cover for additional information.
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS
Owner’s Manual
The information in this publication has been carefully prepared and
checked. The manufacturers however decline all liability for eventual
errors. All rights are reserved. This publication may not be copied,
photocopied or reproduced in part or in whole without prior written
consent from Generalmusic S.p.A. Generalmusic reserves the right to
apply any aesthetic, design or function modifications it considers necessary to any of its products without prior notice. Generalmusic declines
all liability for damage to property or persons resulting from improper
use of the instrument.
© 1993 Generalmusic S.p.A. All rights reserved.
A
CONTENTS
CHAPTER 1
INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................ 1. 1 - 1. 14
Perhaps the best advice we can give you..... ................................................................................................ 1. 1
WX2 and WX400 - what’s the difference? ................................................................................................... 1. 1
Welcome to all WS users who don’t want to throw their WS Songs disks away..... ..................................... 1. 1
We haven’t forgotten the S-Series users..... .................................................................................................. 1. 1
GETTING STARTED ......................................................................................................... 1. 2
Quick installation ......................................................................................................................................... 1. 2
WX DEMO SONG ........................................................................................................................................ 1. 2
Play some ROM Sounds ............................................................................................................................... 1. 3
Drum family ................................................................................................................................................. 1. 3
Samples ........................................................................................................................................................ 1. 3
Zoom in and see your Sound in large type ................................................................................................... 1. 3
Select some Real Time Performances .......................................................................................................... 1. 3
Layer two Sounds (tracks) ............................................................................................................................ 1. 3
Multi-track situations ................................................................................................................................... 1. 4
Deactivate tracks (Sounds) with the Toggle ................................................................................................. 1. 4
Select and play Internal Styles ..................................................................................................................... 1. 4
Sing along with a Song using SCORE .......................................................................................................... 1. 5
Load a Song from the supplied WX Demo Disk ........................................................................................... 1. 5
Preload ......................................................................................................................................................... 1. 6
Load a Song Stylew from WS Songs Disks ................................................................................................... 1. 6
How to record a Song .................................................................................................................................. 1. 7
DETAILED START-UP ................................................................................................................................ 1. 8
BEFORE STARTING…… ............................................................................................................................ 1. 8
THE REAR PANEL ...................................................................................................................................... 1. 8
Connecting the Power cable ........................................................................................................................ 1. 8
Power Switch ................................................................................................................................................ 1. 9
Using the Internal Amplifier ........................................................................................................................ 1. 9
Audio Out (Left-Right/M) outputs ................................................................................................................ 1. 9
The Ext (send/return) Jacks.......................................................................................................................... 1. 9
Audio In (Left-Right/M) inputs ..................................................................................................................... 1. 9
Control Pedals - Connecting the Footpedals ............................................................................................... 1. 9
Pedalboard ................................................................................................................................................. 1. 10
MIDI Connections ...................................................................................................................................... 1. 10
Headphones ................................................................................................................................................ 1. 10
Video Jacks - TV and RGB ......................................................................................................................... 1. 10
POWERING UP ......................................................................................................................................... 1. 12
Contrast ...................................................................................................................................................... 1. 12
The Keyboard ............................................................................................................................................. 1. 12
Master Volume Slider ................................................................................................................................. 1. 12
Track Ball ................................................................................................................................................... 1. 12
Before getting to grips with your unit, set the Internal clock and calendar.... .......................................... 1. 13
Procedure ................................................................................................................................................... 1. 13
USE ONLY GENERALMUSIC SOFTWARE ............................................................................................. 1. 14
Owner's Manual
B
CHAPTER 2
INTERFACE BASICS .................................................................................... 2. 1 - 2. 12
NAVIGATION AND DATA ENTRY ............................................................................................................. 2. 1
The display ................................................................................................................................................... 2. 1
The Cursor Diamond .................................................................................................................................... 2. 2
The “TOGGLE” - the central Cursor diamond button ................................................................................ 2. 2
Zoom in - zoom out ....................................................................................................................................... 2. 2
The Function buttons (F1…F8) ................................................................................................................... 2. 2
The PAGE+ and PAGE- buttons of the Edit section .................................................................................... 2. 2
DATA ENTRY ............................................................................................................................................... 2. 2
The Data Entry Wheel .................................................................................................................................. 2. 2
The Keyboard ............................................................................................................................................... 2. 3
The Ent and Esc buttons ............................................................................................................................... 2. 3
MASTER VOLUME ...................................................................................................................................... 2. 3
THE EDIT MODES ...................................................................................................................................... 2. 4
THE SOUND BANKS ................................................................................................................................... 2. 4
THE SEQUENCER & USERS CONTROLS ................................................................................................ 2. 4
THE PERFORMANCE AND STYLE BANKS .............................................................................................. 2. 5
THE SEQUENCER EDIT SECTION ........................................................................................................... 2. 5
THE 4 OPERATING MODES ...................................................................................................................... 2. 6
Real Time Performance mode ...................................................................................................................... 2. 6
Internal Style mode ...................................................................................................................................... 2. 6
Programmable Style mode ........................................................................................................................... 2. 7
Song and Song Style mode ........................................................................................................................... 2. 7
SELECTION - using the modes .................................................................................................................... 2. 9
To select a Sound ......................................................................................................................................... 2. 9
Second and third banks .............................................................................................................................. 2. 10
To select a Real Time Performance ........................................................................................................... 2. 10
To select an Internal Style .......................................................................................................................... 2. 11
To select a Programmable Style ................................................................................................................ 2. 11
To select a Song ......................................................................................................................................... 2. 12
Conclusion .................................................................................................................................................. 2. 12
CHAPTER 3
PERFORMANCES, TRACKS & ROM SOUNDS .......................................... 3. 1 - 3. 10
THE PERFORMANCES..................................................................................................... 3. 1
SAVE PERFORMANCE - how to memorise a modification ........................................................................ 3. 1
What parameters do the Performances memorise? ..................................................................................... 3. 2
How the Performances of the playing modes differ ..................................................................................... 3. 2
The Style and Song commands ..................................................................................................................... 3. 3
The Start/Stop button ................................................................................................................................... 3. 3
The Fill/Tap button ...................................................................................................................................... 3. 3
Add Modulation or Pitch changes to your playing with the Track-ball....................................................... 3. 3
The Fill Var/Cont button .............................................................................................................................. 3. 3
The Intro/End button .................................................................................................................................... 3. 3
A rapid tour of the main display .................................................................................................................. 3. 4
Some simple operations to perform with the Toggle .................................................................................... 3. 5
Mute or activate a Track .............................................................................................................................. 3. 5
Owner's Manual
C
Select tracks and create multi-track situations ............................................................................................ 3. 5
View a Sound in large type ........................................................................................................................... 3. 5
Split Sound Tracks ........................................................................................................................................ 3. 6
Mixing the Sound volumes of a multi-timbral situation ............................................................................... 3. 6
THE TRACKS AND THE TRACK CONFIGURATION ............................................................................... 3. 7
Tracks and the Real Time Performance ....................................................................................................... 3. 7
Tracks and the WX Sequencer ...................................................................................................................... 3. 7
The Track Configuration .............................................................................................................................. 3. 7
The SCORE function .................................................................................................................................... 3. 8
THE ROM SOUNDS .................................................................................................................................... 3. 9
Double and Single Oscillator Sounds .......................................................................................................... 3. 9
Drumkits and Sound Patches ....................................................................................................................... 3. 9
How the Sounds are organised .................................................................................................................. 3. 10
CHAPTER 4
THE EDIT SECTION ...................................................................................... 4. 1 - 4. 85
General overview of the Edit Section ........................................................................................................... 4. 1
The Edit section displays: ............................................................................................................................ 4. 1
The Edit Section provides the following edit modes: ................................................................................... 4. 2
DISK AND STATIC RAM .......................................................................................... 4. 3
General information ..................................................................................................................................... 4. 3
Precautions to take when handling Disks .................................................................................................... 4. 3
How to load a floppy disk into the Disk Drive ............................................................................................. 4. 4
DISK OPERATING MODES ........................................................................................................................ 4. 5
How to toggle between DISK and SRam ...................................................................................................... 4. 5
Loading data into SRAM .............................................................................................................................. 4. 5
LOAD OPERATIONS ......................................................................................................... 4. 6
LOAD ALL DISK (or all SRAM) .................................................................................................................. 4. 6
Automatic loading ........................................................................................................................................ 4. 7
LOAD ALL SONGS ...................................................................................................................................... 4. 7
LOAD ALL STYLES ..................................................................................................................................... 4. 7
LOAD ALL PERFORMANCES .................................................................................................................... 4. 7
LOAD ALL SAMPLES .................................................................................................................................. 4. 8
LOADING SAMPLES FROM THE S-SERIES DISKS: ................................................................................ 4. 8
LOAD BANK MODE ......................................................................................................... 4. 8
LOAD A SINGLE BANK OF STYLES (Programmable) .............................................................................. 4. 8
LOAD A SINGLE BANK OF REAL TIME PERFORMANCES ................................................................... 4. 9
LOAD SINGLE MODE .................................................................................................... 4. 10
LOAD SINGLE SONG ............................................................................................................................... 4. 10
LOAD SINGLE PROGRAMMABLE STYLE .............................................................................................. 4. 10
LOAD SINGLE PERFORMANCE ............................................................................................................. 4. 10
LOAD SINGLE SAMPLE ........................................................................................................................... 4. 11
LOAD SINGLE MIDI FILE ....................................................................................................................... 4. 11
PRELOAD ......................................................................................................................... 4. 13
SAVE OPERATIONS ........................................................................................................ 4. 14
SAVE ALL MODE ...................................................................................................................................... 4. 14
SAVE ALL TO DISK (or to SRAM) ............................................................................................................ 4. 14
Owner's Manual
D
SAVE ALL SONGS ..................................................................................................................................... 4. 14
SAVE ALL STYLES .................................................................................................................................... 4. 15
SAVE ALL PERFORMANCES ................................................................................................................... 4. 15
SAVE ALL SAMPLES ................................................................................................................................. 4. 15
SAVE BANK MODE ........................................................................................................ 4. 15
SAVE A SINGLE BANK OF PROGRAMMABLE STYLES ........................................................................ 4. 15
SAVE A SINGLE BANK OF REAL TIME PERFORMANCES .................................................................. 4. 16
SAVE SINGLE MODE ..................................................................................................... 4. 16
Save Single MIDI File ................................................................................................................................ 4. 16
ERASE OPERATIONS ..................................................................................................... 4. 19
UTILITY OPERATIONS .................................................................................................. 4. 21
FORMAT = allows a disk to be formatted. ................................................................................................ 4. 21
DIRECTORY = allows the contents of a disk to be examined. .................................................................. 4. 21
FREE SPACE = Displays the free space available. .................................................................................. 4. 22
DISK (SRam) NAME = Allows a name to be given to a disk or to the SRam. ........................................... 4. 22
LOAD USER PROGRAM ........................................................................................................................... 4. 23
LOAD WS SONG ........................................................................................................................................ 4. 24
EDIT MIXER ............................................................................................................ 4. 25
The VOLUME Page .......................................................................................................... 4. 25
The PANPOT Page ............................................................................................................ 4. 26
The MASTER Page ........................................................................................................... 4. 26
The AUDIO IN Page.......................................................................................................... 4. 27
EDIT STATUS ......................................................................................................... 4. 28
The GENERAL page. ........................................................................................................ 4. 28
The following functions are available: ...................................................................................................... 4. 28
Functions assignable to the Pedals: .......................................................................................................... 4. 29
The MICROTUNING Page ............................................................................................... 4. 31
How to programme an Intonation Scale .................................................................................................... 4. 32
The VIDEO MONITOR Page ........................................................................................... 4. 33
EDIT PERFORMANCE ........................................................................................... 4. 35
Navigation .................................................................................................................................................. 4. 35
CONFIGURATION ........................................................................................................... 4. 35
Connect/Disconnect Local (Keyboard) ...................................................................................................... 4. 35
Connect/Disconnect MIDI IN events.......................................................................................................... 4. 36
Connect/Disconnect the internal Sound generator .................................................................................... 4. 36
Connect/Disconnect MIDI OUT................................................................................................................. 4. 37
MODE: ....................................................................................................................................................... 4. 37
DETUNE: .......................................................................................................................... 4. 38
TRANSPOSE: ................................................................................................................... 4. 38
AFTER TOUCH ................................................................................................................ 4. 39
RANDOM PAN ................................................................................................................. 4. 39
TRACKBALL ................................................................................................................... 4. 39
Owner's Manual
E
EFFECTS........................................................................................................................... 4. 40
DAMPER .................................................................................................................................................... 4. 40
VOLUME PEDAL ...................................................................................................................................... 4. 40
PEDALS ..................................................................................................................................................... 4. 41
PRIORITY .................................................................................................................................................. 4. 41
COPY .......................................................................................................................................................... 4. 42
PERFNAME ............................................................................................................................................... 4. 42
RESTORE ................................................................................................................................................... 4. 43
EDIT EFFECTS ....................................................................................................... 4. 44
The Effect types available: ......................................................................................................................... 4. 44
EDIT EFFECTS ......................................................................................................................................... 4. 45
How to Edit the Effects ............................................................................................................................... 4. 45
EFFECT 1 - REVERB....................................................................................................... 4. 46
EFFECT 2 - DELAY, MODULATIONS ........................................................................... 4. 47
The RESTORE, STORE and COMPARE functions .................................................................................... 4. 50
Compare ..................................................................................................................................................... 4. 50
Restore ........................................................................................................................................................ 4. 50
How to Store an edited Effect ..................................................................................................................... 4. 51
EDIT SPLITS .......................................................................................................... 4. 53
How to modify the keyboard extension of a track ...................................................................................... 4. 53
CHORD SPLIT.................................................................................................................. 4. 55
FREE .......................................................................................................................................................... 4. 55
LOCK ......................................................................................................................................................... 4. 56
Transfer a Sound to the Pedalboard .......................................................................................................... 4. 56
EDIT SOUNDS ........................................................................................................ 4. 57
General Edit Procedure ............................................................................................................................. 4. 58
Navigation .................................................................................................................................................. 4. 58
The Display Commands ............................................................................................................................. 4. 58
THE SOUND EDIT PARAMETERS .......................................................................................................... 4. 59
“Single” and “Double” Oscillator editing ................................................................................................ 4. 59
The Edit Menu: ........................................................................................................................................... 4. 59
Store the modified Sound ........................................................................................................................... 4. 60
Drumkits (and Sound Patch) ...................................................................................................................... 4. 61
The Drumkit Edit Menu .............................................................................................................................. 4. 61
The Drumkit Menu ..................................................................................................................................... 4. 62
The Drumkit Commands ............................................................................................................................ 4. 64
The Commands common to both Edit Displays ......................................................................................... 4. 66
EFFECTS ................................................................................................................................................... 4. 66
COMPARE ................................................................................................................................................. 4. 66
LIBRARY .................................................................................................................................................... 4. 67
Substitution of the sound in edit with another from the Library ................................................................ 4. 68
STORE ........................................................................................................................................................ 4. 70
Preload and Edit Sound ............................................................................................................................. 4. 72
EDIT MIDI ............................................................................................................... 4. 73
Navigation .................................................................................................................................................. 4. 73
Master and Slave ........................................................................................................................................ 4. 74
Assigning the MIDI Channels and Out port ...................................................................... 4. 74
Procedure: .................................................................................................................................................. 4. 74
Owner's Manual
F
Memorising the setting ............................................................................................................................... 4. 74
What does WX transmit and receive ? ....................................................................................................... 4. 75
MIDI Filters ....................................................................................................................... 4. 77
The Filter parameters ................................................................................................................................ 4. 77
MIDI CONTROLLERS ............................................................................................................................... 4. 78
MIDI Other ........................................................................................................................ 4. 80
CLOCK: selects INT(ernal) or EXT(ernal) Clock. .................................................................................... 4. 80
COMMON CHANNEL: assigns a channel (1-16 or Off). .......................................................................... 4. 80
MERGE: Activates (On) or deactivates (Off) the function. ....................................................................... 4. 81
SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE: enables the instrument for System Exclusive operations (On). ........................... 4. 82
MIDI CHANNEL LOCK: locks a MIDI channel configuration for the instrument as a whole. ................ 4. 82
GENERAL MIDI: Affects GS and GM MIDI Standard Files..................................................................... 4. 82
EDIT ARRANGE ..................................................................................................... 4. 84
CHAPTER 5
STYLES, SONGS & SEQUENCER ............................................................... 5. 1 - 5. 48
1. INTERNAL STYLES ...................................................................................................... 5. 1
General information ..................................................................................................................................... 5. 1
What is a Style? ............................................................................................................................................ 5. 1
Chord recognition and the Riff .................................................................................................................... 5. 2
How to select an Internal Style .................................................................................................................... 5. 3
The Style Commands .................................................................................................................................... 5. 3
The Style Tempo ........................................................................................................................................... 5. 4
The Tempo-fix, M. Perf. and Sync functions ................................................................................................ 5. 4
Chord Split ................................................................................................................................................... 5. 5
Free and Lock .............................................................................................................................................. 5. 5
Deactivating the tracks engaged by the Sequencer (SEQ) ........................................................................... 5. 6
How to Mute a Sequencer track ................................................................................................................... 5. 6
How to disengage a track and play it in real time ....................................................................................... 5. 6
Save a modified Internal Style Performance ................................................................................................ 5. 7
Save to SRam or Disk ................................................................................................................................... 5. 7
Restore Internal Style Performance ............................................................................................................. 5. 7
The ARRANGER options and how the Styles are affected ........................................................................... 5. 8
2. PROGRAMMABLE STYLES ...................................................................................... 5. 10
Riffs ............................................................................................................................................................ 5. 10
Styles can be programmed in three ways: .................................................................................................. 5. 10
The Prog. Style Performance ..................................................................................................................... 5. 10
How to record a Style (Real Time) .................................................................................... 5. 11
A detailed explanation of each step............................................................................................................ 5. 12
Name your Prog. Style ............................................................................................................................... 5. 19
Save your new Prog. Style to SRam or to Disk .......................................................................................... 5. 19
Programming Styles using STEP recording ...................................................................... 5. 20
Procedure ................................................................................................................................................... 5. 20
Use COPY to copy a recorded Riff to another ........................................................................................... 5. 23
Other operations available in Prog Style mode ......................................................................................... 5. 23
Programmable Styles compared with Internal Styles ................................................................................ 5. 24
3. SONG STYLES ............................................................................................................. 5. 25
Owner's Manual
G
Real Time Recording .................................................................................................................................. 5. 25
Step recording ............................................................................................................................................ 5. 25
Copying from an existing Song Style ......................................................................................................... 5. 25
How to record a Song Style (real time) ............................................................................. 5. 26
How to see the Chord track events ............................................................................................................. 5. 28
Recording a Medley ................................................................................................................................... 5. 28
Give your Song Style a name...................................................................................................................... 5. 29
Muting or disengaging recorded tracks ..................................................................................................... 5. 29
Song Style Performances ............................................................................................................................ 5. 29
How to create up to 8 Song Style Performances ........................................................................................ 5. 29
Editing Song Styles ..................................................................................................................................... 5. 31
Save your Song Style to SRam or Disk ....................................................................................................... 5. 31
Load Song Styles from WS Songs Disks ..................................................................................................... 5. 31
4. SONGS & THE SEQUENCER ..................................................................................... 5. 32
About the Sequencer ................................................................................................................................... 5. 32
The Sequencer controls .............................................................................................................................. 5. 32
The Sequencer operating modes ................................................................................................................ 5. 33
SONGS .............................................................................................................................. 5. 34
Something about the Songs and their structure ......................................................................................... 5. 34
Where are the Songs stored? ...................................................................................................................... 5. 35
The Song Performances ............................................................................................................................. 5. 35
Exploiting the Real Time Performances..................................................................................................... 5. 35
Loading Songs from disk ............................................................................................................................ 5. 36
Preload ....................................................................................................................................................... 5. 36
Song Playback Mode .................................................................................................................................. 5. 37
Start a Song from any point ....................................................................................................................... 5. 37
Playing along with a Song in playback ...................................................................................................... 5. 38
The SCORE function - sing along with your Songs ................................................................................... 5. 38
The GET function ....................................................................................................................................... 5. 39
Connecting to a domestic TV or colour computer monitor. ....................................................................... 5. 39
SONG RECORD mode ..................................................................................................... 5. 40
Songs can be recorded in two ways: .......................................................................................................... 5. 40
Before entering Record mode, prepare your Performance ........................................................................ 5. 40
How to Realtime Record a Song ....................................................................................... 5. 40
Realtime Record options ............................................................................................................................ 5. 42
The Mask option ......................................................................................................................................... 5. 43
How to Step Record a Song ............................................................................................... 5. 43
Recording Pitch Bend, After Touch and Controller data........................................................................... 5. 44
Multi-track recording ................................................................................................................................. 5. 44
Recording MIDI IN events simultaneously with Track events. .................................................................. 5. 45
Synchronization with external MIDI devices ............................................................................................. 5. 45
Create a Performance to communicate with Computers/Sequencers ........................................................ 5. 45
The GET function - create a Score of your recording ....................................................... 5. 46
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO FOLLOW WHEN PROGRAMMING THE LYRICS AND CHORDS TRACKS
USING A COMPUTER .............................................................................................................................. 5. 47
LYRICS TRACK ......................................................................................................................................... 5. 47
CHORDS TRACK ....................................................................................................................................... 5. 47
Working with Standard MIDI Files ................................................................................... 5. 48
Owner's Manual
H
Create Standard MIDI Files ...................................................................................................................... 5. 48
Load Standard MIDI Files ......................................................................................................................... 5. 48
General MIDI and Standard MIDI Files ................................................................................................... 5. 48
CHAPTER 6
SEQUENCER EDIT MODE ........................................................................... 6. 1 - 6. 22
MASTER TRACK ............................................................................................................... 6. 1
The Master Track parameters - First page .................................................................................................. 6. 1
For Song Styles only: ................................................................................................................................... 6. 3
For Songs only: ............................................................................................................................................ 6. 3
For Songs and Song Styles: .......................................................................................................................... 6. 4
Master Track Event Edit .............................................................................................................................. 6. 4
How to edit Master Track events.................................................................................................................. 6. 5
Create an event with INSERT ...................................................................................................................... 6. 5
DELETE EVENTS .............................................................................................................. 6. 6
The Master Track MASK function ................................................................................................................ 6. 7
COPY................................................................................................................................... 6. 8
To effect the Copy, press ENT. ..................................................................................................................... 6. 9
MOVE................................................................................................................................ 6. 10
ERASE............................................................................................................................... 6. 11
INSERT/DELETE ............................................................................................................. 6. 12
INSERT ....................................................................................................................................................... 6. 12
DELETE ..................................................................................................................................................... 6. 12
TRANSP ............................................................................................................................ 6. 13
DYNAMIC ........................................................................................................................ 6. 14
QUANTIZE ....................................................................................................................... 6. 15
Quantize Procedure in Record mode ......................................................................................................... 6. 15
MICROSCOPE (Event Edit) ............................................................................................. 6. 16
The Microscope functions .......................................................................................................................... 6. 19
NAME................................................................................................................................ 6. 20
How to use the keyboard ............................................................................................................................ 6. 20
UNDO ................................................................................................................................ 6. 21
UNDO and FREE MEMORY ..................................................................................................................... 6. 21
OPTION............................................................................................................................. 6. 22
APPENDIX
WX Rom Sound Map ........................................................................................................................................ i
WX Rom Drumkits ........................................................................................................................................... iv
Percussion Samples ........................................................................................................................................ xii
MIDI Implementation chart ......................................................................................................................... xiii
MIDI Controllers .......................................................................................................................................... xiv
WX Specifications ........................................................................................................................................... xv
Glossary ........................................................................................................................................................ xvi
Owner's Manual
1-1
CHAPTER 1 - INTRODUCTION
Congratulations! and thanks for purchasing the WX2/WX400 Multimedia Workstation.
Considering the high level of technology and innumerable features offered, WX2/
WX400 is a very easy instrument to operate. Its user-friendly interface is one of the main
attractions - in next to no time, whether expert or novice, you will be able to discard the
initial sense of panic normally felt when you look at the control panel of a new instrument
for the first time.
Perhaps the best advice we can give you.....
Read this manual
It’s a well known fact of life that simple things can become very complicated if some time
is not dedicated to browsing through the relative documentation.
You are strongly recommended to read at least the introductory part of this manual
(Introduction, Getting Started, Interface Basics) which takes you through a guided tour
of all the functions without going into details. It’s then up to you.
WX2 and WX400 - what’s the difference?
The keyboard and the aesthetics - WX2 has 61 notes and has the classic “keyboard”
appearance; WX400 has an 88 note keyboard with weighted keys (Hammer Action) and
has the typical “digital piano” look. In all other respects, both instruments are identical
- therefore, this manual refers to both models by using the term “WX”.
Welcome to all WS users who don’t want to throw their WS
Songs disks away.....
That’s right, WX is compatible with WS software - at least as far as Songs go!
You can load WS Songs (WS1, WS2, WS3, WS400, GWS400) through the specific
function (Load WS Song) found in the Disk Utility page.
We haven’t forgotten the S-Series users.....
WX, if fitted with the optional 2 Megabyte Sample RAM DISP, can load samples from
S-Series disks. So, if you’ve got a friend whose got an S2 or S3, better if he’s also got
the Sample Translator, you can share some great sounds.
Owner's Manual
Getting
Started
Introduction
1-2
WX400 ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS
HOW TO ASSEMBLE YOUR WX400 PIANO WORKSTATION
1. Remove parts A, B, C, F from the packing and accessories D, E, G, H from the plastic
bag.
2. Fix the pedal cross-bar B to the flanks C with the bolts D, using the hexagonal rod
spanner E, as shown in Fig. 1. The pedals cable must be passed through the rear
loophole, as shown in Fig 1 bis.
3. Fix the bass reflex box A to the flanks C with the bolts D,
using the hexagonal rod spanner E, as shown in Fig. 1.
ASSEMBLY LIST:
A.
B
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
BASS REFLEX BOX.
PEDALS CROSS BAR.
RIGHT/LEFT FLANKS WITH BASS.
8 HEXAGONAL RECESSED
BOLTS.
HEXAGONAL ROD SPANNER.
CABINET.
4 THUMB SCREWS.
4 ADHESIVE CLAMPS.
D
4. Place the cabinet F on top of the assembled base,
fixing it into position with the thumb screws G, as
shown in Fig. 2.
5. Attach the 4 adhesive clamps H (two at the back of
the inner right flank and two under the cabinet), and
clamp the pedals cable as shown in Fig. 3.
6. Insert the pedals and speakers jacks into their
respective rear panel sockets as shown in Fig. 3.
7. Place the instrument in its definite location and adjust the adjustable leg K
under the pedals cross-bar until it rests
firmly on the floor.
Owner's Manual
Getting Started
1-3
GETTING STARTED
If you’re familiar with hooking up gear, here’s a non-illustrated list of fundamental
things that need to be done to play right away.
You can use the supplied WX2/WX400 Demo disk or WS Songs Disks and listen to the
way the WX plays them.
The chapters which follow discuss each function of the keyboard in greater detail.
Quick installation
◆
Be absolutely sure that your WX voltage matches with your main supply voltage.
◆
Place WX2 on a stable keyboard stand, or on a hard, flat surface. Make sure that
the WX400 is correctly assembled by following the instructions carefully.
◆
Check the level of the Master Volume control or, if you are connected to an amp/
speaker system, make sure the volume is at a save level.
◆
If you want to use an amp/speaker system, connect the rear panel Stereo output
jacks (Left and Right/M) to the system using a pair of standard (1/4 inch) audio
cables. Use Right/M stereo jack for Mono reproduction.
◆
If you prefer, plug in a set of headphones using the appropriate jack located on the
left front end of the panel below the Pitch/Mod Track Ball.
◆
Plug the optional Pedal(s), the multi-switch or the Volume pedal into the appropriate pedal sockets.
◆
Connect the instrument’s power cable.
◆
Power up and start playing. The instrument powers up in Real Time Performance
mode showing 8 Sounds belonging to Bank 1 of the Piano family.
WX DEMONSTRATION STYLES
SEQ. EDIT
MASTER
COPY
MOVE
ERASE
INS/DEL TRANSP
QUANT
MICRO
NAME
OPTION
UNDO
DEMO
E
N
T
E
S
C
WX incorporates 7 Demonstration Styles.
◆
Press the DEMO button in the SEQ EDIT section.
◆
Select one of the demo Styles with the corresponding Function button (F1…F7)
and press Start/Stop to start it.
You can play along with the Style in playback mode; when it reaches the end, it
stops automatically.
◆
Press “All” (button F8) to start a medley from the selected style; the medley stops
when it reaches the end of the last style.
◆
Press ESC to escape from the Demo display.
Owner's Manual
Getting Started
1-4
Play some ROM Sounds
◆
Select the displayed Sounds of the current Real Time Performance by means of the
row of Function buttons marked F1 … F8. The sounds are shown in two rows
across the lower display area.
◆
Press the PAGE+ button in the Edit section once then again to access Banks 2 and
3 of 8 Sounds each, some of which are variations of those in Bank 1. The small
number to the extreme left shows which Bank of the currently select Family you
are in.
◆
Return to the Bank 1 Sounds with PAGE-.
◆
Select a different Sound Family from the family groups on the extreme left of the
control panel (Piano, Bass, Guitar...) and continue selecting other sounds.
Drum family
◆
If you select the “Drums” family, you can choose Percussion sounds and Drumkits
from 16 different Banks. The Drumkits are in Banks 2 and 3.
◆
Use PAGE+ button to access the other Banks and return with PAGE–.
Samples
NOTE 1:
WX can load samples
from Disk only if the
instrument is equipped
with the optional
Sample RAM (2 Megabytes).
◆
The “Samples” family provides 8 banks, the first two with 8 sounds, the remaining
6 with 8 “empty” slots ready to receive Samples loaded1 from disk.
◆
Use PAGE+ button to access the other Banks and return with PAGE–
Zoom in and see your Sound in large type
◆
Press the “right” arrow of the cursor diamond to zoom in on the active track in the
left box of the display and view the Sound in large type.
◆
Press the “left” arrow to return to the normal display.
Select some Real Time Performances
◆
Press one of the first three Performance bank buttons of the top row of the
Performances and Style Banks - for example, PERF 1. 8 Performance names will
be displayed across the bottom part.
◆
Select each Performances using the selection buttons F1…F8. Note that most of
the displayed Performances activate multi-track situations. In some cases, you will
hear that some sounds are active across different keyboard extensions with respect
to others.
◆
Select another Performance bank and continue experimenting with the selections.
Layer two Sounds (tracks)
◆
If you start from a single track situation, press the “down” or “up” arrows of the
cursor diamond to move the reverse-highlighted cursor in the display one step
lower or higher to the next track.
◆
Activate the selected track by striking the central button of the cursor diamond,
Owner's Manual
Getting Started
1-5
called the “Toggle”. Now you can play layered tracks (the tracks do not necessarily
have to be consecutive to be layered - you can layer tracks 1 and 4, tracks 3 and 11
and so on...).
◆
Zoom in on both tracks with the “right” arrow of the cursor diamond and zoom out
with the “left” (you cannot zoom in on more than two tracks).
Multi-track situations
◆
Use the “up” and “down” cursor arrow to select tracks and the Toggle to activate
any number of selected tracks up to a maximum of 16.
◆
Different sounds can be assigned to the reverse-highlighted track by selecting a
different Sound family. Use the Function buttons (F1…F8) to select the Sounds.
◆
Each track can be programmed to play across a preset keyboard range by accessing
the SPLIT function in the Edit section. See the relevant chapter for more details.
If you enter Split mode, don’t forget to press SPLIT again, or ESC to escape.
Deactivate tracks (Sounds) with the Toggle
◆
An active Track displays its number, the sound currently assigned to it and the
“track status” showing “ON” in the extreme left column.
◆
If you select an active Track with the “Up” or “Down” cursor arrows, you can
temporarily deactivate it by pressing the Toggle. The track status column will
show “OFF”, the sound assigned to it will not be displayed not will it play. This
status is called the “mute” condition. Press the Toggle once more to re-activate the
track.
Select and play Internal Styles
◆
Access an Internal Style Bank by pressing one of the 8 buttons from the lower row
of the Performance & Style Banks on the extreme right of the control panel (Dance,
Beat, etc.).
◆
Select one of the displayed Styles by pressing the relative F function button. Note
that 4 tracks are engaged by the Sequencer (the track status shows “SEQ”), while
the remaining 2 are either “OFF” or “ON”.
◆
Press Start/Stop to start the Style and play a note or chord on the lower part of the
keyboard. Play a tune on the right part; the melody line will be accompanied by an
automatic Rhythm and Arrangement (called a Style).
◆
Press the Fill button for a Fill In and the Var button for a Fill Variation. This last
function triggers a variation of the basic style after the Fill Var terminates.
◆
Select other Styles within the same bank by means of the function buttons
(F1…F8) and note how the Sounds assigned to the tracks change according to the
Style selected.
◆
Press the M. PERF button (below button F7) and select some Styles. Note how
tracks 5 and 6 rest unchanged while those engaged by the Sequencer vary
according to the Style selected.
Owner's Manual
Getting Started
1-6
SRAM
Static RAM - a battery
backed memory that
can store user programmed data that is to
be used regularly.
NOTE 1:
The instrument cannot
be played during the
automatic loading
procedure.
◆
Deactivate the M. PERF button to restore the normal status.
◆
Access another Internal Style Bank by pressing one of the 8 Style buttons (Ethnic,
Pop, etc.).
◆
Stop the Style by pressing Start/Stop.
Sing along with a Song using SCORE
Your instrument is supplied with two Songs loaded into the SRam. When you power up,
both Songs will be loaded into the instrument’s memory (RAM) automatically.
◆
Press SONGS in the “Sequencer & Users” group.
◆
Select the Song “My way” with the relative Function button (F2).
◆
Press Start/Stop to start the Song.
◆
Press the SCORE button in the "Sequencer & Users" group.
◆
While the Song is in playback, select each option available on the lower part of the
display (All, Lyrics, Zoom, Chord) and observe the difference between each
function.
◆
Press SCORE or ESC to escape SCORE mode.
◆
The Song stops automatically, or you can stop it at any time with Start/Stop.
Load a Song from the supplied WX Demo Disk
1.
Automatic loading1
◆
With the WX switched off, insert the WX Demo Disk into the driver.
◆
Turn WX on - all the Songs present in the Demo disk will load automatically.
2.
Loading after turning the instrument on
◆
Press DISK in the EDIT section and check that you are in DISK mode. If you are
in “SRam operations”, press the F5 button corresponding to “Disk” .
◆
Scroll down to “Single”.
◆
Rotate the Dial to select “Song”.
◆
Press ENT.
◆
Scroll to the Song to load and press “ENT” twice.
◆
Press “DISK” to escape from Disk mode.
◆
Press SONGS from the SEQUENCER & USERS buttons.
◆
Select a Song with the appropriate F function button.
◆
Start the Song with Start/Stop.
◆
Play along with the song using tracks not engaged by the Sequencer (those identified
by the "KYB" symbol).
Owner's Manual
Getting Started
1-7
Pr eload
◆
An alternative and faster Song loading procedure is the PRELOAD function,
which can also be performed while the Sequencer is in Song playback mode. In
practice, this feature displays the Bank of available Songs in correspondence with
the 8 Function buttons (F1…F8).
◆
You can then choose the song to load by pressing the relative Function button.
NB
Preload operates in
Song Mode only.
This function is only valid for WX Songs and is discussed in a later chapter.
Load a Song Style from WS Songs Disks
Use this operation to load Song Styles from WS disks (WS1, WS2, WS400, GWS400):
◆
Press DISK to access DISK mode (check that SRam operations are not selected):
◆
Press PAGE + three times to access the UTILITY page and scroll down to “Load
WS song” with the Down cursor arrow.
◆
Press ENT and the WS disk directory will be displayed:
◆
Rotate the Dial to select the required Song (.All file) and press ENT to start the
conversion.
◆
Rotate the Dial to select the destination in Memory and press ENT twice.
◆
Escape Disk mode by pressing ESC or DISK.
Owner's Manual
Getting Started
1-8
◆
Press the SONG button and select the song with the relative Function button.
◆
Start the Song with Start/Stop and play.
How to record a Song
You can create a multi-track Song by using the following real time recording method.
It is also possible to record patterns (Programmable Styles) and Song Styles which
exploit existing patterns. These are discussed in the relative chapters further ahead.
◆
Select SONGS in the “Sequencer & Users” group.
◆
Select an “empty” position.
◆
Confirm SONG REC MODE.
◆
Select a Track to record with the Up/Down Cursor arrows and activate it for
recording with the Toggle.
◆
Press Start to start the recording and, after a one bar count down, start playing.
◆
When you finish playing, press Start/Stop to stop recording.
◆
Listen to the playback by pressing Start/Stop again. You can record additional
events at this stage.
◆
When you have finished recording the first track, press Stop to end recording and
confirm the recorded track with the Toggle.
◆
Select another track and Repeat the operations for other tracks to create your Song.
◆
When you have finished recording all the tracks of your Song, press ESC and press
Start/Stop to start the playback.
Owner's Manual
Getting Started
1-9
DETAILED START-UP
This section explains some of the most important “Getting started” steps in greater detail
and takes you through a tour of the rear panel, describing the various cable connections,
as well as the Clock/Calendar which you can set right away.
BEFORE STARTING……
Before connecting anything, it is important that you rest your WX2 securely on a stable
keyboard stand. Otherwise, it should rest on a hard, flat surface.
The WX400 is supplied with an appropriate support and speakers box. It should not be
substituted with any other kind of support.
WX2/WX400 does not have any user-serviceable parts therefore, under no circumstances should you attempt to remove any panels or try to open the unit by removing the
screws from under the instrument. If you attempt to open WX, you’ll risk electric shock.
THE REAR PANEL
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
AVIS:
RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE-NE PAS OUVRIR
“COMPLIES WITH THE LIMITS FOR A ”CLASS B“ COMPUTING
DEVICE PURSUANT TO SUBPART J OF PART 15 OF FCC RULES”
OUT 1
IN
THRU
PEDALBOARD
DAMPER
PEDAL 1
PEDAL 2
MOD.
SER.
AC~
VOLUME
CONTROLS
MADE IN ITALY by GENERALMUSIC
LEFT
RIGHT/M
OUT 1
AUDIO IN
D Fl N
OUT 2
EXT.
LEFT
RIGHT/M
AUDIO OUT
GE
NE
RA
LM
US
MIDI
IC
OUT 2
USIC
CONTRAST
RALM
RGB
GENE
TV
VIDEO OUT
CONTRAST
MIDI
INTERFACE
AUDIO IN
LEFT - RIGHT(M)
CONTROL
PEDALS
AUDIO OUT
LEFT - RIGHT(M)
EXT (Send/Return)
OUT 1 - OUT 2
POWER
SWITCH
(WX2)
SPEAKERS
CAUTION
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
RISQUE DE CHOC ELECTRIQUE-NE PAS OUVRIR
IC
AVIS:
THRU
PEDALBOARD
DAMPER
PEDAL 1
PEDAL 2
CONTROLS
VOLUME
MOD.
SER.
AC~
MADE IN ITALY by GENERALMUSIC
D Fl N
US
LEFT
RIGHT/M
AUDIO IN
OUT 1
EXT.
OUT 2
LEFT
RIGHT/M
AUDIO OUT
SPEAKERS
LM
IN
MIDI
NE
RA
OUT 1
GE
OUT 2
SIC
CONTRAST
LMU
RGB
ERA
“COMPLIES WITH THE LIMITS FOR A ”CLASS B“ COMPUTING
DEVICE PURSUANT TO SUBPART J OF PART 15 OF FCC RULES”
TV
VIDEO OUT
GEN
POWER
SWITCH
(WX400)
VIDEO
TV - RGB
PEDAL
BOARD
GENERALMUSIC
CONNECTING THE POWER CABLE
Your WX runs on a voltage that matches with the voltage in your area. If you face the
rear panel of WX2, the power connector is on the right hand side, while on WX400, it
is on the left hand side.
After connecting the power cable to the WX end, plug the other end into an earthed
(grounded) outlet. If your power source does not have an outlet that matches the plug on
the power cable, do not defeat the safety feature by changing plug on the power cable but
install the correct grounded outlet. This will reduce the risk of a shock hazard and avoid
problems with audio hum.
Owner's Manual
Getting Started
1 - 10
POWER SWITCH
The power switch on the WX2 is located on the rear panel - on the WX400, it is positioned
on the extreme right hand side of the keyboard.
THE INTERNAL AMPLIFIER
WX Sounds are enhanced by 20+20 Watt Stereo Amplification in the WX2 and 40+40
W Stereo Amplification in the WX400.
SPEAKERS SOCKET (WX400)
The WX400 includes a sound box containing the instrument’s speakers. The box is
connected to the “SPEAKERS” socket on the rear panel by means of the cable (with a
stereo jack) attached to the box. Read the WX400 assembly instructions.
The Master potentiometer on the WX control panel controls the instrument’s overall
volume.
AUDIO OUT LEFT-RIGHT/M OUTPUTS
If you want to unleash more audio power in stereo, you can connect a mono audio cable
to each of the “Audio Out” jacks marked Left, Right/M. Connect the other end of each
cable to your mixing board or PA system inputs.
If only one input is available, use the WX’s Right/M output to get the full signal in mono.
THE EFFECTS SEND/RETURN JACKS (Ext ’‘ Out 1 - Out 2)
Sound sources which connect to the WX Audio In (L/R) cannot be processed by the WX
Effects Processor. The Effects Send/Return outputs can be used to process instruments
connected to the Audio In inputs and then return them to the main WX mix.
CONTRAST
OUT 2
OUT 1
IN
THRU
PEDALBOARD
DAMPER
PEDAL 1
MIDI
PEDAL 2
VOLUME
CONTROLS
Output (from instrument connected
to Audio In)
Return (to internal amplification
and/or Audio Out )
Tip
To Effect
LEFT
RIGHT/M
OUT 1
AUDIO IN
EXT.
Ring
From Effect
SEND/RETURN CABLES
OUT 2
LEFT
RIGHT/M
AUDIO OUT
Send/Return
RGB
Send/Return
TV
VIDEO OUT
Effects Device
Effects Device
Each EXT ‘’ jack (Out 1 - Out 2) on the WX rear panel is a stereo jack. If you connect
a Send/Return cable to one of these jacks, the Tip connects to the output and the Ring
serves as the signal Return. Therefore, you can process the sound with an external effect
(reverb, chorus, distortion, etc.) and return it to the WX internal amplifier and/or Audio
Outputs (L/R).
AUDIO IN LEFT-RIGHT/M INPUTS
To exploit the WX internal amplifier, you can connect audio cables from an external
sound source (a microphone, a musical instrument or a cassette recorder) to the input
Owner's Manual
Getting Started
1 - 11
[Left, Right/M] jacks. There is also a facility available in the Mixer function to control
the Treble, Bass and Volume of the incoming audio signal.
CONTROL PEDALS - CONNECTION OF THE FOOTPEDALS
WX has two jacks (Pedal 1 - Pedal 2) which can be programmed to accept Switch
Control pedals (logic) or Continuous Control pedals (analog), a third jack for a Switch
Control pedal (logic) marked Damper and a Continuous control jack marked Volume,
preset to control the standard MIDI Foot command - MIDI O4.
The default status of the programmable jacks varies according to the instrument.
In WX2 (all optional): Pedal 1 = Volume - Pedal 2 = Start/Stop - Damper = Damper
In WX400:Pedal 1 = Soft - Pedal 2 = Sostenuto - Damper = Damper.
The pedals in model WX400 are enclosed in the pedal cross-bar of the instrument. To
connect the Pedals, follow the assembly instructions at the begining of the owner’s
manual. The jacks are marked 1, 2 and 3 where jack 3 refers to the Damper.
The three Pedal jacks Pedal 1, Pedal 2 and Damper are all function assignable and have
reversible polarity options, allowing the connection of pedals of different brands.
PEDALBOARD
You can connect a Pedalboard to this jack.
MIDI CONNECTIONS
The MIDI implementations are one of the attractions of WX, which makes it an excellent
MIDI controller. Both models are fitted with a MIDI IN, a MIDI THRU and two MIDI
OUT ports (Out 1 - Out 2).
The WX2/WX400 Keyboard will respond to Note messages transmitted to MIDI IN for
all notes C-1 – G9 (note numbers 0 - 127). In some cases, the higher notes will not sound.
HEADPHONES
Both WX models have a headphone jack on the left front edge of the instrument, below
the Track-ball.
IMPORTANT:
The VIDEO outputs
are operative only if
the instrument is fitted
with the optional
VIDEO INTERFACE
(a small printed
circuit).
Models not equipped
with the V.I. are
identified by a removable label applied near
the rear panel Video
Out sockets.
Connect a pair of headphones for private listening without disturbing others in the same
room. The headphone Volume is controlled by the Master Volume slider. Inserting the
headphone jack disconnects the internal speakers but does not affect external amplification if used.
THE VIDEO INTERFACE - VIDEO OUT JACKS (TV and RGB)
These two rear-panel outputs provide various possibilities of interfacing with a monitor.
If you possess an “ATARI” type colour monitor, the 13 pin DIN connector marked RGB
sends a signal which is compatible (100%) with the standard adopted by the said monitor.
For high quality images therefore, it is sufficient to connect the monitor directly to the
WX RGB connector using the cable supplied with the monitor.
To connect your WX to a domestic TV screen, the latter must be equipped with a SCART
connector, or a COMPOSITE VIDEO jack. In the first case, you can connect the RGB
output directly to the SCART connector by means of the supplied video cable. In the
Owner's Manual
Getting Started
1 - 12
second case, use is made of the RCA jack marked “TV” which sends a “composite video”
signal. Attention! This is not a modulated signal and should not be connected to the TV
aerial socket!! This signal is analogous to the one used by domestic video recordings,
therefore, it is sufficient to use a normal RCA cable normally supplied with video
recorders. In this case, however, the quality of the image is inferior to that obtained from
the first two cases.
IMPORTANT:
The VIDEO outputs
are operative only if
the instrument is fitted
with the optional
VIDEO INTERFACE
(a small printed
circuit).
Models not equipped
with the V.I. are
identified by a removable label applied near
the rear panel Video
Out sockets.
Note:
You can connect to a
colour computer
monitor provided it is
fitted with a SCART
socket.
As a last resort not foreseen by the specifications, you can connect to a video recorder
that is already connected to a TV, exploiting the rear-panel TV RCA jack. This is the only
case where you can project the images generated by WX on a TV screen not equipped
with a SCART connector or a composite video input. The quality of the images, however,
is greatly reduced owing to the exploitation of the modulator incorporated in the video
recorder.
The following table summarises all the possibilities:
MONITOR
VIDEO OUT
ACCESSORIES
ATARI
(Colour)
RGB
(Standard Atari
cable)
TV or Computer
Scart
RGB
WX VIDEO
CABLE
TV
Video input
TV
RCA VIDEO
CABLE
TV
TV
Video Recorder
RCA Video cable
POWERING UP
The power switch on model WX2 is located next to the power cable connector on the rear
panel. Model WX400 has the power switch located on the extreme right of the keyboard
facia.
When you power up, the display shows the WX2 or WX400 logo for a few seconds, then
the “Real Time Performance” display will appear.
The Graphic Liquid Crystal backlit display is your principal means of communication
with the instrument. A glance at the display shows you where you are at all times and
pressing a button on the control panel corresponds to a display change almost every time.
The display’s contents are discussed in a later chapter.
Owner's Manual
Getting Started
1 - 13
CONTRAST
If the display appears too dark or too light, you can adjust the contrast by means of the
small rear-panel control. It may require adjustment for different viewing angles.
The Keyboard
The WX Keyboard sends and receives Attack and Release velocity, sends mono
(channel) Aftertouch messages and receives mono and poly Aftertouch messages.
MASTER
Master Volume Slider
This slider controls the volume of the Stereo Audio Output pair and the headphone jack.
The Ext Out 1 and Out 2 outputs and MIDI Volume are not affected by the Master
Volume slider.
Track Ball
This control provides the Pitch and Modulation functions, the first obtained by left/right
movements, the second by up/down movements. Intermediate levels are also possible
with diagonal movements, obtaining both effects simultaneously.
Both controls are fixed and cannot be programmed. However, both controls can be
enabled or disabled for each Track of any Performance.
Before getting to grips with your unit, set the Internal
clock and calendar....
Your WX has a digital clock and calendar which is backed by a re-chargeable NickelCadmium battery. When the unit is switched off, the clock/calendar continues to operate.
Every time the instrument is powered up, the battery is re-charged.
Procedure
◆
Press CLOCK in the Edit section to access Clock mode:
◆
Press the Function button (F1…F8) corresponding to “HOUR” and rotate the Dial
to set the correct hour.
◆
Repeat the procedure for the Minutes and Seconds.
◆
Pass to the Calendar by selecting “DAY” and rotate the Dial to select the correct
day.
◆
Repeat the procedure for the “MONTH” and “YEAR”.
◆
Press “RUN” to start the Clock/Calendar.
◆
Press “CLOCK” or “ESC” to escape from the display.
Owner's Manual
Getting Started
1 - 14
USE ONLY GENERALMUSIC SOFTWARE
It is important that you use only Generalmusic software! Whether you are an amateur or
a professional, you should know that:
a)
any software that you use must comply with the laws currently in force, with the
SIAE (Italian Authors and Editors Society), with copyright laws and with
publishers who reserve all the rights for public viewing and synchronisation of
texts (WX);
b)
Generalmusic disks comply in all respects with the laws currently in force;
c)
our software is original, unedited, programmed by highly expert technicians/
musicians who are perfectly acquainted with all Generalmusic equipment;
d)
the quality of our library, in continuous expansion with the latest titles from the
recording industry as well as the classics for all musical tastes, is unanimously
recognised and at your complete disposal from the best musical instrument stores.
All original Generalmusic disks have the Generalmusic logo printed on the metal
protection plate and on all our covers.
GEN
ERA
LM
US
IC
®
For your keyboard or expander, ask your dealer only for original Generalmusic software.
Owner's Manual
Getting Started
2-1
CHAPTER 2 - INTERFACE BASICS
In this chapter, you can learn how to move around the control panel and start to get
acquainted with the principal playing modes as well as the selection procedures. The
illustration below shows how the instrument’s control panel is divided into various
zones, each providing a primary operation: edit mode, navigation and data entry,
sequencer edit, performance & style bank selection, sequencer and user controls and
sound bank selection.
EDIT
MODES
NAVIGATION AND DATA ENTRY
EDIT
DISK
MIXER
STATUS
PERF
EFF1/2
SPLITS
SEQ. EDIT
MASTER
MASTER
SOUNDS
E
N
T
MIDI
E
S
C
ARRAN
CLOCK
PAGE-
PAGE+
PIANO
CHROM
ORGAN
GUITAR
BASS
STRING
ENSEM
BRASS
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
SOUND BANKS
REED
PIPE
SEQUENCER
EDIT
SYNLD
SYNPAD
SYNEFF
F7
F7
F8
F8
PERF 1
SEQUENCER & USERS
ETHNIC
DRUMS
SAMPLES
SOUND BANKS
REC
SCORE
TEMPO
SYNC
PERF 2
PERF 3
P.SONG
STYLE 1
COPY
MOVE
ERASE
INS/DEL TRANSP
QUANT
MICRO
NAME
OPTION
UNDO
DEMO
STYLE 2
STYLE 3
STYLE 4
PERFORMANCES & STYLES BANKS
M.PERF
SONGS
SEQUENCER CONTROLS AND USERS
DANCE
BEAT
ROCK'n
JAZZ
LATIN
FOLK
ETHNIC
POP
PERFORMANCE/ STYLE BANKS
NAVIGATION AND DATA ENTRY
Navigation and Data Entry tasks are performed within the Display area and include the
Cursor Diamond, the Data Entry Wheel, the Ent/Esc buttons and the Function buttons
F1…F8. The PAGE+ and PAGE- buttons of the Edit section also contribute to the
navigating operations in the display area.
The display
The backlit LCD graphic display is certainly the most important interface between you
and the WX. A great deal of information is constantly available due to the display’s 240
x 64 pixel dimensions and each button pressed reflects a command or editing change.
Each mode displays functions and parameters organised into smaller, related groups and
the entire “picture” is called a Page. Accessing a mode for the first time opens an “entry
level page” and in many cases, the current mode will have one or more additional pages,
selected with the PAGE+/- navigation buttons.
Below we examine the entry level display for the Status mode.
The lower display area shows the current mode (the mode identifier) and to the right,
PAGE+ reminds you that other pages follow.
Owner's Manual
Interface Basics
2-2
The left and right display areas above the identifier show various functions. The currently
selected function is shown in reverse-highlight.
THE CURSOR DIAMOND
Your principal navigating tool is the Cursor Diamond, arranged in four arrows in a
diamond fashion and a central “On/Off” switch, called the “Toggle”.
This control moves the display’s cursor around the currently selected page, in the
directions indicated by the “arrows”. The display cursor is a reverse-highlighted
rectangle which marks the value of the currently selected parameter.
Selecting Tracks or performing Editing tasks involves selecting various elements in the
display and changing their values. The Tracks or Parameters are selected by highlighting
them and their status is changed with Data Entry Dial or Toggle, as shown below.
The “TOGGLE” - the central Cursor diamond button
The central button of the Cursor Diamond is used as a Data Entry control but, its use is
limited to toggling between “On” and “Off” situations.
Zoom in - zoom out
Zoom out
Zoom in
In Bank situations where Tracks are displayed, the right cursor diamond zooms in on a
single Track or two layered Tracks, so that you can view them in larger type.
Normal size is restored with the left cursor diamond.
The Function buttons (F1…F8)
In many edit situations, the Function buttons F1…F8 are used to navigate from one
function to another.
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
The function of these buttons change depending on the currently selected mode.
EDIT
DISK
PERF
SOUNDS
MIXER
EFF1/2
MIDI
STATUS
SPLITS
ARRAN
CLOCK
PAGE-
PAGE+
The PAGE+ and PAGE- buttons of the Edit section
The two buttons are exclusively used to change page. Edit modes which consist of more
than one page will show PAGE+ on the entry level page. Depending on how many pages
follow, you will see “Page+/Page-” or “Page-” on subsequent pages PAGE + advances
to the next page, PAGE - returns to the previous one.
Owner's Manual
Interface Basics
2-3
DATA ENTRY
All Data Entry tasks are performed within the display area.
The Data Entry Wheel
Data Entry is performed mainly using the Data Entry Wheel (or Dial) to the right of the
display. This control is particularly useful owing to the possibility of providing
continuous entry of data - you can enter large or small changes very quickly.
Rotating in a Clockwise direction increases a value while an anticlockwise direction
decreases it.
Turning slowly increases/decreases by one increment. Turning rapidly jumps increments in large steps.
The Keyboard
The Keyboard is a source of alphanumeric entries when you are in situations which
require a name to be written to identify a Performance, a Song, a Disk or other.
SHIFT
E
N
T
E
S
C
SPACE
DELETE
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
1
R
2
S
T
3
U
4
V
5
W
X
6
Y
7
Z
,
8
.
9
0
Numbers and letters are entered one character at a time by pressing the relative key. After
the entry, the flashing cursor moves to the next position automatically. If you make a
mistake, there is a Return key (<––) to cancel the last entry, a Delete key to cancel the
entry at the cursor position, a Space key to create a space between two entries, a back
space key ( § ) to move the cursor backwards one step at a time and a Shift key to toggle
between uppercase and lowercase letters. The Dial moves the cursor left or right.
Up to 8 characters can be inserted (11 for Disk or SRam) and, when you have entered the
name, confirmation is required by pressing Enter.
MASTER
The Ent and Esc buttons
The Ent button accesses the SAVE PERFORMANCE command and confirms all
situations which show the message “Press Ent to confirm” or “Yes”.
The Esc (escape) button confirms a “No” situation, leaves the current editor and returns
to the main display.
Owner's Manual
Interface Basics
2-4
MASTER VOLUME
This slider regulates the overall Volume of the instrument.
THE EDIT MODES
The very heart and control centre of the entire WX system, the Edit section consists of
10 programming modes which render WX2/WX400 operative.
EDIT
DISK
PERF
SOUNDS
MIXER
EFF1/2
MIDI
STATUS
SPLITS
ARRAN
CLOCK
PAGE-
PAGE+
Each Edit mode is identified for the kind of operations that are performed in that mode.
In some cases, there is a sub-editor which provides a set of parameters necessary to edit
the function found in the current mode.
All the modes consist of an entry-level page and most have one or more pages which are
selected with the PAGE+ and PAGE- buttons.
You can pass from one accessed edit mode to another without having to leave the
currently selected mode.
The WX keyboard will always be active, regardless of the mode you are in. In fact, the
only time you can’t play it is when you are in the middle of a “Load All” disk operation
or while the unit is powering up.
THE SOUND BANKS
These contain all the Sounds available in WX, arranged in Family groups according to
General MIDI (Piano, Bass, Guitar, etc.).
PIANO
NOTE: 1
Only if all the Samples
slots are occupied. In
default conditions, the
total number of sounds
instantly available are
472.
CHROM
ORGAN
GUITAR
BASS
STRING
ENSEM
BRASS
ETHNIC
DRUMS
SAMPLES
SOUND BANKS
REED
PIPE
SYNLD
SYNPAD
SYNEFF
Each Family consists of three banks of eight related Sounds, except the Samples family
with eight banks of eight, and the Drum family with 16 banks of 8 (2 Banks are
exclusively Drumkits). All totals to over 500 Sounds1, instantly available in all playing
modes.
Owner's Manual
Interface Basics
2-5
THE SEQUENCER & USERS CONTROLS
Here you will find the Function buttons F1…F8, with which most of the selections are
made, the SONG button to access the selection of the Songs and the SEQUENCER
controls (Rec, <<, >>, Tempo, etc.). The Sequencer also makes use of the Start/Stop and
Cont buttons in the group on the extreme left of the keyboard.
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
M.PERF
SONGS
SEQUENCER & USERS
REC
SCORE
TEMPO
SYNC
Also included is the SCORE facility, which permits you to see the lyrics of a song across
the display in synchronisation with the music being played. There are also several
viewing options that are discussed in the relevant chapter. You can view the images
generated by WX on a normal domestic TV screen or a coloured computer monitor.
THE PERFORMANCE AND STYLE BANKS
These buttons access the four playing modes, each based on a “Performance”.
PERF 1
PERF 2
PERF 3
P.SONG
STYLE 1
STYLE 2
STYLE 3
STYLE 4
PERFORMANCES & STYLES BANKS
DANCE
BEAT
ROCK'n
JAZZ
LATIN
FOLK
ETHNIC
POP
The top row contains three banks of REAL TIME PERFORMANCES (24), a bank of
SONG PERFORMANCES (8) and four banks of PROGRAMMABLE STYLES (32).
The bottom row contains the INTERNAL STYLES (64), divided in eight families
according to the type of music (Folk, Latin, Pop...).
THE SEQUENCER EDIT SECTION
This section of primary importance unites all the Edit functions of the SEQUENCER,
where you can programme Songs and Styles and edit every event recorded.
SEQ. EDIT
MASTER
COPY
MOVE
ERASE
INS/DEL TRANSP
QUANT
MICRO
NAME
OPTION
UNDO
DEMO
Some of the major features of this section are: the “Microscope”, where you can view
and edit every recorded event in every track of a multi-track sequence, the “Master”
track, a “ghost” track where elements common to all tracks are recorded (time signature,
tempo variations, Performance changes, etc.), the “Undo” function, a facility that
restores your last memorised recording, irrespective of what changes are made to the
current recorded status.
Within the same group are the DEMO button, which allows you to select one of the 7
Demo songs, or “All” to play them as a medley, and the OPTION button, predisposed
for new functions that rely on software (user programs) which can be loaded from disk
using the “Load User” option in the Disk Utilities.
Owner's Manual
Interface Basics
2-6
THE 4 OPERATING MODES
In this chapter we’ll examine the four principal operating modes and describe the basic
features of each mode and how to select them.
What the modes are
The modes render WX logical to work with and each mode is named for the kind of
operation you can perform while in that mode. While each mode differs in many respects,
they all have one thing in common - the Performance.
REAL TIME PERFORMANCE MODE
This mode provides one of the “media” for WX’s ROM Sounds and is the principal
source for real time playing. You can create multiple combinations (from 1 to 16 sounds
playing simultaneously) without having to think about using the sequencer. This mode
is selected by recalling one of the REAL TIME PERFORMANCE Banks (PERF 1,
PERF 2 or PERF 3).
The 8 available Performances within the accessed Bank are selected with the Function
buttons (F1…F8).
One interesting feature of Real Time Performances is that they “carry” user-programmed
Sounds. WX does not have a Sound Library where Sounds can be added, moved or
deleted. The 472 resident WX Sounds can, however, be modified and stored in the Real
Time Performances. Each Performance can store up to eight modified sounds and a
drumkit. More about this in the Edit Sounds chapter.
INTERNAL STYLE MODE
NOTE 1:
“Fixed” refers to the
fact that the recorded
sequences of the
Internal Styles are not
user-programmable.
The relative Style
Performances can,
however be modified
and saved.
The Internal Style mode is the principal source of fixed1 automatic Rhythms and
Arrangement patterns and is selected by recalling one of the Internal Style Banks (Dance,
Jazz, Pop, etc.).
The 8 available Styles are selected with the Function buttons (F1…F8). Each Style is
associated to a Style Performance.
Owner's Manual
Interface Basics
2-7
PROGRAMMABLE STYLE MODE
Identical to the Internal Style mode, the Prog. Style mode is user-programmable and
accessed through the Style Banks: STYLE 1, STYLE 2, STYLE 3, STYLE 4.
When you select one of the EMPTY Prog. Styles with the Function buttons (F1…F8),
you will be prompted to enter Record mode to create a new style.
Style recording is discussed in the relevant chapter further ahead (to escape from the
above display, press ESC).
The Styles generally consist of 4 polyphonic sections (tracks) engaged by the Sequencer,
plus one or two free sections which are played in real time on a divided (split) keyboard.
More about these in the relevant chapter.
SONG AND SONG STYLE MODE
This mode is the principal source of musical sequences recorded with the Sequencer and
is accessed by pressing the SONGS button. If Songs or Song Styles are present in
memory, they can be selected using the Function buttons (F1…F8).
Songs are multi-track recordings (up to 16 tracks) without the use of repeating sequences
such as those used in the Styles. A Song Bank can contain 1 Song and up to 8 Song
Performances.
Song Styles are user-programmable Songs which exploit the existing Internal or Prog.
Styles and allow you to record one of both “free” tracks (5 & 6). These are based on
repeating sequences (Riffs or Patterns) and rely on the Style Performances. Up to 8 Song
Style Performances can be associated to a Song Style, provided that the M. Performance
button is active (Sequencer & Users group).
Song Styles have 4 tracks engaged by the Sequencer and two free tracks to play or record
in real time - the maximum number of tracks in this case is always 6:
Owner's Manual
Interface Basics
2-8
Summary
You can play in Real Time Performance mode freely without engaging the Sequencer.
You can create up to 24 different Sound combinations which can be recalled instantly.
You can play one or two tracks with factory-programmed Rhythm and Arrangement
patterns by selecting from the 64 available Internal Styles.
You can play and record your own Rhythm and Arrangement patterns using the 32
Programmable Styles which can be created internally or loaded from disk.
You can playback and record Songs and Song Styles.
Owner's Manual
Interface Basics
2-9
SELECTION - using the modes
You can play your WX regardless of the mode you are in - in fact, the only time you
cannot play is when you are in the middle of a DISK LOAD ALL operation. You can even
play while you are formatting a disk!
To select the elements that make up the modes and to pass, therefore, from one mode to
another, use is made of a unique and instant selection system.
The fundamental element of the mode system is the “BANK” which consists of a group
of 8 elements, either Sounds, Performances, Styles or Songs.
Example:
If one of the SOUND BANKS are pressed, eight names corresponding to the eight
sounds belonging to the given “family” will be displayed in the lower part of the display.
By pressing one of the F1-F8 selection buttons, the sound corresponding to the button
pressed will be immediately selected in the reverse-highlighted track.
The same applies for the REAL TIME PERFORMANCES, the PROGRAMMABLE
STYLES, the INTERNAL STYLES and the SONGS.
Let’s go through some practical examples.
To select a Sound
The simplest thing about WX is Sound selection.
◆
Press one of the SOUND BANKS to select the required Sound family:
PIANO
CHROM
ORGAN
GUITAR
BASS
STRING
ENSEM
BRASS
ETHNIC
DRUMS
SAMPLES
SOUND BANKS
REED
PIPE
SYNLD
SYNPAD
SYNEFF
The selected Family is shown in the lower display area:
F1
◆
NOTE 1:
The newly selected
Sound Bank will not be
accessed until one of
the Sounds are selected.
This is a general rule
for all Banks.
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
Press one of the Function buttons (F1…F8) to assign the relative sound1 to the
selected (reverse-highlighted) track in the display:
Owner's Manual
Interface Basics
2 - 10
Second and third banks
EDIT
DISK
PERF
SOUNDS
MIXER
EFF1/2
MIDI
STATUS
SPLITS
ARRAN
CLOCK
PAGE-
PAGE+
The Sound Banks provide a maximum of 24 Sounds for each family, with the exception
of the SAMPLES family which provides 64 and the DRUM family with 16 Banks.
The Sounds are arranged in groups of eight in three different banks, accessed by pressing
the PAGE+ and PAGE– buttons in the Edit section.
The number displayed on the extreme left shows you which bank is currently selected.
SAMPLES
WX must be fitted with
the optional 2 Megabyte
Sample RAM to be able
to load Samples from
disk.
The SAMPLES family provides eight banks; the first two contain resident ROM
samples while the remaining six banks contain “empty” slots to memorise samples
loaded from disk.
Samples Bank 1
Samples Bank 2
The DRUMS family provides 16 Banks of percussion sounds, two of which have 8
Drumkits each (Banks 2 and 3):
To select a Real Time Performance
◆
Press one of the PERFORMANCE BANKS (Perf 1, Perf 2, Perf 3) in the
Performance and Style banks:
PERF 1
PERF 2
PERF 3
P.SONG
STYLE 1
STYLE 2
STYLE 3
STYLE 4
PERFORMANCES & STYLES BANKS
DANCE
BEAT
ROCK'n
JAZZ
LATIN
FOLK
ETHNIC
POP
The eight Performance names are shown in the lower display area:
◆
Press the Function buttons (F1…F8) to select the Real Time Performances.
F2
F7
Each Performance Bank provides 8 Performances, all of which are multi-timbral
configurations. You can modify the Real Time Performances to suit your requirements.
Owner's Manual
Interface Basics
2 - 11
To select an Internal Style
◆
Press one of the relative Banks (DANCE, BEAT, ROCK’N, etc.) from the lower
row of buttons in the Performance and Style Banks.
PERF 1
PERF 2
PERF 3
P.SONG
STYLE 1
STYLE 2
STYLE 3
STYLE 4
PERFORMANCES & STYLES BANKS
DANCE
◆
BEAT
ROCK'n
JAZZ
LATIN
FOLK
ETHNIC
POP
Press one of the Function buttons (F1…F8) to select an internal Style.
F2
F6
To select a Programmable Style
◆
Press one of the relative Banks (STYLE 1, STYLE 2, STYLE 3, STYLE 4) from
the upper row of buttons in the Performance and Style Banks.
PERF 1
PERF 2
PERF 3
P.SONG
STYLE 1
STYLE 2
STYLE 3
STYLE 4
PERFORMANCES & STYLES BANKS
DANCE
◆
BEAT
JAZZ
LATIN
FOLK
ETHNIC
POP
Press one of the Function buttons (F1…F8) to select a Programmable Style.
F1
Recording Styles:
Complete explanations
on how to record a Style
are found in the Styles
chapter.
ROCK'n
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
◆
You will be prompted to enter Record mode to start recording a new style.
◆
Press ESC (no) to escape from the display.
Owner's Manual
Interface Basics
2 - 12
To select a Song
◆
Press the SONG button in the SEQUENCER & USERS section to access Song
mode.
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
M.PERF
SONGS
SEQUENCER & USERS
REC
◆
SCORE
TEMPO
SYNC
If one or more Songs are present, press one of the Function buttons (F1…F8) to
select a Song.
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
◆
If a Song is not resident in memory, you will be prompted to enter Record mode
to start recording the Song.
◆
Press ESC (no) to escape from this display.
Recording Songs:
Complete explanations
on how to record a
Song are found in the
Sequencer chapter.
Conclusion
From these very simple operations, we can conclude that the two rows of buttons across
the lower part of the control panel are selectors for the single elements (sound, style,
performance, song) and they provide a means of passing from one mode to another.
The keypads on both sides of the display area are used to gain access to all the Edit modes
(modification of the principal parameters of the instrument [Edit section] and of the
recorded events [Seq Edit]).
Owner's Manual
Interface Basics
3-1
CHAPTER 3 - PERFORMANCES, TRACKS &
ROM SOUNDS
This chapter tells you something about three elements common to all playing modes the Performances, the Tracks and the ROM Sounds.
THE PERFORMANCES
By “PERFORMANCE”, we refer to the union of appropriately programmed parameters
(multi-timbral combinations, volumes, transpose, panpot, midi channels, etc.), or the
possibility of recalling a particular setting of all the parameters instantly by pressing a
single button.
The “Performance” can be considered as the basic “medium” for all the playing modes;
in fact, whatever mode the instrument is currently set to, its basic structure will always
be a Performance.
SAVE PERFORMANCE - how to memorise a modification
All modifications made to the current Performance can be saved. To memorise a
parameter in a Performance, press ENTER twice (once to access and once to confirm)
to gain access to the “SAVE PERFORMANCE” command.
Therefore, if you are playing with a Style, you can modify one or more parameters to suit
your personal requirements, save the result in the Performance and subsequently save it
to SRam (Static Ram) or to Disk for future use.
Example:
◆
Starting with the default display showing the Sound “WX GRAND P” active to
play, press one of the Sound family buttons, assign a different Sound to the selected
track and memorise the modified Real Time Performance.
◆
Select the GUITAR family and assign “NYLGUIT” to the selected track by
pressing F1:
Owner's Manual
Performance, Tracks and Rom Sounds
3-2
◆
Press ENTER:
◆
Press ENTER again to confirm the Save Performance command. The modified
Real Time Performance will remain in memory until you modify it again or turn
off the instrument.
E
N
T
E
S
C
What parameters do the Performances memorise?
The amount of data memorised by a Performance is understandably immense, considering that you only need to press one button on the control panel to set the instrument to
the required playing mode.
The data memorised:
The Performance name, the “track configuration” and a set of specific data for every
memorised track, including the individual volume settings and MIDI In and Out
channels, the Out port, the track status (Local/MIDI In/Off, etc.), the destination
(Internal Sound engine or external on MIDI Out) and other parameters which include the
playing mode (poly/mono), the track transpose and tuning status, the aftertouch status
(on/off) and many others which are explained further ahead.
How the Performances of the playing modes differ
The Performances associated to the various playing modes differ in several aspects:
If you want to play Sounds in real time, you must select a REAL TIME
PERFORMANCE - this recalls one or more Sounds (up to 16, one
assigned to each track) together with a precise setting of all the
elements of the panel which the Real Time Performance can memorise.
To play a Rhythm and automatic Arrangement, you must select an INTERNAL
STYLE or a PROGRAMMABLE STYLE - these recall a series of
pre-recorded accompaniment patterns (Riffs - repeating patterns for
the Major, Minor, 7th chords, etc.) as well as a related setting of all the
parameters of the panel which the Style Performance can memorise.
To play a pre-recorded musical sequence, you must select a SONG - this recalls
a musical sequence based on a multi-timbral recording (up to 16
sounds) as well as up to 8 different settings of the parameters of the
panel (SONG PERFORMANCES), which can be recalled during the
execution of the Song.
N.B. Another mode, called the SONG STYLE, is also available, offering the
possibility of recording (and playing back) a Song by exploiting the existing
automatic accompaniment structures (Styles). This mode is explained in detail in
the relevant chapter further ahead.
Owner's Manual
Performance, Tracks and Rom Sounds
3-3
The Style and Song commands
The Start/Stop button
The Fill Var/Cont button
A Style or Song is started by pressing the
START/STOP button, and stopped with
the same button (Start/Stop).
The “Fill Var” function recalls a variation
of the basic Fill In of a Style and triggers a
variation of the basic Rhythm and Arrangement.
The Fill/Tap button
Fill: While a Style is playing,
this function “interrupts” the
basic rhythm and arrangement
pattern with a “Fill-In” (a short
sequence that breaks up a continuous pattern, rendering it
less monotonous). If the variation patterns is playing, it also
triggers the basic Rhythm and
Arrangement pattern.
If a Song is playing, the “Cont” function
starts the sequencer from the
point where it was stopped with
START
Start/Stop.
STOP
FILL VAR
CONT
FILL
TAP
The Intro/End button
Intro: if the sequencer is not
playing, this function recalls an
“Introduction” to a Style (a
“lead” into the Rhythm and arrangement before the basic pattern takes
over).
INTRO
END
Tap: If the Style or Song is not playing,
this button provides a means of establishing a personalised playing speed by beating time .
Tap three or four times on the button (depending on whether the Song or Style is in
3/4 or 4/4 time) with short, sharp strikes.
The Song or Style will start automatically
after the last beat.
End: pressed when a Style is playing, this
function recalls an “Ending” (a finishing
sequence, or “coda”, that brings the pattern
to an automatic stop).
Add Modulation/Pitch changes to your playing with the Track-ball
The Track-ball provides two
“fixed” effects which can be
enabled or disabled for all the
tracks of the current Performance.
Owner's Manual
Up/Down movements provide
Modulation (Vibrato).
Left/Right movements provide
Pitch changes ( –2/+2 semitones).
Performance, Tracks and Rom Sounds
3-4
A RAPID TOUR OF THE MAIN DISPLAY
Each zone of the display provides useful information, as shown with the following
example of the main display:
1.
The current status of the Tracks
ON
= Active Track
OFF
= Mute Track (temporarily “turned off” or “disconnected”)
Other messages encountered:
KYB
SEQ
MIDI
= Track only active for the WX Keyboard (“Local”)..
= Track engaged by the Sequencer (cannot be played in real time).
= Track being used only by an external unit connected to MIDI IN.
2.
The Track numbers and the names of the Sounds assigned to them.
3.
The TEMPO window, where you can see the playing speed (Metronomic tempo)
of a Style or Song and the status of the sequencer Clock (INTernal or EXTernal).
In this display situation, the DIAL affects on the TEMPO value at all times.
4.
The CHORD window, where the chord played will be displayed when you are
playing with Internal or Program Style modes. The chord notation can be shown
in English or Italian (changed in the Status Edit mode).
5.
Indication of the currently selected playing mode, the Time Signature of a Style
or Song and the indicator of the SEQUENCER position (BAR 1 / 1 / 1).
6.
Bank of eight elements which can be selected with the Function buttons F1…F8
(Sounds, Styles, Performances, Songs).
Owner's Manual
Performance, Tracks and Rom Sounds
3-5
SOME SIMPLE OPERATIONS TO PERFORM WITH THE CURSOR DIAMOND AND TOGGLE
Mute or activate a Track
◆
Press the TOGGLE to mute a Track shown in reverse highlight:
Press
this
button
A Muted track is temporarily deactivated, both for the keyboard as well as an
external device communicating with WX on MIDI IN.
◆
Re-activate the selected Track by repressing the Toggle.
Select tracks and create multi-track situations
The tracks shown “off” can be selected with the Up or Down cursor arrow and they can
be activated at will with the Toggle.
◆
The easiest action is by using a combined motion of the thumb and forefinger on
the Up or Down cursor arrow and on the Toggle to select and activate the Track.
An example is shown below using the Down arrow:
1. THUMB ACTION
2. FOREFINGER
ACTION
View a Sound in large type
◆
Press the right cursor diamond to “zoom in” on the active Track and view the Sound
in large type:
◆
Press the left cursor arrow to restore normal Track dimensions.
Owner's Manual
Performance, Tracks and Rom Sounds
3-6
◆
Two layered sounds can be viewed in large type by striking the right cursor arrow:
◆
Strike the left cursor arrow to return to normal display dimensions. You cannot
“zoom in” on situations consisting of three or more tracks.
N.B. Layered Sounds do not necessarily have to be consecutive.
Split Sound Tracks
Sounds can be programmed to play across user-defined keyboard extensions using the
Split function.
The two layered Sounds can be split so that Acoustic Bass plays on the left side of the
keyboard (A0-A#3), while the WXGrand plays on the right (B3-C8):
Detailed explanations of the SPLIT function appear in the Edit section chapter.
Mixing the Sound volumes of a multi-timbral situation
Sound combinations can be mixed by accessing the Mixer Edit mode which shows a
graphical representation of the status of each track.
Each track of the currently active Performance can be mixed within the values 0 - 127
by selecting with the Down cursor arrow and rotating the Dial to vary the Volume . See
the Mixer Edit mode in the Edit section chapter for more details. Press Esc or Mixer to
escape from this display.
Owner's Manual
Performance, Tracks and Rom Sounds
3-7
THE TRACKS AND THE TRACK CONFIGURATION
The term “Tracks” has been mentioned several times therefore, at this stage, it is
important to clarify what a Track is and what “Track configuration” refers to.
Tracks and the Real Time Performance
A Track NOT utilised by the Sequencer can contain a Sound to play in real time on the
WX keyboard or on an external controlling device connected at the WX MIDI IN.
For each Real Time Performance track, you can regulate an appropriate set of parameters
and the entire set of elements can be memorised by the Performance.
Tracks and the WX Sequencer
If a track is engaged by the Sequencer, it can contain a certain “string” of events (or notes)
and an assigned Sound.
In a typical example, a Song consists of a Drum track containing a sequence of recorded
notes that make up the Rhythm, a Bass track that provides the Bass accompaniment, a
Guitar track for an arrangement, and so on....
The Track Configuration
The Track Configuration refers to the individual status of every track of the Performance
with respect to its “reaction” with the keyboard, whether it accepts MIDI IN events and
the destination (internal sound engine or MIDI Out) of the events it generates.
The Track Configuration can be programmed in the Edit Performance mode (see the Edit
section chapter from more details).
The number of Tracks in Real Time Performance mode
◆
From one to sixteen tracks can be assigned to the keyboard or exploited by an
external sequencer.
The number of Track in Styles (and Song Styles) mode
◆
Four tracks (from numbers 1 to 4) can be engaged by the WX Sequencer (usually,
drum, bass and two accompaniment), or assigned to the keyboard or exploited by
an external sequencer.
◆
Two tracks (from numbers 5 to 6) can be assigned to the keyboard, or used by an
external sequencer.
The number of Tracks in Song mode
From one to sixteen tracks freely assignable to the WX Sequencer or keyboard, or
to an external sequencer;
1 LYRICS track to store the eventual song lyrics;
1 CHORDS track to store the chord symbols;
1 SCORE track to store the melody line written as musical notes on a staff.
Owner's Manual
Performance, Tracks and Rom Sounds
3-8
The SCORE function
The last three functions on the previous page are all found in the SCORE function and
they represent, without doubt, the major innovation of this instrument.
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
M.PERF
SONGS
SEQUENCER & USERS
REC
SCORE
TEMPO
SYNC
◆
As well as the backing of a Song, WX gives you the melody line written as music
notes on the staff (also called “Stave”) together with the lyrics;
◆
the LYRICS;
◆
the LYRICS IN LARGE TYPE;
◆
and the CHORD NOTATION.
All can be viewed on the instruments display, or it can be projected on a normal domestic
TV, or a colour computer monitor (such as an “ATARI” and others).
You can, also choose to see these elements singularly, simultaneously, or combined on
both media: for example, you can see the chords of a song in the WX display and the lyrics
on a normal domestic TV screen. More about this later.
Owner's Manual
Performance, Tracks and Rom Sounds
3-9
THE ROM SOUNDS
This section takes a look at the Sounds permanently resident in the WX - in ROM (Read
Only Memory). The technology used to generate the sounds is the most up-to-date,
including PCM Samples, Wavetables, Multiloop, Crossfade Multiwave and Subtractive
synthesis.
Dual and Single Oscillator Sounds
The 32 Oscillators incorporated in WX are exploited in two ways to produce “Dual
Oscillator” and “Single Oscillator” Sounds.
Dual Oscillator” Sounds are generated by two oscillators which operate in synchronised
pairs. In one of the variations of the sophisticated sound generating system, called
“Multi-loop Crossfade Looping”, the sampled waveform “header” incorporated in a
Sound is “read” alternately with continuous fading to produce a more natural sound. The
graphical representation below illustrates how two oscillators are exploited to produce
a sound:
BrtPiano (Oscillator 1)
Multiloop Vector
BrtPiano (Oscillator 2)
In order to obtain this result, however, the 32 Oscillators are employed to produce 16 note
polyphony.
“Single Oscillator” Sounds are characterised by the use of a single oscillator for each
sound. The 32 oscillators are, therefore, fully exploited and the resulting sounds have a
maximum polyphony of 32 notes.
Therefore, if you play only one sound (a single track), you can obtain a maximum of 32
note polyphony using “Single Oscillator” sounds, or a maximum of 16 note polyphony
using a “Dual Oscillator” Sound.
Naturally, in situations consisting of two tracks, at the most, your polyphony is halved.
In multi-track situations, your maximum polyphony is governed by the sounds assigned
to the track of the currently selected Performance.
To distinguish between the two types of Sounds, you can refer to the ROM Sound table
in the Appendix which identifies the “Single Oscillator” sounds with an ASTERISK (*).
Drumkits and Sound Patches
A Drumkit is a percussion sound map where a different drum sound is assigned to each
note of the keyboard.
The 16 WX Drumkits occupy the second and third Banks of the Drums family. They are
recalled by selecting the relative Function button (F1…F8) after gaining access to the
Drums sound bank.
These type of “Sounds” incorporate a “Dynamic Switch”; this is a Dynamic threshold
below and above which different Sounds can be assigned so that playing harder triggers
Owner's Manual
Performance, Tracks and Rom Sounds
3 - 10
the sound on the higher dynamic level. For example, a note can play bongo low by
playing with a soft touch and bongo slap by playing harder.
Similar to the Drumkits are the Sound Patches which also incorporate a Dynamic
Switch. These sounds change character or even sound by playing harder. For example,
the Sound “Rhodx” is constructed by assigning “ElPiano2” to the lower dynamic level
and “ElPiano1” to the higher. Sounds shown with a cross (†) in the ROM Sound map
(in the Appendix) correspond to Drumkits and Sound Patch sounds.
How the Sounds are organised in ROM
The ROM Sounds are arranged in an Instrument Patch Map (Sound Library) with
corresponding Program numbers. The WX Sound Library is a fixed map which cannot
be re-arranged.
The Sounds fall into sixteen families of 3 Banks each, except the Samples family, which
consists of 8 Banks, and the Drums family which consists of 16. All the Banks of each
family contain similar instruments (except the Samples and Drums Families).
Therefore, the Piano Bank consists of: WXGrand, BrtPiano, ElGrand1, etc..
Similarly, the Guitar Bank consists of: NylGuitar, SteelGtr, JazzGtr, etc..
The ROM Sound Table is shown in the Appendix at the back of this manual.
The Drums Family
The Drums family provides 16 Banks of 8 Sounds each. Banks 2 and 3 contain 8
Drumkits each and the standard GM Percussion map, in the form of the Drumkit
“DKStand1” shown below, in Bank 2.
China
ZappHi
ZappLow
BabyVox
Bass Drum Elec
Scratch1Hi
HouseClap
RimShot
HiHat Open1
HiHat Closed 2
HiHat Closed 1
RideHi
CrashHi
Vibraslap
Cowbell
Tambourine
Conga Hi
Bongos Low
Snap 1
Agogo Low
Timbale Low
Claves
Guiro Hi
Vox HiHat Closed
Triangle Short
Quica Hi
Darbuklo
Castanet
Door
Vox Tip
Voice 1
Empty
Empty
C8 Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
C7 BabyVox
Raspyride
Carhorn
Vox Tap
Water
Drop
Darbukhi
C6 Barchime
Celesta
Triangle Long
Quica Low
Woodblock Low
Woodblock Hi
Guiro Low
C5 Whistle 1 Low
Whistle 1 Hi
Cabasa
Agogo Hi
Timbale Hi
Conga Low
Conga Accnt
C4 Bongos Hi
Ride Low
Crash Low
Splash
Ride Cup
China
Tom Hi
C3 Grand Timp Hi
Tom Med
Grand Timp Med
Tom Low
Grand Timp Low
Snare Drum Rim1
Snare Drum 1
C2 Bass Drum 1
Bass Drum2
RimShot
Stick
Scratch1Low
Kitchen
ZappMed
C1 Roll
Crash
A0 Applause
Empty
Empty
Empty
DKStand1
NOTE 1:
Sounds with the higher
Program Change
numbers have up to 16
variations, with
Program Changes of
the type
116-1, 116-2… 116-15,
116-16.
See the Rom Sound
Table in the Appendix.
All the Bank 1 Sounds of the Families (otherwise called “Capital” sounds) with Program
Number XX-1 are organised according to General MIDI Standard. The remaining two
Banks provide some Variation Tones with program numbers of the type1; 1-2, 1-3, 2-2,
2,3… 21-2, 21-3, etc., generally considered as a GS Standard implementation.
All the WX Performances have a Drumkit assigned to MIDI Channel 10 (Track 10) to
comply with GM Standards.
Note: if the WX General MIDI function is set to “ON” (page 3 of the Edit MIDI
functions), all program changes received on MIDI Channel 10 are automatically
addressed to the WX Drumkits to comply with General MIDI Standards.
See the Edit MIDI chapter for more information regarding General MIDI.
Owner's Manual
Performance, Tracks and Rom Sounds
Disk & SRam
4-1
CHAPTER 4 - THE EDIT SECTION
EDIT
DISK
PERF
SOUNDS
MIXER
EFF1/2
MIDI
STATUS
SPLITS
ARRAN
CLOCK
PAGE-
PAGE+
We have already said that the EDIT SECTION is the heart and control centre of the
instrument.
In this chapter, we'll discuss the modes available, firstly from a general point of view
followed by a detailed description of each one.
General overview of the Edit Section
Nine Edit modes are available, each one identified for the kind of operations that are
performed in that mode.
In some cases you will find a sub-editor which provides a set of parameters necessary
to edit the function found in the current mode.
When you enter one of the modes for the first time, you will open an "entry-level page"
and others, if present, can be selected with the PAGE+ and PAGE- buttons.
The Edit section displays:
Most displays in this section have several things in common, as we can see by the
following Status display example:
1.
The Up and Down arrows on the extreme left refer to the Cursor diamond Up/
Down buttons. The items listed in the display can be selected by using these two
navigating tools.
2.
The DIAL symbol indicates that the Data Entry Wheel is active. In this case, it will
operate as a data entry control, in other situations, it moves the reverse-highlighted
zone up or down.
3.
The "ENT/ESC" phrase indicates that the buttons of the same name to the right of
the display are operative. ENT is always used to confirm a selection while ESC
escapes from the current Edit mode.
4.
The rectangle enclosing "PAGE+/-" indicates that, by pressing these buttons, you
can access other pages containing other functions. In the above case, these buttons
select the "General", "Microtuning" and "Videomonitor" pages.
5.
The lower part of the display shows, from left to right, the Edit mode identifier, the
type of function and, in some cases, the name of the page.
Once you get acquainted with these graphic elements, you’ll move around quickly and
easily in all display situations.
Owner's Manual
Edit Section
4-2
Disk & SRam
The Edit Section provides the following edit modes:
DISK
MIXER
STATUS
PERF
EFF 1&2
SPLITS
SOUNDS
MIDI
ARRANG
Accesses the four principal disk functions; Load, Save, Erase and Utility,
as well as the Static RAM. This last feature is an exclusive function
offered by WX which, unlike the much talked about buffered memory
that memorises the last situation prior to turning off, the SRam allows the
user to turn on the instrument with the situation effectively required.
Therefore, all the operations foreseen in this section can be carried out
either on the DISK-DRIVE or on the STATIC RAM.
The Utility page also offers the Load WS Song function - great for all
those WS users who don't want to lose all those WS disks!
Pressing the MIXER button gains access to the parameters relating to the
volumes of the various tracks, the panpot and several general controls of
the machine.
Facilities for the setting of all the general functions of the instrument not
tied to the Performance parameters, such as Master Transpose/Tuning,
Keyboard Dynamic and After Touch sensitivity, Pedal/Footswitch polarity settings and function assignments, etc., intonation scales and a Video
monitoring section (score and lyric settings, monitor view mode, etc.).
This page also provides the function that permits you to toggle
between English and Italian chord notations, displayed in the Chord
box when playing with Styles.
Gains access to the track configuration, where you can configure the way
each track reacts with the WX keyboard, MIDI IN events, the WX sound
engine and MIDI OUT destination, as well as all the programmable
Performance parameters assignable to each track, such as the mode (poly,
mono), detune, transpose, effects 1&2 assign, pedal/footswitch assign,
priority, name and others.
Gains access to the two Digital Effects processors (Effect 1 and Effect 2)
providing a selection of static and dynamic effects as well as editing
facilities for both.
Where you can program the individual keyboard extensions of all tracks
of your Performances. This function also provides the programmable
Chord Split position for the Styles.
This button accesses the Macro-editing facility which allows a very
extensive Sound editing capacity with only a few parameters.
Depending on whether you enter this mode with a Sound or a Drumkit,
you will have at your disposal two different Sound edit modes.
Where you can configure the MIDI IN and OUT channels for each track,
set the MIDI IN/OUT filters and control other parameters such as
Internal/External Clock, MIDI Merge, System Exclusive, and others. Of
special interest is the General MIDI function which guarantees GM
Standard operation when you load Standard MIDI Files generated by
instruments of other manufacturers.
Accesses the Arranger where you can set all the automatic functions
relative to the Styles, such as One finger, Bass Follow, Harmony, etc..
Owner's Manual
Edit Section
Disk & SRam
4-3
DISK AND STATIC RAM
General information
As you become more familiar with your WX, you will discover the practical advantages
of working with disks and the Static Ram because of the power and flexibility that these
two elements give you.
DISKS give you the possibility of building up a vast library of Sounds (Performances),
Styles, Songs and loading/saving MIDI Standard File data.
The SRam provides you with the possibility of storing indispensable data permanently
without the need of loading it each time you turn on your WX.
For example, you can store a personalised Real Time Performance in SRam that you
know you are going to use often - when you turn on your instrument, you will find your
Performance ready to play.
The WX disk drive uses 3.5'’ High Density micro floppy disks and incorporates an
initialisation process which formats them with a capacity of 1.44 Megabytes.
NOTE 1:
MIOS = Musical
Instrument Operating
System (an exclusive
Generalmusic System).
The data is memorised in the floppy Disks and in SRam under the form of files and these
“documents” are read by the MIOS1 operating system incorporated in the instrument.
Precautions to take when handling Disks
The user not so familiar with Disk operating procedures is advised to read through the
precautions to take when working with Disks. These serve to introduce newcomers to the
common methods of working with floppy disks and the Disk Driver, as well as some
basic precautions to take when working in this environment. Those already familiar are
not obliged to read all but another minute of reading time may tell you something that
you don’t already know.
One factory-preset Demo Disk is supplied with the WX2 and WX400. It contains several
Songs with Lyrics which can be recalled in the Display and used to sing along with the
Song in playback.
What precautions should you take with your Demo disk?
Before you begin working with the Disk Drive, you should acquire at least 1 new
unformatted disk that you will use to make backup copy of your factory Demo disk.
Once the data from the Demo disk has been loaded, you should make a backup copy by
saving all the data in the instrument memory to a new Disk. When you’ve finished, store
the original in a safe place, far away from transformers (basically all electronic
equipment), loudspeakers (magnets), tape decks (the erase head) and heat sources.
Other simple rules to follow are:
◆
◆
◆
Do not slide open the protective disk shutter as this may cause damage to the disk.
Damaged disks should be thrown away as they may cause damage to the driver
recording head.
Avoid disk damage and Drive damage by removing disks when the driver is in
operation (operational led must be off );
Always have several empty disks close at hand;
Owner's Manual
Edit Section
4-4
Disk & SRam
WRITE PROTECT
To PREVENT Data
Recording, slide the tab
fully down towards the
edge of the disk.
To PERMIT Data
Recording, slide the tab
fully UP away from the
edge of the disk.
◆
◆
◆
◆
◆
Don’t forget to Write protect disks that contain your most important data and
maintain a set in a clean, safe place, free from dust, dirt, smoke, ash, liquids,
extreme temperatures and direct sunlight;
Always put the correct size label on the disk (within the outlined location on top
of the disk) and avoid layering labels, as excess disk thickness may cause
misalignment of the drive cartridge. Write on labels with a soft felt pen. Don’t use
lead pencils and don’t use erasers;
Save frequently to avoid loss of edit data due to unforeseen circumstances (power
failure or other). You don’t have to memorise 10 Performances with edit data
before saving. Get into the habit of saving data which might not be easy to replace;
Organise your saved data properly by identifying and documenting it correctly in
order that you know exactly where to go and look for data quickly without wasting
time;
Lastly, remember that loading replaces the current memory contents with that of
the disk. Before loading from disk, think twice as you may be about to erase data
that still hasn’t been saved on disk.
How to load a floppy disk into the Disk Drive
Load your disks into the Drive as shown in the following diagram:
This green led , when on,
Shows that the driver is
in motion.
Orient the Disk
correctly,
shutter first,
hub down.
Owner's Manual
Press this button
to extract the
floppy disk.
Insert the floppy Disk
in the direction shown
until is fits into place
with a “click”.
Edit Section
Disk & SRam
4-5
DISK OPERATING MODES
Press DISK in the Edit section to access the four principal DISK or SRam operations LOAD, SAVE, ERASE and UTILITY.
The first page usually shows the LOAD operations:
EDIT
DISK
PERF
SOUNDS
MIXER
EFF1/2
MIDI
STATUS
SPLITS
ARRAN
CLOCK
PAGE-
PAGE+
Other pages are accessed with the PAGE+ and PAGE- buttons:
How to toggle between DISK and SRam
All the pages of the Disk/SRam edit modes show a small rectangle in correspondence with
the F5 function button:
F5
If DISK operations are currently selected, press F5 (corresponding to SRam) to access
the SRam operations.
Conversely, if SRam operations are currently selected, press F5 (corresponding to Disk)
to access DISK operations.
Loading data into SRAM
It should be clear to the user that data cannot be loaded from a DISK directly into
SRAM - you can only go via the instrument's Memory.
For example, if you want to load some Songs from DISK into SRAM, first you must load
the Songs from Disk into MEMORY, then, SAVE the Songs from MEMORY to SRAM.
All the operations described in this section are valid for both types of operation, unless
otherwise indicated.
Owner's Manual
Edit Section
4-6
Disk & SRam
LOAD OPERATIONS
NOTE 1:
The entire contents of
SRam are loaded
automatically when the
instrument is turned on.
Use the LOAD function to load the contents of your Disks, or of the Static RAM, into
the instrument's memory1. When you load data, the data previously in internal memory
will be overwritten and lost.
The four main LOAD operations are:
Load All - Load Bank - Load Single and Preload.
1.
N.B. the “Wait Please”
message does not
appear when you load
data from SRam into the
instrument's internal
memory.
NOTE 2:
Loading times
Loading times depend
on the disk contents and
the type of data loaded.
Times vary from 1
second to
approximately 1 minute.
LOAD ALL DISK (or all SRAM)
1.1
This mode loads all data (except MIDI files) from the inserted Disk or from
SRam into the internal Memory:
1.2
Confirm the operation with ENTER.
The "WAIT PLEASE" message appears together with an animated clock indicating
that WX is examining the type of disk inserted or the type of data in SRam:
1.3
If the disk is a WX disk, you will be asked to confirm the operation before
proceeding. If you are performing an SRam operation, the same message
will be displayed:
1.4
Confirm with ENTER or quit the operation with ESC.
Confirmation of the operation is indicated by the "Loading" message2, the
animated clock, the green disk drive led and a familiar noise from the driver. Both
Disk and SRam operations show the same message:
When the message at the centre of the display disappears and the driver led turns
off, your data will be loaded.
Owner's Manual
Edit Section
Disk & SRam
4-7
Automatic loading
The LOAD ALL operation is performed automatically when you turn on your WX with
a DISK inserted in the driver.
NOTE 1:
The DISK has priority
over SRam.
If, instead, data is present in SRam and no disk is present in the driver1, turning on will
Load All from SRam into the instrument's volatile memory (RAM).
Automatic loading of all disk or SRAM data is a very useful method of setting your
instrument up automatically while powering up. During the loading process, you can
occupy yourself with other duties (cable connections, microphones, etc.).
Important
WX is supplied with a RAM of 2 Megabytes (for the Sequencer and Performance data)
and a Static RAM of 256 K Bytes. An optional 2 Megabytes of RAM (Sample RAM) is
available for the exclusive purpose of handling up to 48 additional Samples loaded from
DISK.
In future, an option to expand the Static RAM will be made available by GENERALMUSIC.
2.
NOTE 2:
The number of Songs
that can be loaded into
SRam will depend,
naturally, on the size of
the songs.
LOAD ALL SONGS
This operation loads all the Songs present on Disk or in SRam into internal memory. Up
to eight Songs2 can be loaded simultaneously.
The procedure is the same as for Load All Disk.
3
LOAD ALL STYLES
This operation loads up to 32 Styles simultaneously. The data will be positioned in the
PROGRAMMABLE STYLE BANKS.
The procedure is the same as for Load All Disk.
4
LOAD ALL PERFORMANCES
This operation loads up to 24 Performances belonging to the REAL TIME PERFORMANCE BANKS.
The procedure is the same as for Load All Disk.
Owner's Manual
Edit Section
4-8
Disk & SRam
5
NOTE 1:
WX instruments have a
2 Megabyte RAM which
houses the userprogrammed Songs and
Sounds. If you want to
load Samples, you must
fit the WX with the
optional 2 Megabyte
Sample RAM.
LOAD ALL SAMPLES
This operation loads all the Samples contained in the inserted DISK (up to a maximum
of 48), provided that the instrument is fitted with the optional Sample RAM 1. The
samples will occupy the SAMPLES family Banks from 3 to 8.
The procedure is the same as for Load All Disk.
LOADING SAMPLES FROM THE S-SERIES DISKS:
NOTE 2:
As samples tend to be
quite large in terms of
Memory, unless you
require all the samples
on disk, you are advised
to load only the ones
required one at a time,
in order to reduce the
long loading times.
If you have some disks belonging to the S-Series instruments (GEM/Generalmusic S2,
S3) which contain samples, you can load these into the WX using the standard Load All
Samples2 or Load Single Sample operations.
LOAD BANK MODE
1.
LOAD A SINGLE BANK OF STYLES (Programmable)
This operation loads a Bank containing up to 8 Programmable Styles (Bank 1 =
Style 1, Bank 2 = Style 2 and so on..).
1.1
Confirm the operation with ENTER.
After a short period, a new display appears showing the disk contents on the left
side and on the right, the Memory contents.
Note the “STYLE”
message
1.2
Use the Up/Down cursor arrows and the Dial to select the Bank to transfer
into Memory (at this point you can also opt to load the Style Performance
Banks - see “Style Performance option” on the next page).
Owner's Manual
Edit Section
Disk & SRam
4-9
1.3
Press ENT to start the loading operation:
1.4
Confirm the operation with ENTER:
1.5
Complete the operation with ESC to return to the main Load display.
N.B. An optional operation is provided with the F8 function button.
Important
For what concerns the
INTERNAL STYLES,
while it is possible to
vary the Sounds
assigned to all the
tracks (the volumes,
transpose parameter,
etc.), related to the
Internal Style
Performances, it is not
possible to cancel the
recorded sequences
contained in the first
four tracks.
In practice, you can
modify the parameters
of the Style
Performances, save the
modifications using the
standard “Save
Performance” function
and save the Bank of
Style Performances to
disk for future use.
Note the
“PERF”
message
This permits you to load single bank of Style Performances containing userprogrammed performances relating to the INTERNAL STYLES (Bank 1 = Dance,
Bank 2 = Beat, Bank 3 = Rock’n and so on...):
NOTE: You can only load a Style Performance Bank into its corresponding
Memory destination (Bank 1 to Bank 1, Bank 2 to Bank 2 and so on..).
2.
LOAD A SINGLE BANK OF REAL TIME PERFORMANCES
Use this operation to load a bank of Real Time Performances (Bank1 = Perf1, Bank2 =
Perf2, Bank3 = Perf3).
The procedure is the same as for Load Bank Style.
Owner's Manual
Edit Section
4 - 10 Disk & SRam
LOAD SINGLE MODE
NOTE 1:
The exception is the
Load Single Internal
Style Performance
operation - in this case,
you cannot load to a
preferred destination see “Load Single
Internal Style.
Use this operation to load single elements into the instrument's Memory from Disk or
SRam, according to your requirements. The Load Single mode procedures are the same
as those used in the previous Load Single Bank mode. By confirming the operation with
ENTER, the display situation allows you to select the single element required and the
position that it will occupy from the 8 available in Memory1.
1
LOAD SINGLE SONG
Use this operation to load a single Song into internal memory:
2
LOAD SINGLE PROGRAMMABLE STYLE
Use this operation to load a single Programmable Style into internal memory:
For example: if you load the Style 1 (showing the name it was given) from disk
into the Memory destination number 29, it will appear in Style Bank 4 corresponding to Function button F5.
Load Single Internal Style Performance:
An optional operation is provided with the F8 function button. This permits the
loading of a Single Internal Style Performance:
Note the “PERF
ONLY” message
You can choose a Style Performance from 64 user-programmed Performances
available but you cannot memorise them to a destination of your choice:
3
LOAD SINGLE PERFORMANCE
Use this operation to load a single Real Time Performance from disk or SRam.
Owner's Manual
Edit Section
Disk & SRam 4 - 11
4.
LOAD SINGLE SAMPLE
Use this operation to load Single Samples from WX disks, from S-Series disks, or from
SRam.
The Load Single Sample operation permits you to scroll through the WX or S-Series
samples available:
You can load a Sample to any destination available from Banks 3 to 8 of the Sample
family.
IMPORTANT:
Samples can only be loaded into the Sample Family Banks (3 to 8) if the instrument is
fitted with the optional 2 Megabyte Sample RAM. Up to a maximum of 48 Samples
can be loaded if the Sample RAM DISP is fitted.
5.
LOAD SINGLE MIDI FILE
This operation, although almost identical to the “Load Single Song” example outlined
on the previous pages, differs in the type of files displayed.
NOTE :
WX reads MIDI File
Format 0 (Single-track
files) and reads and
writes MIDI File
Format 1 (Multi-track
files which conserve the
Song’s Track partition,
records the Tempo and
Tempo variations as
well as the Time
signature).
What is a Standard MIDI File
This standard makes it possible to use sequence data regardless of the source equipment
or manufacturer. Files of sequencer data created on equipment that conforms to this
standard can be loaded and played back on the WX2/WX400.
The WX recognises Format 0 and Format 1 MIDI files:
Format 0: All data from Tracks 1-16 of a Song are contained on a single track.
Format 1: All data from Tracks 1 - 16 are conserved separately, in the same manner as
when the data is created.
In addition, sequence data created by the WX can be saved to disk as a Standard MIDI
Owner's Manual
Edit Section
4 - 12 Disk & SRam
File (see Save), making it possible to load and play back this data on other equipment.
IMPORTANT
If the Standard MIDI
File conforms to GM
Standards, the
GENERAL MIDI
function in the third
page of Edit MIDI
should be set to ON to
direct all program
changes on MIDI
Channel 10 to the WX
Drumkits.
NOTE 1:
You can isolate all the
MIDI files by pressing
F8 - this masks all files
present on Disk except
MIDI files and
facilitates the selection
of the required file.
“Load MIDI File” Loads a Song memorised by a Sequencer in a standard interchange
format, otherwise called the MIDI File.
The disk from which your WX reads MIDI Files, (or to which it saves MIDI Files), must
be one “initialised” by an Atari ST/STE/TT computer, or by a computer that works with
the MS-DOS operating system. Apple Macintosh files must be copied to a disk formatted
with Apple File Exchange™, AccessPC™ or other similar “utilities”. The disk can be
a 3.5” DD or 3.5” HD type.
5.1
Press ENTER:
The directory of the Atari/MS-DOS disk appears which may consist of several
items as well as some MIDI Files, which are identified by the “.MID” extension1:
5.2
Select the MIDI File to load as well as the destination to Memory:
5.3
Press ENTER twice:
5.4
The display updates to the new situation:
The internal Directory will show the converted MIDI File as a Bank/Song, but you
can change its name using “Name” in the Sequencer Edit section.
More about MIDI Files in the Edit MIDI and SEQUENCER chapter.
Owner's Manual
Edit Section
Disk & SRam 4 - 13
Preload
NOTE 1:
The Preload operation
is only operative with
WX disks.
This operation makes it possible to load a Song from Disk1 or SRam while the sequencer
plays back another.
The PRELOAD MODE, specially studied for use in live situations, permits songs to be
loaded with a reduced number of operations without stopping the sequencer.
1.
While a song is in playback mode, press DISK and select PRELOAD:
2.
Selecting “Preload” with the DOWN arrow gains direct access to the disk’s song
directory without pressing ENT. The song names will be displayed in correspondence to the function buttons.
3.
At this point you only need to press one of the F1-F8 buttons to start the loading
operation.
N.B. To escape from this option press ESC, while, to exit from this display without
escaping the current option, press the DISK button again. You can, therefore, load
a new song using only two manual operations.
Attention. The Preload operation can only be performed in Song mode. Attempting to preload in any other mode will display the following message:
Cancel the display with ESC.
Owner's Manual
Edit Section
4 - 14 Disk & SRam
SAVE OPERATIONS
Use these operations to save data from internal memory to Disk or SRam. When data is
saved to a Disk or SRam file which already exists, the old data will be lost. You can use
the Disk Protect Slider to keep important data from being accidentally overwritten.
The three principal SAVE functions are:
SAVE ALL, SAVE BANK and SAVE SINGLE.
SAVE ALL MODE
1.
SAVE ALL TO DISK (or to SRAM)
This operation saves the entire contents of the internal memory to Disk or SRam.
Start the procedure with ENT and, after the disk has been examined, press ENT
again to confirm or press ESC to cancel the operation without saving.
When the “saving” message disappears, the operation will be complete.
2.
Note 1:
Each Song corresponds
to a Song Bank which
can store up to 8 Song
Performances.
SAVE ALL SONGS
This operation saves all the Songs present in Memory to Disk or to SRam. Up to eight
Songs1 can be saved simultaneously with this operation.
The procedure is the same as for Save All Disk.
Owner's Manual
Edit Section
Disk & SRam 4 - 15
3
SAVE ALL STYLES
This operation saves up to 32 Styles (simultaneously) relating to the Programmable Style
Banks to Disk or SRam.
The procedure is the same as for Save All Disk.
4
SAVE ALL PERFORMANCES
This operation saves up to 24 Performances simultaneously relating to the Real Time
Performance Banks (Perf 1, Perf 2, Perf 3).
The procedure is the same as for Save All Disk.
5
NOTE 1:
WX instruments have a
2 Megabyte RAM which
houses the userprogrammed Songs and
Sounds. If you want to
load Samples, you must
fit the WX with the
optional 2 Megabyte
Sample RAM.
SAVE ALL SAMPLES
This operation saves of all the Samples contained in MEMORY (up to a maximum of
48 if the instrument is fitted with the optional Sample RAM1.
The procedure is the same as for Save All Disk.
SAVE BANK MODE
1.
SAVE A SINGLE BANK OF PROGRAMMABLE STYLES
Use this operation to save a Bank of 8 Programmable Styles (Bank 1 = Style 1, Bank 2
= Style 2 and so on..) to Disk or SRam.
1.1
Press ENTER and select the Bank of Styles as well as the destination to Disk
or SRam:
1.2
Press ENTER twice to confirm the operation.
Owner's Manual
Edit Section
4 - 16 Disk & SRam
Save a single Bank of Internal Style Performances
Important.
For what
concerns the
INTERNAL STYLES,
while it is not possible
to cancel the recorded
sequences contained in
the first four tracks, it is
possible to modify the
parameters of all the
tracks of the Style
Performances, save the
modifications using the
standard “Save
Performance” function
and save the Bank of
Style Performances to
disk for future use.
N.B. An optional operation is provided with the F8 function button. This allows you to
save a single bank of Style Performances containing user-programmed performances relating to the INTERNAL STYLES (Bank 1 = Dance, Bank 2 = Beat, Bank
3 = Rock’n and so on...):
NOTE: You can only save a Bank of Style Performance to its corresponding
destination on Disk or SRam (Bank 1 to Bank 1, Bank 2 to Bank 2, etc.).
2.
SAVE A SINGLE BANK OF REAL TIME PERFORMANCES
This operation saves a bank of Real Time Performances (Bank1 = Perf1, Bank2
= Perf2, Bank3 = Perf3) to Disk or SRam.
The procedure is the same as for Save Single Bank Styles.
SAVE SINGLE MODE
This mode saves the following single elements to Disk or SRam from the instrument's
Memory:
1
A SINGLE SONG
2
A SINGLE STYLE
3
A SINGLE PERFORMANCE
4.
A SINGLE MIDI FILE
The operations performed in Save Single mode are the same as those used in Save Single
Bank mode. By confirming the operation with ENTER, the display allows you to select
the single element to save as well as the position that it will occupy from the 8 available
on Disk or SRam.
Save Single MIDI File
WX converts sequence data to STANDARD MIDI FILES, format 1, making it possible
for instruments of other manufacturers to playback WX Songs (provided the units
conform to this MIDI Standard).
Format 1 MIDI Files conserve the separate track data (1-16) of a Song in the same manner
as when it was created.
The Song to MIDI FILE conversion follows exactly the same steps as all other Save/Load
Single operations, with the additional step where you can give the MIDI File a name.
Owner's Manual
Edit Section
Disk & SRam 4 - 17
All MIDI FILES are identified by the extension “.MID” which is “attached” to the
converted file automatically.
NOTE:
WX converts Songs into
Standard MIDI Files.
Song Styles are only
partially converted
(Tracks 5 and 6 if
recorded - the Style
Patterns are not
recognised).
IMPORTANT
If the Standard MIDI
File must conform to
GM Standards, the
GENERAL MIDI
function in the third
page of Edit MIDI
should be set to ON to
convert all program
changes relating to the
WX Drumkits on MIDI
Channel 10 to GM or
GS Standards.
Example:
1.
Set the display parameters to “Single” and “MIDI FILE”:
2.
Press ENTER and the directory of the Songs in Memory will be displayed:
If the disk contains several different files, an option that isolates all the MIDI files
present is provided by the F8 function button. When pressed, only files showing
the .MID extension are displayed.
3.
Select the Song to convert and press ENTER.
4.
After a short period during which the “Wait Please” message is displayed, the
display shows an active rectangular edit zone on the right where you can write the
new name of your converted file, using up to 8 characters.
5.
In this display situation, the keyboard converts to an alphanumeric source where
each key provides a letter or a number as well as other functions:
Shift = Capitals, Space, Delete at the cursor position, <–– [cancel previous entry],
§ [move cursor one step back].
6.
Inserting the first character moves the cursor one step to the right.
7.
Continue in this way until the name is fully written:
8.
Press ENTER once and once again to confirm, or Esc to cancel the operation:
Owner's Manual
Edit Section
4 - 18 Disk & SRam
9.
After a short period, the SONG will be converted to the MIDI FILE, shown by the
.MID extension:
NOTE: Some songs may be protected by a GENERALMUSIC copyright - in this
case, attempting to convert to MIDI FILES will display an appropriate message,
informing you that the operation cannot be performed and inviting you to escape.
Owner's Manual
Edit Section
Disk & SRam 4 - 19
ERASE OPERATIONS
All operations relative to the cancellation of data from Disk or SRam are carried out on
the ERASE page.
The operations are identical to those used in the Load and Save operations discussed in
the preceding pages.
The ERASE function permits the cancellation of the following elements:
All the contents of Disk or SRam
All Songs (from Disk or SRam)
All Styles (from Disk or SRam)
All Performances (from Disk or SRam)
All Samples (from Disk or SRam)
A Single Bank Style (from Disk or SRam)
A Single Bank Internal Style Performance (from Disk or SRam)
A Single Bank Performance (from Disk or SRam)
A Single Song (from Disk or SRam)
A Single Programmable Style (from Disk or SRam)
A Single Internal Style Performance (from Disk or SRam)
A Single Performance (from Disk or SRam)
A Single MIDI File (from Disk or SRam)
Example:
How to ERASE a modified Performance of an Internal Style.
1.
Set the Erase display parameters to “Single” and “Style”:
2.
Press ENTER and, after the “Wait Please” message, the Prog. Style directory will
be displayed:
Owner's Manual
Edit Section
4 - 20 Disk & SRam
3.
Select the option “INT” with F8 to access the directory of the Internal Style
Performances:
4.
Select the Performance to erase and press ENT twice:
When the “Erasing” message disappears, the operation will be complete.
Owner's Manual
Edit Section
Disk & SRam 4 - 21
UTILITY OPERATIONS
1)
FORMAT = allows a disk to be formatted.
This operation formats a floppy disk (3.5” HD) so that WX can use it to store data.
A newly purchased disk must be formatted before it can be used. Disks formatted
by other devices must also be formatted with this operation before being used.
When a disk is formatted, all data contained in it will be destroyed. Be careful not
to format disks containing important data and use the Disk Write Protect slider to
prevent accidents. You are also recommended to label your Disks clearly.
After inserting the disk, start the operation pressing ENT.
The formatting process takes just over a minute then returns to the main Utility
display.
2)
DIRECTORY = allows the contents of a disk to be examined.
The “Directory” is a list of “items” contained in the disk (or SRam). It is divided
into the various elements that make up the memory:
By pressing ENT the disk’s directories are displayed:
Select one of the elements and press ENT again to access all its files.
Owner's Manual
Edit Section
4 - 22 Disk & SRam
Examples:
If you access the Song directory, the display will show something like this:
Similarly, the Performance directory shows:
3)
FREE SPACE = Displays the free space available.
When a disk is inserted in the driver, this function displays the amount of space
available on the disk, in the instrument’s memory and, if fitted, on the optional
RAM .
Press ENT to obtain the information required:
Note: If SRam operations are active, the display will show the free memory
available in the Static Ram as well as the instrument’s Memory and eventual
optional RAM.
4)
DISK (SRam) NAME = Allows a name to be given to a disk
or to the SRam.
Owner's Manual
Edit Section
Disk & SRam 4 - 23
Press ENT to access the name writing procedure:
The small rectangle on the right is the active zone where the name can be written.
The letters, the numbers and other symbols are silk-screened under the keyboard
and they are entered into the active zone by pressing the relative keys. The flashing
cursor moves one step to the right after each entry.
On the extreme left of the keyboard several functions are provided:
Press “Shift” to write capital letters, press it again to return to small letters;
Use “Space” to create a space;
Use “Delete” to cancel the entry at the flashing cursor position;
Use the arrow “left arrow” (<—) to cancel the last entry;
SHIFT
SPACE
DELETE
Use the “back space” (§ ) to move the cursor backwards.
A
Other symbols (apostrophe, comma, etc.) are located on the extreme right side of
the keyboard.
A name consisting of up to 11 characters can be written (for Disk or SRam only
- all other name situations permit 8 characters).
Press ENTER to confirm the name. Press ESC to escape the function and cancel
all entries.
5)
LOAD USER PROGRAM
Another important WX innovation. This function allows new functions, implemented from time to time by GENERALMUSIC, to be loaded from disk to WX.
Press ENTER after selecting the option:
Select the User Program required and press ENT.
Once loaded, access to the new function can be gained by means of the OPTION
button in the SEQ. EDIT. section.
Owner's Manual
Edit Section
4 - 24 Disk & SRam
6)
LOAD WS SONG
One of the most popular functions of this instrument. Being compatible with WS
software, WX accepts WS songs from WS songs disks via an appropriate
conversion. It is therefore possible to insert a WS disk directly into the WX drive.
Pressing ENT after selecting the function shows the WS disk directory:
Select the required Song and press ENT. The same procedure is already discussed
in the GETTING STARTED chapter, on page 1-6.
N.B. The WS library contains more than 500 GENERALMUSIC songs, not to mention
many others throughout the world!!
Owner's Manual
Edit Section
Status
Mixer 4 - 25
EDIT MIXER
EDIT
DISK
PERF
SOUNDS
MIXER
EFF1/2
MIDI
STATUS
SPLITS
ARRAN
CLOCK
PAGE-
PAGE+
The MIXER is where you can balance the volumes and the panpots for all the tracks of
the currently selected Performance and gain access to several general controls of the
machine.
1. The Volume Page
The first page, called VOLUME, is where you can see and control the volumes of
all the available tracks.
The volume of each track is represented graphically by a horizontal bar:
The tracks are selected with the UP/DOWN cursor arrows.
Rotate the dial to regulate the volume of a track on a scale that runs from 0 to 127.
To save the modifications:
Once the required volume levels have been set, press the ENT button to save the
settings in the current Performance.
A window will be displayed which prompts you to confirm the operation with ENT
or cancel it with ESC.
If the operation is confirmed, the new data will be stored in the current performance; if cancelled, the new data will remain unaltered up to the moment you select
a different performance (or turn off), after which it will be irremediably lost.
Owner's Manual
Edit Section
4 - 26 Mixer
Status
2. The PANPOT Page
Press the PAGE+ button to access the second page, called PANPOT.
The PANPOT control permits a panoramic control of the sounds between the Left
and Right internal audio channels (and L/R Outputs).
Each track is graphically represented by a horizontal bar and the central “0”
position represents the exact centre of the two outputs.
To move the Sound to the left:
Rotate the Dial in an anti-clockwise direction - this generates negative values,
indicating a movement towards the LEFT output.
To move the Sound to the right
Rotate the Dial in a clockwise direction - this generates positive values, indicating
a movement towards the RIGHT output.
The values range from -31 (all to the left) to +31 (all to the right).
Press ENT to save the modifications in the current Performance.
3. The MASTER Page
Press the PAGE+ button to access the MASTER page.
This page contains general controls for the keyboard, comprising the following
parameters:
1. TREBLE:
2. BASS:
3. VOLUME:
4. LOUDNESS:
s.
a gain (attenuation) of the high frequencies.
the same type of control, but for the low frequencies.
adjusts the general volume of the instrument and is linked
to the MASTER potentiometer located on the panel.
when “On” it inserts a particular equalisation (a simultaneous control of Bass and Treble tones) which favours
certain frequencies at low volume.
N.B. The LOUDNESS parameter has no effect at high volumes.
Owner's Manual
Edit Section
Status
Mixer 4 - 27
4. The AUDIO IN Page
Press the PAGE+ button again to access the last page of this section, the AUDIO
IN page.
The page layout is identical to the previous one, apart from the INPUT parameter,
and it allows the same type of operations, but in this case, they affect eventual
signals connected to WX by means of the AUDIO IN (Left and Right) inputs.
This page contains the following parameters:
1. TREBLE:
2. BASS:
3. VOLUME:
4. INPUT:
Owner's Manual
a gain (attenuation) of the high frequencies.
the same type of control, but for the low frequencies.
adjusts the general volume of the connected instrument
and is linked to the MASTER potentiometer located on
the panel.
This controls the input gain and provides a choice of two
options:
MIC for a microphone connection;
LIN to connect another musical instrument or HI-FI
apparatus (a recorder or a compact disk unit).
Edit Section
4 - 28 Status
EDIT STATUS
EDIT
DISK
PERF
SOUNDS
MIXER
EFF1/2
MIDI
STATUS
SPLITS
ARRAN
CLOCK
PAGE-
PAGE+
In this section you will find all the parameters relating to the instrument’s general
controls grouped together or, more precisely, the parameters not linked to the structure
of the performances.
1. The GENERAL page.
Navigation:
Use the Up, Down, Right and Left cursor arrows to select the parameters by moving the
reverse-highlight cursor.
Use the Dial to enter a value or select the status of the currently selected parameter. You
can also use the Toggle to switch from On to Off and vice versa (where permitted).
The following functions are available:
NOTE 1:
Each step is equivalent
to 1/64th of a semitone.
1. Master Tune:
2. Key Transpose:
3. Key Sens:
4. Chord Display:
5. Auto Bank Set:
6. After Sens:
Owner's Manual
controls the pitch of the instrument within the value range1, -63
to +63.
carries out a general transposition in semi-tones, within the
range -24 to +24. This function can be individually disabled for
any track (in Edit Performance) - this is particularly necessary
for the drum track, to avoid the transposition of percussion
sounds which would result in the change of sound (from Cymbal
to Snare, for example).
controls the keyboard sensitivity to dynamic variations. A scale
of 1 to 5 is available where the higher values provide increased
sensitivity while the lower ones give the inverse effect.
allows you to choose between Italian or English chord notations
- displayed in the right hand corner when playing with Styles.
normally, when this function is ON, selecting a track also recalls
its associated sound bank. This is to allow the user maximum
flexibility in sound selection and to avoid too many operations
when working with multi-timbral situations.
If, however, you want to assign instruments from the same bank
to several different tracks, you can disable the Auto Bank set
function (OFF) to avoid automatic Bank selections for every
track selection.
controls the aftertouch sensitivity. A scale of 1 to 5 is available
where the higher values provide increased sensitivity to Aftertouch pressure while the lower ones give the inverse effect.
Edit Section
Status 4 - 29
7. Six parameters related to the three programmable pedals.
Ped 1 =
Ped 1 Assign = (function)
Ped 2 =
Ped 2 Assign = (function)
Damper =
Damper Assign = (function)
The parameters on the left select the type of pedal, while those on the right select
the function to assign to it.
Ped = Analog:
a continuous control pedal; e.g. a Volume pedal.
Ped = Logic n.c/n.o.: a switch action pedal; e.g. a Start/Stop pedal.
N.C. =- Normally
closed (Generalmusic
pedals)
N.O. = Normally open
(pedals of other
brands).
With “n.c.” and “n.o.” you can select the pedal polarity. This will allow the use of
pedals of other brands.
Functions assignable to the Pedals:
The assigned functions differ according to whether “analog” or “logic” is selected. Each
track of the current Performance can also be enabled or disabled for the assigned pedal
function - this is carried out “Edit Performance” environment in the “Pedals” and
“Damper” functions.
When Analog is selected, you can assign the following functions to the relative
continuous control pedal:
Off:
Pitch Bend:
Pitch +:
Pitch -:
Modulation:
Volume:
Pan:
Expression:
NOTE 1:
The lowest point
corresponds to the
value of the Volume
parameter in the
Master Mixer page.
Attack:
Release:
Filter 1:
Owner's Manual
pedal disabled.
provides the same effect as the Track Ball when moved in Left/
Right directions with a maximum pitch excursion of ±2 semitones.
provides a pitch increase with an excursion from standard Pitch
to +2 semitones.
provides a pitch decrease with an excursion from standard Pitch
to -2 semitones.
provides the same effect as the Track Ball when moved in Up/
Down directions.
provides a master volume control covering the complete range
of level values (0 - 127).
moves the sounds between the Left and Right Audio channels.
provides a general volume control with a limited excursion of
level1.
affects the Amplitude envelope (key on) of the sounds being
controlled. In this case, it controls the time taken for the sound(s)
being affected to reach maximum level before entering the
decay phase. In other words, it controls the Attack Rate.
affects the Amplitude envelope (key off) of the sounds being
controlled. In this case, it controls the time taken for the sound(s)
being affected to reach zero level after releasing the keys.
affects the Filter envelopes (Key on) of the sounds being
controlled, intervening on the Cut-off frequencies. In practice,
this control allows you to “open” and “close” Filter 1.
Edit Section
4 - 30 Status
IMPORTANT
Sounds can be modified
in real time by means of
the parameters listed on
the right. An
appropriately
programmed Pedal can
affect one or more
Sounds according to
which tracks are
enabled for the pedal.
Filter 2:
affects the Filter envelopes (Key on) of the sounds being
controlled, intervening on the Cut-off frequencies. In practice,
this control allows you to “open” and “close” Filter 2.
Filter 1+2:
affects both Filter envelopes (Key on) of the sounds being
controlled, intervening on the Cut-off frequencies. In practice,
this control allows a simultaneous “opening” and “closing” of
Filter 1 and Filter 2.
Note: The effect of the Attack, Release, Filter 1, Filter 2 and Filter 1+2 parameters
depend on the sounds assigned to the enabled tracks.
When Logic is selected, the following functions can be assigned to the relative switch
action pedal:
Off:
7th:
Min:
Dim:
DAMPER
Applying the Damper to
non-percussive sounds,
such as Brass; Organs,
etc., obtains an infinite
sustain which does not
decay until the pedal is
released.
Damper:
Sostenuto:
Soft:
Start/Stop:
Var/Cont:
Intro/End:
Fill/Tap:
Punch:
Rotary S/F:
Owner's Manual
pedal disabled.
when pressed, all chords played are automatically transformed
to the 7th.
when pressed, all chords played are automatically transformed
to the Minor.
when pressed, all chords played are automatically transformed
to the Diminished.
when pressed, it sustains the notes played after release - simulates the loud pedal of a Piano.
provides the Damper effect only on the notes played prior to
pressing the pedal. All notes played after are not affected.
decreases the dynamic response of the keyboard by a small
amount, simulating the effect of the soft pedal of a Piano.
start and stop control for the Sequencer (Styles and Songs).
when pressed while a Style is playing, it provides a Variation of
the Basic Fill In and triggers a Variation of the Basic Rhythm
and Arrangement pattern. In Song mode, pressing the pedal
provides the “Continue” function which starts the song from the
point it was stopped.
when pressed, it starts a Style with an “Introduction” - if a Style
is playing, pressing the pedal provides an “Ending” of the Style.
when pressed while a Style is playing, it provides a “Fill In” of
the Basic Rhythm and Arrangement pattern. It also triggers the
Basic pattern if the Variation was playing before pressing the
pedal. Before starting a Style or Song, the Tap function provides
a start after beating time with your foot on the pedal. The Song
or Style plays with the Tempo established by the beats tapped.
See also “The Style and Song commands” on page 3-3.
used to insert (to “Punch in”) a correction during the recording
of a Prog. Style or Song. Events are recorded from the instant the
pedal is pressed until is it pressed again, or until recording is
stopped with Start/Stop.
switches from Rotary Slow to Fast and vice versa, provided that
the Rotary Effect is assigned to the tracks being affected.
Edit Section
Status 4 - 31
2. The MICROTUNING Page
This page, accessed with PAGE+, provides a selection of preset intonation scales
(temperaments) and four programmable ones.
Several of the scales available are historic and are suitable for those interested in the
creation of antique music.
The small keyboard in the right part of the display shows how each
note of any Intonation scale differs with respect to the same note
of the Equal scale.
For example, if you select the Mesotonic scale and play every note within an octave, the
small keyboard will display, for every note, the difference in 64th of a semitone with
respect to the same note of the Equal scale (0). The display will show the following:
Play any note C#:
The note C# is shown to
be -16 units lower than
the same note of the
Equal scale
Play any note D#:
The note D# is shown to
be 7 units higher than the
same note of the Equal
scale
The Intonation scales:
EQUAL TONE:
this is the standard temperament and is the scale currently in use
(since the Bach era) - it provides the standard for modern
“Western” music based on the note A = 440 Hz.
INVERSE:
inverts the keyboard - the higher notes on the left, the lower notes
on the right.
MESOTONIC:
temperament in use during the 16th and 17th centuries which
favoured the perfect major third interval with respect to that of
the fifth. Calculated from the note C, the chromatic scale is very
irregular. The usable scales of this temperament are: C. Maj. / D
Maj.. / G Maj.. / A Maj.. / Bb Maj. and the relative minors.
WERKMEISTER III:
temperament suitable for the execution of the German
musical repertoire between the end of the 17th and 18th century.
ARABIAN 1 & 2:
two Arabian scales based on the reduction by one quarter of a
tone of one or more notes of the scale.
PROG 1, 2, 3, 4:
four positions for user-programmable scales.
Owner's Manual
Edit Section
4 - 32 Status
How to programme an Intonation Scale
A new intonation scale can be programmed by modifying one or more notes of one of
the programmable scales (Prog 1, 2, 3 & 4).
The idea is to alter the tuning of one or more notes of the scale to the level desired.
Procedure:
1.
Select one of the four Programmable scales and press the note you want to change
- the small scale shows the current standard patch (0):
2.
Rotate the Dial to set the required pitch:
This will affect all the same notes across the entire keyboard.
3.
Repeat the procedure for all other notes required.
4.
Memorise the new Scale by pressing ENTER:
5.
Confirm the new scale by pressing ENTER again, or cancel the operation with
ESC.
Now, each time you want to play with your Programmed scale, simply select it in the
relative Status page.
If you want to use your programmed scale permanently, carry out the Save All to SRam
operation with the programmed scale selected. Every time you power up, your scale will
be recalled.
Owner's Manual
Edit Section
Status 4 - 33
3. The VIDEO MONITOR Page
This page is where you can control the viewing possibilities of the image
transmitted by the Video Outputs (RGB and TV) on an external monitor (computer
type colour monitor or normal domestic TV).
1. VIDEO DISPLAY: provides a choice of four viewing modes:
ECHO LCD, shows exactly what is displayed by the instrument.
SCORE, in SONG mode it shows a score, complete with a melody line on
a musical staff with chord symbols and lyrics.
LYRICS ONLY, isolates the lyrics from the rest.
Owner's Manual
Edit Section
4 - 34 Status
CHORDS ONLY, isolates the chord symbols on the musical staff.
2. LYRIC FONT:
3. VIEW MODE:
allows you to select three different character sizes with
which you can view the text and an option to view the
lyrics on two lines:
BIG, NORMAL, SMALL and TWO LINES.
allows you to select up to 4 different colour combinations
(SETUP 1, 2, 3 and 4).
N.B. in the SCORE and CHORDS ONLY modes, an animated graphic symbol
indicates the current position of the SONG or, more precisely, the bar being played
at that particular moment.
In the LYRICS ONLY mode, the synchronised change of colour of the words
indicates precisely when they should be sung.
AND NOW THE END IS NEAR AND
SO I FACE
THE FINAL CURTAIN MY FRIEND I'LL
SAY IT CLEAR
I'LL STATE MY CASE OF WHICH I'M
CERTAIN I'VE
LIVED
A LIFE THAT'S FULL
AND NOW THE END
Owner's Manual
Edit Section
Performance 4 - 35
EDIT PERFORMANCE
EDIT
DISK
PERF
SOUNDS
MIXER
EFF1/2
MIDI
STATUS
SPLITS
ARRAN
CLOCK
PAGE-
PAGE+
When you press the PERF button in the Edit section, you gain access to all the
Performance parameters. The parameters are arranged in two pages.
If you want to edit the currently selected Performance (Real Time Perf mode, Internal
Style mode, Song mode, etc.), simply press the Performance button in the Edit section.
Navigation
Select the required parameter with the relative function button F1…F8.
Use the Cursor arrows to select the section required.
Use the Dial or Toggle to modify the parameter value or status.
Change page with the Page+/- buttons.
1. CONFIGURATION
The “Configuration” parameter determines the status of a track with respect to its
reaction with the keyboard, with MIDI IN data and the destination of the events it
generates.
The UP/DOWN arrows select the various tracks, while the various fields in the left part
of the display are selected (highlighted) by rotating the DIAL.
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
Connect/Disconnect Local (Keyboard)
The first field in the top left, displaying a keyboard, shows whether the currently selected
track is connected to the WX keyboard or not. This connection is also known as the
“Local” connection.
Press the Toggle to disconnect Local.
This is the classical “MIDI Controller” condition (otherwise known as “Local Off”).
Owner's Manual
Edit Section
4 - 36 Performance
In this condition, the Track status is shown in the left column as “MIDI” in all playing
modes.
Repress the Toggle to restore the connection.
Connect/Disconnect MIDI IN events
The MIDI IN field is where the reception of MIDI events arriving on MIDI IN can be
allowed to pass or can be prevented from reaching the currently selected track.
Hit the Toggle to prevent all MIDI IN events from reaching the currently selected Track:
The track status relating to this condition is displayed in the left track column as “KYB”
(provided that Local is not disconnected):
Repress the Toggle to restore the connection.
Connect/Disconnect the internal Sound generator
The WX SOUNDS field is where the events originating from the currently selected track
can be sent to or prevented from reaching the WX sound generator.
This also applies to the eventual events originating from the MIDI IN source.
Owner's Manual
Edit Section
Performance 4 - 37
Hit the Toggle to disconnect the currently selected Track from the Internal Sound engine:
This condition is shown by a string of dashes for the currently selected track. In practice,
this track can still communicate with an external sound source through MIDI OUT.
Repress the Toggle to restore the connection.
Connect/Disconnect MIDI OUT
The MIDI OUT field is where the events originating from the currently selected track can
be sent to one or more external units through one of the MIDI OUT ports, or they can be
prevented from being transmitted. This also applies to the events originating from MIDI
IN when MIDI MERGE (in Edit MIDI) is active (ON).
Hit the Toggle to disconnect MIDI OUT transmission:
Repress the Toggle to restore the connection.
2. MODE:
Selects the playing modes of each track.
The parameters to choose from are:
POLY:
Owner's Manual
polyphonic - the currently selected track can play more than two
or more notes simultaneously. If only one track is active to play,
you can obtain a polyphony of 32 notes using “Single Oscillator” sounds.
Edit Section
4 - 38 Performance
MONO L:
MONO R:
MONO TIME:
mono left - gives priority to the lowest note when playing with
chords. For example, if one track plays strings and a second
plays bass, when you play a chord you will hear strings together
with a single bass note.
mono right - gives priority to the highest note. This it useful to
provide a Solo sound for the right hand when using chords in
multi-track situations.
mono time - the new note will play without “cutting” the decay
of the previous notes.
3. DETUNE:
This control is a fine tune adjustment for the sound assigned to the currently selected
track in steps of 1/64th of a semitone.
Values range from -64… 0… +64. This setting is not transmitted on MIDI OUT.
4. TRANSPOSE:
Transpose adjusts the Pitch of the sound assigned to the currently selected track in
chromatic steps, over a range of -60… 0… +60 where 0 is equivalent to standard pitch.
This setting affects the pitch of the Sound as well as the Note message transmitted on
MIDI OUT.
Disable Key Transpose
Important
It is essential to disable
Key Transpose for the
track dedicated to
playing drumkits to
avoid the transposition
of the individual notes
which result in a
change of percussion
sound.
The currently selected track can be disabled for the Key Transpose function (in Edit
Status) by pressing the Toggle - the disabled track shows a small “x” after the parameter
value.
Owner's Manual
Edit Section
Performance 4 - 39
5. AFTER TOUCH
Enables or disables the effect of the Aftertouch control for the currently selected track.
When this parameter is “ON”, applying pressure to the keys after playing obtains effects
that differ according to the sound assigned to the tracks. You can obtain modulation
effects, pitch bend, or you can even control the opening of a filter. The sensitivity of this
function can be regulated in the Edit Status page (Status Aftertouch).
6. RANDOM PAN
By increasing the values of this parameter, it is possible to hear the sound of the currently
selected track move freely between the left and right speakers.
The values range from 0… 7 where 0 is equivalent to “Off” and the higher values reflect
a faster oscillation between the audio channels. At high speed, this parameter can obtain
some interesting effects caused be the sound’s random movement.
7. TRACKBALL
This parameter determines how the trackball influences the sound of the currently
selected track.
The possibilities are:
OFF:
PITCH:
MOD:
PIT+MOD:
Owner's Manual
the effect of the Trackball is excluded;
the Trackball provides Pitch Bend only by Left/Right movements of the control;
the Trackball provides Modulation only by Up/Down movements of the control;
the Trackball provides both Pitch Bend and Modulation with
movements of the control in all directions.
Edit Section
4 - 40 Performance
8. EFFECTS
Here you can engage one or both Effects processors to the currently selected track or
disengage both. The Effect Type for both processors is determined in the Edit Eff 1/2
section.
The possibilities are:
OFF:
1:
2:
1 + 2:
the sound is not processed by the Effects processors;
the sound is processed by Effect processor 1 (reverb types);
the sound is processed by Effect processor 2 (delays, chorus, etc.);
the sound is processed by both Effects processors simultaneously.
Pass to the second page with PAGE+.
9. DAMPER
Enables (On) or disables (OFF) the function assigned to the damper pedal for the sound
assigned to the currently selected track.
10. VOLUME PEDAL
Enables (ON) or disables (OFF) the volume pedal connected to the Volume pedal socket
for the sound assigned to the currently selected track.
Owner's Manual
Edit Section
Performance 4 - 41
11. PEDALS
Engages one or both functions assigned to Pedal 1 and 2 to the currently selected track
or disengages both.
The possibilities are:
OFF:
1:
2:
1 + 2:
the sound is not affected by the Pedals (1 or 2);
the sound is affected by the function assigned to Pedal 1;
the sound is affected by the function assigned to Pedal 2;
the sound is affected by the functions assigned to Pedal 1 and Pedal 2.
12. PRIORITY
This function provides a means of assigning a “special polyphonic status” to a track in
multi-timbral situations, to prevent “note stealing”.
The term “note stealing” describes what occurs when the total number of notes played
exceeds the maximum permitted polyphony: in such cases, on or more notes are freely
“eliminated” to maintain the instrument’s maximum permitted polyphony. By assigning
Priority to a track, it will be protected from “note stealing” and the freely eliminated notes
will be lost elsewhere.
Three different settings are available: OFF, ON and SMART.
PRIORITY ON:
N.B. If “Priority” is
assigned to all the
tracks, the function will
be rendered inactive.
NOTE 1:
If you rotate the dial to
the Right, Priority will
be set to ON and may
interfere with the
correct operation of
SMART. Rotating to the
left does not alter the
status of Priority.
gives the enabled track polyphonic priority over all the others. For
example, if, while you are playing a Song, there are moments when
the enabled track may require a polyphony higher than the maximum currently available, this track will “steal” notes from other
tracks with the sole intention of playing correctly.
PRIORITY OFF:
disables the effect.
PRIORITY SMART: this is a general function and cannot be applied to individual
tracks. SMART guarantees a minimum polyphony for each
track and protects the notes played on the left hand side of the
keyboard. It is a particularly efficient system for piano sounds
in general.
It can be enabled by rotating the dial to the right1 or to the left.
Owner's Manual
Edit Section
4 - 42 Performance
13. COPY
Copies the currently selected performance to another position within the same Bank or
Banks. For example, in Real Time Perf mode, you can copy from one R. T. Perf Bank
to another but, you cannot copy, for example, from a R.T. Perf Bank to a Song Bank.
For example, you can use this function to create Song Performances. This will allow you
to record a Song (or Song Style) using up to 8 different Performances.
Once you have created your Song Performances, you can exploit the Performance
Advance function (Perf+) assigned to one of the Footswitch control pedals (Analog).
This will permit you to change Performances automatically without taking your hands
off the keyboard.
Copy Performance procedure:
1.
Select COPY PERFORMANCE:
2.
Hit the Right cursor arrow to pass to the right edit zone of the display (Perf Bank)
and select the Performance Bank to copy to by rotating the Dial:
4.
Hit the Down cursor arrow to select the Performance edit zone and rotate the Dial
to select the Performance:
,
14. PERFNAME
NOTE 1:
You can change the
name of the Real Time
Performances but,
unless you save them to
SRam or to disk, all new
names will be lost when
the instrument is turned
off.
This is where you can give your Performances a name1.
In this condition, the keyboard activates as an alphanumeric source and the Performance
Owner's Manual
Edit Section
Performance 4 - 43
name, when written, appears in the upper right part of the display after “Perform. Name”.
The letters, the numbers and other symbols are silk-screened under the keyboard and they
are entered into the active zone by pressing the relative keys. The flashing cursor moves
one step to the right after each entry.
Several functions are provided on the extreme left side of the keyboard.
SHIFT
SPACE
DELETE
A
Press “Shift” to write capital letters;
Use “Space” to create a space;
Use “Delete” to cancel the entry at the flashing cursor position;
Use the arrow “left arrow” (<—) to cancel the last entry;
Use the “back space” (§ ) to move the cursor backwards.
Other symbols (apostrophe, comma, etc.) are located on the extreme right side of
the keyboard
A name consisting of up to 8 characters can be written.
Press ENTER to confirm the name. Press ESC to escape the function and cancel
all entries.
Note: You cannot change the name of the INTERNAL STYLE PERFORMANCES
because they are permanently resident in ROM.
15. RESTORE
This parameter is only available if you access Edit Performance when you are in ROM
(Internal) STYLE MODE.
If you have modified the Performance of the currently selected Internal Style, the
RESTORE function resets the Performance to its original default status.
Press RESTORE to access the function.
The “Are you sure?” window is displayed asking if you want to restore the original
parameters of the current performance or not.
Press ENTER to confirm.
Press ESC to escape the edit and retain the modified parameters of the Performance.
Owner's Manual
Edit Section
4 - 44 Effects 1 & 2
EFFECTS
EDIT
DISK
PERF
SOUNDS
MIXER
EFF1/2
MIDI
STATUS
SPLITS
ARRAN
CLOCK
PAGE-
PAGE+
WX allows you to route your sounds through the multi-effects processors (Eff.1 & Eff.
2) or by-pass them (by-passing is carried out in Edit Performance).
In default, an Effect from one or both processors is assigned to every Performance (Real
Time, Rom Styles, Prog. Styles, Songs).
Any modifications to the default status of the current Performance can be saved to the
same location, or you can overwrite the Effect assigned to another Performance with the
newly modified one using the Store function.
If you want to re-use the modified Effects, you must Save the relative Bank containing
the Performance to Disk or SRam, otherwise they will be lost when the instrument is
turned off.
The preset Effects cannot be moved, replaced or destroyed from the Effects library.
Effect 1 contains the Reverbs and Effect 2 the Delays and Modulations etc..
NOTE 1:
The Effects displayed
depend on the currently
selected Performance.
Press the EFF1/2 button to access the entry page1 where the Effects can be selected:
IMPORTANT
If, when modifying the
parameters of an Effect,
you do not obtain any
change, check that the
tracks of the current
Performance are active
for the relative Effect
processor (1 or 2).
Use the LEFT/RIGHT arrows to pass from Effect 1 to Effect 2 and rotate the DIAL to
select the Effect type.
The Effect types available:
EFFECT 1 (Reverb types)
NOTE † :
The Effects identified
with † are pseudostereophonic.
If the relative Pan Pots
(in Edit Mixer) of the
Performance tracks that
use the Effect are not
set at centre, part of the
Effect’s efficiency will
be lost.
Hall_1
St_Hall_1†
Concert_1†
Vocal_1
SmallRoom1
LargeRoom1†
Early1_1
Stereo1_1†
Owner's Manual
Hall_2
St_Hall_2†
Concert_2†
Plate_1
Med_Room2
LargeRoom2†
Early2_1
Stereo2_1†
Hall_3
St_Hall_3†
Church_1
Plate_2
LargeRoom3†
Early3_1†
Stereo3_1†
Stereo4_1†
Edit Section
Effects 1 & 2 4 - 45
EFFECT 2 (Delays, Modulations, etc.)
Delay1_1
Panecho1
Chorus1_1
Flanger1_1
Phaser1_1
Ensemble_1
Fladel_1
Delay1_2
Panecho2
Chorus1_2
Flanger2_1
Phaser2_1
Rotary1_1
PanMix_1
Delay2_1
Panecho3
Chorus2_1
Delay2_2
Dubbing_1
Chorus2_2
Phaser3_1
Rotary2_1
PanMix_2
PanMix_3
Each Performance can memorise one Effect from each processor (Eff1 & Eff 2) and
different Effect types can be memorised in the same Performance Bank.
Tracks can be individually enabled or disabled for the Effects assigned to the relative
Performance.
EDIT EFFECTS
Press Page + to access the editor for the currently selected Effect.
Each effect consists of 4 parameters which change according to the type of effect.
How to Edit the Effects
NOTE:
The modifications will
rest in memory until
they are changed again,
until the instrument is
turned off, or until you
re-select the same
Performance on a
subsequent occasion.
The editing procedure is very simple. If you want to tweak an effect slightly, simply
adjust the values of one or more parameters.
1.
Access the editor of the currently selected Effect with Page +.
2.
Use the Down or Up cursor arrows to scroll to the required parameter.
3.
Rotate the Dial to change the parameter value.
4.
Save the edited Effect in the current Performance by pressing Ent twice, or copy
it to another Performance (Songs, Real Time Performances, Program Styles, ROM
Styles) using STORE.
The functions RESTORE, STORE and COMPARE are in correspondence with the F1,
F2 and F3 function buttons.
RESTORE:
Owner's Manual
restores the original default values to any eventually modified
parameter.
Edit Section
4 - 46 Effects 1 & 2
NOTE:
the modifications
applied to the
parameters of an effect
only apply to the
current performance,
therefore, it is possible
to use the same effect
with different settings in
the various
performances.
STORE:
COMPARE:
allows you to copy the eventual modifications applied to the
effect in any performance.
allows you to make a comparison between the original and the
modified effect.
EFFECT 1 - REVERB
Two types of Reverb are available, each with a different parameter configuration, which
can be broken down to the following:
◆
Reverberation with non-programmable Early Reflections;
◆
Reverberation with programmable Early Reflections.
The Early Reflection is the first ‘Reverb wave’ that reaches the hearing after sound
emission; it can be very distant from the next halo that comprises all the remaining waves.
You can clearly hear Early Reflections in a sports centre, for example.
The Reverbs with non-programmable Early Reflections are the following:
Hall_1, Hall_2, Hall_3, St_Hall_1, St_Hall_2, St_Hall_3, Concert_1, Concert_2,
Church_1, Vocal_1, Plate_1, Plate_2, SmallRoom1, Med_Room2,
LargeRoom1, LargeRoom2, LargeRoom3.
The above Reverbs show the following parameter configuration:
REVERBS WITH
NONPROGRAMMABLE
EARLY
REFLECTIONS
Hall, St_Hall, Concert:
concert halls;
Sroom, Mroom,
Lroom:
recording rooms of
various sizes
(small, medium large);
Vocal:
recording rooms for
vocal recordings with a
reduced amount of
reflections;
Church:
cathedral, a large
quantity of reflections;
Plate:
imitates the oscillating
metallic plate used in
the past in recording
studios.
1. VOLUME:
2. REV. TIME:
3. DELAY:
4. H.F. DECAY:
Owner's Manual
The primary Reverb level; setting this parameter to “0” cancels
the action of the Reverb.
Value range: 0[-63.50dB] ... 127[0.0dB].
Indicates the period that elapses between the first and last
‘Reverb wave’ (reflection). In practice, this is the most important parameter of those that give a dimension to the environment.
Value range: 1[0.1 sec] ... 100[10 sec].
Contributes to the “formation” of the dimensions of the surroundings, stabilising the period that elapses between the sound
emission and the first reflection.
Value range: 0... 99 ms.
Contributes to the timbric quality of the environment, stabilising
the frequency of a dynamic lowpass filter, which renders the
Reverb timbre notably changed with time. The filter is introduced gradually, acting progressively on all successive ‘Reverb
waves’; a high value filter reacts very slowly while a modest
value increases the speed of the timbric change.
Value range: 0[Bypass], 1[1 khz] ... 10[16 khz].
Edit Section
Effects 1 & 2 4 - 47
The remaining Reverbs, with programmable Early Reflections, show a slight variation:
Early1_1, Early2_1, Early3_1, Stereo1_1, Stereo2_1, Stereo3_1, Stereo4_1.
1. VOLUME:
2. ROOM SIZE:
3. DIFFUSION:
4. FILTER:
The primary Reverb level; setting this parameter to “0” cancels
the action of the Reverb.
Value range 0[-63.50dB] ... 127[0.0dB].
Establishes the dimensions of the environment.
Value range: 0..64).
Creates a reverberation halo in the final part of the effect.
Value range: 0... 60.
Cutoff frequency of the filter.
Value range: 0[Bypass], 1[0.1 khz] ... 13[16 khz].
EFFECT 2 - DELAY, MODULATIONS
Effect 2 contains the Delay/Echo and the Modulations (Chorus, Flanger, Phaser, Rotary
Speaker, etc.). These Effects provide a greater number of different parameter configurations.
The Effects listed below all provide the same edit parameters:
Delay1_1, Delay1_2, Delay2_1, Delay2_2, Panecho1, Panecho2, Panecho3,
Dubbing_1.
NOTE:
PanEcho is a Delay/
Echo in which the
repetitions alternate
between the two stereo
channels.
Dubbing sends all the
repetitions to only one
output channel.
1. VOLUME:
2. DELAY:
3. FEEDBACK:
4. FILTER:
Owner's Manual
The primary Delay level; setting this parameter to “0” cancels
the action of Delay, PanEcho or Dubbing.
Value range 0[-63.50dB] ... 127[0.0dB].
Determines the time lapse between repetitions.
Value range: 0...510 ms.
Determines the number of Delay repetitions. With a delay time
of ‘510ms’ and this parameter set at 99%, the total duration of
the effect is 11 seconds.
Value range: 0[4%] ... 14[99%].
Determines the timbric quality of each repetition and progressively
inserts a lowpass filter. A high value filter reacts very slowly while
a modest value increases the speed of the timbric change.
Value range: 0[Bypass], 1[0.1 khz]... 12[16 khz].
Edit Section
4 - 48 Effects 1 & 2
The next four Effects display a variation of parameters:
Chorus1_1, Chorus1_2, Chorus2_1, Chorus2_2.
1. VOLUME:
The primary Chorus level; setting this parameter to “0” excludes
the action of the Chorus.
Value range 0[-63.50dB] ... 127[0.0dB].
2. FREQUENCY MODULATION:
Determines the velocity of the Chorus modulation (its variation is very marked).
Value range: 0[0.3 Hz] ... 28[6.0 Hz].
3. DEPTH:
Determines the modulation depth of the Chorus effect.
Value range: 0[-63.50dB] ... 127[0.0dB].
4. FILTER:
Determines the timbric quality of the Chorus effect.
Value range: 0[Bypass], 1[0.1 khz] ... 12[16 khz].
A third parameter variation is displayed by the next six Effects:
Flanger1_1, Flanger2_1, Phaser1_1, Phaser2_1, Phaser3_1, Ensemble_1.
1. VOLUME:
The primary Flanger level; setting this parameter to “0” excludes the action of the Effect.
Value range 0[-63.50dB] ... 127[0.0dB].
2. FREQUENCY MODULATION:
Determines the modulation speed of the Effect. Affects only the harmonic content of the sound.
Value range: 0[0.3 Hz] ... 28[6.0 Hz].
3. DEPTH:
Determines the modulation depth of the Flanger effect. Affects
the harmonic content of the sound.
Value range: 0[-63.50dB] ... 127[0.0dB].
4. FEEDBACK:
Enriches the harmonic content of the sound - an “automodulator”.
Value range: 0[0%] ... 17[96%].
The Rotary Effects provide a configuration of their own:
Owner's Manual
Edit Section
Effects 1 & 2 4 - 49
Rotary1_1, Rotary2_1.
1. VOLUME:
2. SPEED:
3 FEEDBACK:
4. FILTER:
The primary Rotary level; Setting this parameter to “0” excludes
the action of the effect.
Value range 0[-63.50dB] ... 127[0.0dB].
Determines the time required to pass from Slow to Fast or vice
versa.
Value range: 0[0.6 sec] ... 30[9.6 sec].
Enriches the harmonic content of the sound - an “automodulator”.
Value range: 0[0%] ... 17[96%].
Sets a static lowpass filter.
Value range: 0[Bypass], 1[0.1 khz] ... 12[16 khz].
Finally, the remaining Effects provide another configuration:
Fladel_1, PanMix_1, PanMix_2, PanMix_3.
1. VOLUME:
The primary Fladel level; Setting this parameter to “0” excludes
the action of the effect.
Value range 0[-65.50dB] ... 127[0.0dB].
2. DELAY:
The time that elapses between one Delay repetition and another.
Value range 0... 510 ms.
3. FREQUENCY MODULATION:
Determines the modulation speed of the
Flanger.
Value range: 0[0.3 Hz] ... 28[6.0 Hz].
4 DEPTH:
Determines the modulation depth of the Flanger or PanMix
effect.
Value range: 0[-63.50dB] ... 127[0.0dB].
Owner's Manual
Edit Section
4 - 50 Effects 1 & 2
The RESTORE, STORE and COMPARE functions
Compare
This function provides a means of comparing the “old” Effect with the “new”, keeping
track of all the changes before deciding to go ahead with the saving or the cancellation
of the modifications.
◆
After carrying out one or more modifications to the parameters, press the Function
button F3 to access COMPARE:
The Effect’s parameter values will be restored to their original default values to
allow you to listen to the difference between the two solutions.
◆
◆
◆
◆
Press COMPARE again to return to the new version and modify the parameters
again if necessary.
Continue in this way until you obtain the required Effect.
Save to the current position with Enter only if you want to recall the modified
Effect on all subsequent occasions or,
Copy to a different location using Store.
If you want to cancel all modifications use Restore.
Restore
Use Restore to recall the original default parameter values to the modified Effect. This
function is only operative on the current Performance.
◆
Press RESTORE and the display will show:
◆
Press ENTER to confirm the operation and restore the original parameter values
to the Effect currently in edit.
◆
Press ESC to cancel the operation and retain the modified parameter values.
Owner's Manual
Edit Section
Effects 1 & 2 4 - 51
How to Store an edited Effect
1.
Save to the current Performance using Save Performance
◆
All the variations applied to one or more parameters of the Effect will remain in
memory until you turn the instrument off, or until you re-select the same
Performance on a subsequent occasion. If you want the Performance to recall the
modified Effect every time it is re-selected, press ENTER to save the modifications:
◆
Complete the operation with ENTER a second time, or cancel with Exit. Both
operations will escape the edit and return to the starting display.
2. Copy the modified Effect to another Performance using
STORE
◆
Press STORE:
The display shows the location of the currently selected Performance and, in the
bottom left hand corner, the Effect currently assigned to it.
◆
Using the Up/Down cursor arrows and the Dial, select a Bank (Performance, Song,
Prog. Style, ROM Style), a Bank number (or Style) and the Performance to store
the modified Effect to:
◆
Press ENTER to confirm the operation. The display will show:
Owner's Manual
Edit Section
4 - 52 Effects 1 & 2
The dialogue box is informing you that an Effect is already associated to the
selected Performance (the one in the bottom left hand corner).
◆
Press ENTER to confirm and the display will update to the new situation:
The previous Effect (in this case St_Hall_2) will be substituted by the modified one
(Hall_1).
◆
Press ESC to cancel the operation and retain the original effect in the selected
Performance.
Don’t forget to save your modifications to disk if you want to re-use them.
Owner's Manual
Edit Section
Splits 4 - 53
EDIT SPLITS
EDIT
DISK
PERF
SOUNDS
MIXER
EFF1/2
MIDI
STATUS
SPLITS
ARRAN
CLOCK
PAGE-
PAGE+
This is where you can specify a keyboard extension (a Split) for a Track between the
extreme points A0 - C8.
Pressing the SPLITS button accesses the page where you can control the keyboard
extensions of the various sounds assigned to the tracks.
The display shows a graphical representation of the status of split each track for the
current Performance (in this case a Song Performance).
How to modify the keyboard extension of a track
There are two ways of carrying out this operation:
1.
Press the keys that delimit the portion of the keyboard.
Select the track requiring the modification:
Press a key at the lower end of the keyboard to specify the left limit:
Press a key to specify the right limit:
Owner's Manual
Edit Section
4 - 54 Splits
2.
Use the LEFT/RIGHT cursor arrows and the Dial:
Select the track requiring the modification:
The left limit is already selected therefore, rotate the Dial:
Select the right limit with the Right cursor arrow:
Rotate the Dial to specify the required note.
In the lower display area, an image of a keyboard is displayed that shows two small points
representing the split points for the currently selected track.
Example of markings showing keyboard extension for Track
10
Owner's Manual
Edit Section
Splits 4 - 55
CHORD SPLIT
The STYLES (ROM and PROG) are characterised by a keyboard division which
permits you to play chords on the left part of the keyboard and melody notes on the right
part.
Furthermore, tracks 5 and 6 are also preset to cover specific keyboard extensions to allow
Track 5 to play on the left part and Track 6 on the right.
Track 5 has the extension A0-B3 while Track 6 has C4-C8.
In default conditions, all the Styles have the CHORD SPLIT set on note C4.
Press PAGE+ to access to the display where you can control the Chord Split point.
If you play chords below this point, Styles recognise them and provide arrangements
based on the chords played.
This is a general parameter and cannot be saved at different values for different
performances, therefore, the selected Chord Split point is valid for all the styles.
However, there are two options: LOCK and FREE.
FREE
When FREE is selected (default condition), by pressing a key on the keyboard or by
rotating the DIAL, you can change the chord recognition split point without modifying
any other parameter.
Tracks 5 and 6 remain unaltered, therefore, you would have to intervene on the relative
track extensions if you want to modify also their ranges.
Owner's Manual
Edit Section
4 - 56 Splits
LOCK
The LOCK function couples the CHORD SPLIT to the split of tracks 5 and 6 of all the
Styles.
Therefore, the value assigned will correspond to both the chord recognition split as well
as the split point between these two tracks.
If you want to memorise the modifications, press ENT.
Pressing ESC will escape from the edit without memorising any modifications.
Transfer a Sound to the Pedalboard
Any track can be transferred to a Pedalboard (if connected to the rear-panel Pedalboard
socket).
Simply press the TOGGLE and the Sound assigned to the selected track will be
transferred.
Press the TOGGLE again to restore normal playing.
Owner's Manual
Edit Section
Sounds 4 - 57
EDIT SOUNDS
EDIT
DISK
PERF
SOUNDS
MIXER
EFF1/2
MIDI
STATUS
SPLITS
ARRAN
CLOCK
PAGE-
PAGE+
WX provides a sound editing facility that permits very quick and easy editing tasks
because the edit parameters affect various elements already incorporated in the sound’s
waveform “header” (filters, amplitude envelopes - applied to “Single” and “Dual
Oscillator” sounds).
Although permanently resident in memory, the WX ROM sounds can be edited. In
practice, when you enter the Edit Sound environment, you enter with a copy of the sound
assigned to the selected track of the currently active Performance.
The results obtained from the editing tasks depend a great deal on the starting sound. For
example, some sounds incorporate a Lowpass Filter in the waveform header, while
others have a Highpass Filter. The effect of specifying the same Cutoff parameter value
for both types of sound will, therefore, differ owing to the different nature of the
incorporated electronic Filter.
In other cases, vastly varied results can be obtained by using “Single Oscillator” sounds
with respect to “Dual Oscillator” sounds (see ROM Sounds - chapter 3, page 3-9).
As already discussed, there are also the Drumkits (and Sound Patches) - these have a
completely different editor which does not intervene on the Sound Parameters, but on
Performance parameters.
The edited sound is not memorised in the instrument’s Sound library; it is internally
stored in a Performance and is “carried” until it is substituted with a new modification
or even a different Sound. Each Performance can “carry” up to 8 modified sounds and
a Drumkit.
This highly original system permits you to have the right type of sound for every situation
without intervening on the Sound library of the instrument. This is also an excellent
system that allows you to create several variations of the same sound and store each one
in several different Performances. In other instruments, if you modify a sound, all the
elements that store the sound will be affected. More about this feature later.
You can also tweak a Sound in real time using one of the Pedals to which one of the Sound
editing functions has been assigned (Attack, Release, Filter 1, Filter 2, Filter 1+2). This
is valid in Real Time Performance mode as well as in one of the Sequencer modes
(Internal/Prog. Style, Song and Song Style mode).
For a clearer understanding of the Edit Sound section, the fundamental functions of
EDITING are explained.
Afterwards, the additional functions which contribute to a perfection of the editing tasks,
or which render a more sophisticated use of the Edit Sound feature are explained.
Owner's Manual
Edit Section
4 - 58 Sounds
General Edit Procedure
Select the Sound (the track of the currently selected Performance) and press the SOUND
button in the Edit section to access the Editor.
The display shown will depend on which type of Sound is accessed.
NOTE
When you access Edit
Sound, a copy of the
ROM Sound is
transferred into a
memory buffer which
permits you to escape
editing temporarily (by
repressing SOUNDS)
without data loss.
Only one track is active
in edit mode.
If a “normal” sound is selected (Single or Dual Oscillator type), such as WXGrandP,
entering Sound Edit will display the following editor:
The parameters intervene on various aspects of the Sound (the Filter and the Amplitude
Envelope).
If a Drumkit is accessed, such as DKJazz, the following edit page will be displayed:
The Drumkit and Sound Patch parameters affect the Sound’s performance parameters
(volume, pan, transpose, etc.).
These sounds provide a second display which represents the second dynamic level with
identical parameters to the first level.
Press F2 (Edit 2) to access the higher dynamic level of the Drumkit/Sound Patch.
Navigation
As in all display situations that show multiple sets of parameters, you can navigate with
the four cursor arrows (select the parameters) and use the Dial as the main data entry
source. Various display commands are also provided which are selected with the
Function buttons.
The Display Commands
Both types of display situations have several commands in common:
Library, Store, Compare, Effects:
The Drumkits and Sound Patches have additional options which are related to the edit
procedures:
Edit 1, Edit 2, Expand, CatchNote:
When the commands or options are selected, they are shown in reverse-highlight.
All the commands and options are discussed in the relevant section further ahead.
Owner's Manual
Edit Section
Sounds 4 - 59
THE SOUND EDIT PARAMETERS
“Single” and “Dual” Oscillator editing
After selecting a track showing the sound you are interested in editing, press SOUNDS
in the Edit section to show the main EDIT display:
SOUND MAP
The SOUND MAP
shown in the Appendix
lists all ROM Sounds.
Those indicated with an
Asterisk (*) are
SINGLE OSCILLATOR
sounds.
Those indicated with a
cross (†) are Drumkits
(or Sound Patch).
Generally speaking, “Single Oscillator” sounds are affected by the “Cutoff 1” and
“Resonance 1” parameters on the left part of the display and all parameters on the right.
“Dual Oscillator” sounds are affected by all parameters.
The Edit Menu:
CUTOFF 1 & 2: This parameter affects the Cutoff Frequency of the Filter incorporated
in the Sound and determines the frequency at which the filter begins
“cutting into” the band of harmonics contained in the sound’s waveform.
Values range from 0 to 191.
Specifying increasingly higher values is equivalent to “opening the filter”
while “closing the filter” is obtained by entering lower values.
Note: This parameter can also be regulated in real time by assigning the functions
Filter 1, Filter 2 or Filter 1+2 to one of the Pedals (see Edit Status). You can “open”
and “close” the Filters by operating the pedal.
RESONANCE 1 & 2: Resonance creates a peak of emphasis at the cutoff frequency
specified above. This parameter determines the amount of Resonance to
apply.
Values range from 0... 127
The effects obtained are varied and depend how much Resonance is
applied, on the sound’s waveform, on the filter type incorporated in the
sound’s waveform and on the cutoff frequency.
Resonance is commonly used to produce analog sounds (for example, listen to the
sound Noise Res 97-1). Extremely high settings of the Resonance parameter in
sounds that incorporate square or sawtooth waveforms, for example, makes the
filter oscillate so that it produces a pitch of its own.
5. VOLUME: this parameter intervenes on the sound’s Amplitude Envelope and
regulates the sound’s basic Volume (the maximum amplitude level).
Values: 0 ... 127.
Note: This parameter can also be regulated in real time by assigning “Volume” to
a Pedal in the Status Edit; Pedal Function Assign option.
Owner's Manual
Edit Section
4 - 60 Sounds
6. DYNAMIC: Determines how the Volume responds to Dynamic variations (keystrike velocity).
Values range from 0... 7.
“0” is equivalent to no response. The higher values give a louder sound
by increasing the Dynamic force applied to the notes.
7. ATTACK: intervenes on the Amplitude Envelope’s Attack rate; in other words, it
controls the time taken for the sound to reach maximum Amplitude level
after striking the note (Key on).
Values: 0... 127.
The “0” value provides maximum sound level at Key On. Increasing the
value increases the time taken for the sound to reach its peak.
Note: This parameter can also be regulated in real time by assigning “Attack” to
a Pedal in the Status Edit; Pedal Function Assign option.
8. RELEASE: intervenes on the Amplitude Envelope’s Release rate, in other words,
the time taken for the sound to decay to zero level after releasing the key
(Key off).
Values: 0... 127.
The "0" value “cuts” the sound’s envelope instantly after release. The
higher values increase the time taken for the sound’s volume to reach “0”
level.
Note: This parameter can also be regulated in real time by assigning “Release” to
a Pedal in the Status Edit; Pedal Function Assign option.
Store the modified Sound
After modifying the sound, use the STORE option to store it in a Performance (see
STORE further ahead).
If you wish to use the sound often, you can store the relative Performance bank to SRam
- this will ensure that your sound will be available after powering up.
Owner's Manual
Edit Section
Sounds 4 - 61
Drumkits (and Sound Patch)
Although these “sounds” are recalled using the same method used for “normal” sounds,
they differ in their structure.
Drumkit/Sound Patch
table
Piano Family
Rhodx
5-2
Guitar Family
DynGuit
29-3
Bass Family
DynBass1
34-2
DynBass2
35-2
DynBass3
37-2
String Family
DynOrch
48-3
Ensemble Family
OrchHit
56-1
Brass Family
DynTrump 60-3
Pipe Family
DynFlut1
74-2
DynFlut2
74-3
DynPan
76-3
Ethnic Family
TrptClar
108-3
SaxTrump
109-3
BrassEns
110-3
Drums Family
DKStand1 113-2
DKStand2 113-3
DKRoom1 114-2
DKRoom2 114-3
DKPower1 115-2
DKPower2 115-3
DKElect1
116-2
DKElect2
116-3
DKHouse1 117-2
DKHouse2 117-3
DKJazz
118-2
DKM1
118-3
DKBrush
119-2
DKSY77
119-3
DKOrch
120-2
DKWS2
120-3
Drumkits are constructed by assigning a different sound to each note of the keyboard.
Every note is completely independent from its neighbours and the Sound assigned to
each note can be programmed. The editing tasks affect the sound’s performance
parameters, such as transpose, panpot, tunings, and others.
Also incorporated is a Dynamic Threshold, above which another sound can be assigned
so that playing harder (increased Dynamics) triggers the sound on the higher dynamic
level.
While Drumkits are, generally, all programmed on one dynamic level, the Sound Patch
sounds, such as Rhodx, DynGuit, DynTrumpt and others, all make extensive use of the
incorporated “Dynamic Switch”. Here, two sounds covering preset keyboard extensions are separated by the dynamic threshold. Playing harder gains access to the second
dynamic level and, therefore, to the second sound or sounds.
The Drumkit Edit Menu
As already seen, these type of “sounds” show a completely different Edit display to the
“normal” sounds.
For example, if you examine the Drumkit DKJazz, pressing SOUNDS in the Edit
section shows the following display:
This display example shows the “Tambourine” assigned the note “F3#”.
The parameters available intervene on the sounds of all the notes of the drumkit.
The above display example refers to the lowest dynamic level, determined by the
SWITCH LEVEL. To pass to the second dynamic level, simply press EDIT 2.
Programming Drumkits
If you are programming a Drumkit, set the Dynamic Switch Level on the first page to
value 127 - this will exclude Level 2.
Programming two different Sounds for each note
If you want to program 2 different sounds in order that the second one is triggered by
playing harder, set the Dynamic Switch Level on page 1 to 126 or lower.
Owner's Manual
Edit Section
4 - 62 Sounds
The Drumkit Menu
1. KEY NOTE: displays the note that is associated to the currently displayed parameter values for the active layer. Whatever sound is assigned to this note
will be affected by the status of the parameters. Effectively, the Keynote
is where the editing takes place.
Value range: A0…C8.
If you rotate the Dial, you can scroll through all the notes of the keyboard
and see the percussion sound and relative parameter status of every note.
In practice, it is easier to use the CatchNote option to select the note that is going to be
programmed (see CatchNote below).
N.B. It is important to remember that the parameter modifications will only affect the
sound assigned to the Keynote. Therefore, when you modify a parameter, make
absolutely sure that you are playing the right note.
2. SOUND:
determines the sound that will be played by the displayed Key Note in the
active layer.
Value range: the entire ROM Sound map.
After selecting the parameter, simply rotate the Dial to obtain the required
sound. You can also use the SOUND BANKS as a quick way to go to the
required Sound Family, then use the Dial to scroll through the sounds.
N.B. If you are assigning a sound on the second dynamic level, make sure that the
Dynamic Switch in the first level is set to 126 or lower. If it is at 127, you will not
hear the sound by hitting the keys hard.
In a Drumkit, the Sound differs for all the notes of the keyboard and in most cases, only
one dynamic level is active.
In sounds such as Rhodx, the sound is usually the same for all the notes of the keyboard;
both dynamic levels are active and the sound on the second level is different
In some sounds, however, the second level consists of several different keyboard
“zones”, each one providing a different sound. Listen to DynOrch from the Strings
family. Play softly to hear Strings 1, play harder to hear “Crash” (cymbal) from A0 to
F#2, “Timpani” from G2 to F#3 and “Symphony” from G3 onwards.
3. VOLUME: determines the Volume of the sound assigned to the displayed Key note
of the active layer.
Value range: 0…127.
Simply select the parameter and rotate the Dial to specify the required
value.
A difference in Volume for each note is important when programming Drumkits (even
though the percussion ROM samples are already balanced and do not require adjustments of level); personal taste is very important when these types of sounds are mixed:
a more intense drum roll, a more accentuated crash etc.. These are important factors
which, when combined with the edited EFFECTS parameter, can be meticulously
programmed to suit all needs.
Owner's Manual
Edit Section
Sounds 4 - 63
4. PANPOT: determines the sound’s position in the Stereo Panorama (between the
internal Speakers or the Stereo outputs Left/Right).
Value range: -32… 0… +32.
“0” corresponds to the centre, -32 all to the left, +32 all to the right.
5. TRANSPOSE:
determines the transposition of the Sound with respect to the
note selected in the active layer.
Value range: -88… 0… +88.
This function is very important when programming Drumkits, or when
programming a sound to cover a particular extension of the keyboard
using the EXPAND option.
Why is transpose so important?
All the sample headers incorporated in the percussion ROM Sounds have an “ideal”
sampling frequency. To reproduce the correct sound, therefore, you must apply a
frequency “correction”, or allowance, so that the sound plays correctly when you strike
the relative note. The correction is achieved with the Transpose parameter.
Drumkit programming and the Transpose parameter
If you consult the PERCUSSION SAMPLE Table in the Appendix, you will see that all
percussion instrument sounds provide the correct timbre if they play at the frequency
corresponding to a specific note on the keyboard.
Therefore, the idea is to transpose a percussion sound to its correct “sample note” after
assigning it to a particular keynote.
Example
Starting with the Drumkit DKJazz, let’s suppose that you want the sound BRUSH to play
at note E2 in place of the programmed SDBRUSH2. From the Percussion Sample table,
you can see that the sample note for BRUSH corresponds to C5.
NOTE 1:
WX2 = lowest E,
WX400 = 2nd lowest E.
Select CATCHNOTE and press note E21.
Select the SOUND parameter and rotate the DIAL (clockwise) until BRUSH is selected.
Now the sound must be transposed to a value that corresponds to the “distance” in
semitones from E2 to the sample note C5.
Select the TRANSPOSE parameter and simply count how many semitones there are
from the keynote E2 to the sample note C5. The value to specify, therefore, is 32.
NB. In cases where you want to assign an instrument to a note that is higher than the
corresponding sample note, the Transpose value should be negative (count the semitone
distance from the higher note down to C5 and specify a negative value).
6. TUNE:
fine tunes the current transpose value.
Value range: –64... 0… +64
Each step corresponds to 1/64th of a semitone.
We suggest the following uses for Tune:
1.
To fine tune an otherwise too precise transpose value assigned to drumkit
instruments, in order to give a more natural effect;
Owner's Manual
Edit Section
4 - 64 Sounds
2.
To fine tune each note of sounds such as Strings, again in order to simulate a natural
effect to a greater degree.
7. EXCLUDE: creates a situation where notes that have been assigned the same
exclude value (1, 2 or 3) cannot be played simultaneously. The value 0 =
off.
Value range: 0, 1, 2, 3 (0 = no effect)
In practice, this parameter renders all the sounds that have been assigned
the same value monophonic.
In a drumkit, for example, the hi-hat open and hi-hat closed can be assigned the same
exclude number: in this manner, the hi-hat closed sound will interrupt the hi-hat open
sound (and vice-versa).
The same applies to the sampled sounds produced by the same instrument (congas played
at the centre or the borders, ride cup or ride crash, snare roll or snare rim, triangle open
or closed etc.).
8. EFFECT: directs the displayed sound of the active layer to the Effects. (Eff. 1, Eff.
2, Eff.1/Eff.2) or disengages it from both (Off).
9. SWITCH LEVEL determines the dynamic threshold that divides the two dynamic
levels.
Value range: 0... 127.
This value sets the maximum dynamic limit for the 1st. level and the
minimum dynamic level for the 2nd. level.
The assigned value represents the point at which the second dynamic level is triggered
by hitting the note(s) harder. This parameter is only shown at the lowest level page.
NB. The second dynamic level is enabled only if the Switch Level in the first level is
given a value of 126 or less.
The Drumkit Commands
As well as the menu parameters, the Drumkits and Sound Patch have several commands
(in addition to those common to both types of edit display) that are activated with the
relative Function buttons.
EDIT 1 & EDIT 2:
passes from one dynamic level to another.
Press EDIT 2 to access the second level which has identical parameters, except for
the Switch Level which is not present:
The lower the Switch Level, the easier it is to trigger the sound on the second
dynamic level.
Owner's Manual
Edit Section
Sounds 4 - 65
EXPAND:
the modifications effected on a single note can be expanded across a
specified note range. This avoids having to repeat the same set of editing
steps for each note.
Press EXPAND and press the keys on the keyboard to delimit the required zone
for the selected sound.
NOTE:
You can also use the
Up/Down cursor
arrows to select the edit
zone in the displayed
box and rotate the Dial
to specify the required
note.
Press ENT to confirm the entry. Press ESC will cancel the command.
CATCH NOTE: assigns the note that is going to be programmed to the KeyNote.
Pressing CatchNote displays a message inviting you to “Press a key...”.
Press a note and the relative sound and parameters for the KeyNote will be
displayed.
Owner's Manual
Edit Section
4 - 66 Sounds
The Commands common to both Edit Displays
The “Normal” Sounds and Drumkits have the following commands in common.
LIBRARY, STORE, COMPARE, EFFECTS.
When the options are selected, they are shown in reverse-highlight.
EFFECTS
When the EFFECTS option is highlighted (selected) the Sound is edited “wet”.
To bypass the Effects
Deactivate the EFFECTS option to bypass the Effects processor (reverse-highlighting
is cancelled) and edit your sound “dry”.
If you want to hear the Sound in edit with a different effect, press the EFF 1/2 button to
access the EFFECTS menu then select the Effect required. If both Effects are enabled,
go into Performance Edit and set the Effects parameter to the required status.
Note: when you temporarily escape the edit, you will not hear the Sound in its current
edited form, but the one assigned to the track of the current performance. The Sound must
be Stored to the current Performance before being heard (see Store).
Press the SOUNDS button to return to the sound in edit.
COMPARE
COMPARE is used to compare the modified sound with the original ROM sound. This
is an important command which helps you to monitor even the smallest parameter
changes.
Simply press COMPARE at any time while editing to recall the sound’s original
parameter values.
Owner's Manual
Edit Section
Sounds 4 - 67
Press COMPARE again to return to the sound currently in edit and restore the modified
parameter values.
If, after comparing, the sound currently in edit is not wanted, you can choose to abort the
edit of the sound and select a different one.
You have two methods to choose from:
1.
Press ESC to abort the editing - this will cancel all parameter modifications and
escape sound edit. At this point you can enter sound edit with the same sound and
start again, or you can select a different sound to edit.
2.
Press LIBRARY and select a sound (rotate the Dial or use the Sound Banks to go
directly to a Sound Family and rotate the Dial).
Press ENTER and the sound will be copied to the edit buffer.
Press EDIT to access the edit of the newly selected sound.
NB. When COMPARE is selected, all other options are disabled.
LIBRARY
Press this option to enter the instrument’s Sound Library:
The sound
family
will also
be shown.
This is where you can scroll all the sounds in ROM.
The LIBRARY offers several sub-options:
SEARCH:
Use this option to look for a sound by specifying some (or all) of the
characters that make up the name.
A typical sequence of events could be as follows:
Press Search (F3)
Specify some characters using the keys of the keyboard:
Owner's Manual
Edit Section
4 - 68 Sounds
Press ENT. You will leave the Search option and the first available sound containing the
sequence of specified characters will be displayed:
IMPORTANT
You cannot add, move
or delete the ROM
sounds in the Library.
At this point, you can also rotate the DIAL or use the Up/Down cursor arrows to search
for other related sounds within the same family.
Use the Sound Banks to go directly to a Family
You can go directly to a Sound Family by pressing the relative Sound Bank.
Substitution of the sound in edit with another from the Library
After accessing the Library, select a sound by using Search, by rotating the Dial, or by
using the Up/Down cursor arrows.
Note that the top
bar of the
display
continues to
show the sound
currently in edit.
Press ENT to substitute the sound currently in edit with the selected one:
Note the change
in the top bar of
the display.
Press EDIT to access the Edit of the selected sound:
N.B. The substituted sound will also be assigned to the selected track of the current
Performance.
RESTORE: use this option to restore the original parameter values of the sound
currently in edit.
NOTE: This is only valid for the Sound in edit for the current Performance.
Restore does not affect other variations of the same sound stored elsewhere.
The “Are you sure” display is shown where you can choose to confirm the
“Restore” command, or refuse with ESC and retain the modifications.
Owner's Manual
Edit Section
Sounds 4 - 69
STORE
EDIT:
DELETE:
used to access the STORE command as discussed further ahead.
returns to the edit of the sound currently in edit.
use this option to cancel SAMPLES loaded from DISK (including their
eventual modifications). You can select the loaded Sample directly from
the Sound Library or it can be currently in edit..
HOW TO DELETE A SAMPLE:
Select the loaded Sample in the Sound Library and press ENT:
Press DELETE:
Press ENT to confirm the operation:
After a short period the Sample will be cancelled.
NOTE:
The Delete option does not apply to ROM sounds or to edited sounds.
If you attempt to delete any sound other than a Sample loaded from Disk, an appropriate
warning will be displayed:
Press ESC to cancel the display.
Owner's Manual
Edit Section
4 - 70 Sounds
STORE
Use STORE to store your edited Sound in a Performance:
Use the Up/Down cursor arrows to select the element required and rotate the Dial to
select the destination.
Confirming with ENT twice (the first time shows the “Are You Sure?” message) updates
the display and the edited sound is shown in place of one of the “EMPTY” slots.
At this point, you can choose to store the modified sound in as many other Performances
as required.
IMPORTANT
Only one variation of the source ROM Sound can be stored in the same Performance.
A Performance makes no distinctions between two or more variations created from the
same ROM Sound.
If, after storing a modified sound, you try to store a second variation of the same sound
in another position of the same Performance, you will be reminded with the following
message:
Press ENTER to confirm.
The modified sound stored in the first position will be substituted by the second variation:
Owner's Manual
Edit Section
Sounds 4 - 71
If you press ESC, the previously stored sound will remain, you will leave the Store
command and return to the Sound currently in edit.
If you try to Store a modified sound in a position already occupied, you will be prompted
with the following message:
ATTENTION!!
The STORE command IS NOT the same as the SAVE PERFORMANCE command
This concept must be absolutely clear to the user.
A modified sound is NOT memorised in the Sound Library for the purpose of recalling
it to save it in one of the tracks of a Performance with the Save Performance process.
Using STORE, the sound is “embedded” in a Performance and is found by recalling the
relative Performance then selecting the respective Sound Family Bank which houses the
type of sound.
For example, using the display above, the modified version of the Sound WXGrandP
is shown to be stored in the Bank Performances, Bank N. 1, Performance 1 - this is
equivalent to BANK PERF 1, Performance PIANO.
This means that every time you recall the sound WXGrandP in Performance PIANO (for
any number of tracks), it will always be the modified WXGrandP previously stored in
that Performance, until changed or substituted by a different sound.
The WXGrandP recalled in all other Performances that have not stored a WXGrandP
variation will always recall the original ROM sound when the relative Family bank is
opened.
NOTE THAT THE POSITION STORED TO IS OF NO IMPORTANCE. The
modified sound will always be found in its relative Family Bank after recalling the
respective Performance.
As another example, a variation of JazzGtr1 can be stored in, say, Bank Perf 2,
Performance 8 which is equivalent to the Performance “LYLE” in the Perf 2 bank. If you
recall Performance Lyle, you will note that the sound JazzGtr1 is not displayed. But, if
you recall the relative Sound Family and select JazzGrt1, it will be the variation stored
in the current Performance.
Suggestion: You are strongly advised to carry out some experiments here - going
through some practical examples helps a great deal. If you want to re-use your edited
sounds (particularly those that took all day to edit!), memorise the Performance Banks
containing the sounds to SRam. You will be sure to find your favourite sounds after
switching on. As a safety measure, always Save your edited work to DISK.
Owner's Manual
Edit Section
4 - 72 Sounds
N.B. Modified Sounds can ONLY be stored using the STORE command.
If, after modifying a sound, you press ESCAPE (instead of Store), you will Abort the
sound edit and loose all edited data - NO WARNING WILL BE GIVEN.
If, after editing a Sound, you press ENTER or SOUNDS (instead of Store), you will
escape the Edit without losing the modified data.
Re-entering edit by pressing SOUNDS will display the parameters in exactly the same
condition as they were when you left.
An attempt to return to the Edit with a different sound, however, will display the
following message:
Press ENT (yes) to confirm the Abort command and to enter Edit Sound with the different
Sound.
Suggestion: Use this method for a quick way of substituting the sound currently in Edit
with another one if you are not satisfied with the current sound.
Press ESC (no) to refuse the option and remain in edit of the previous sound.
Preload and Edit Sound
If you escape Edit Sound temporarily (by pressing SOUNDS), WX will prevent you from
performing a PRELOAD operation. An attempt to preload a Song will prompt the
following message:
Press ESC to escape from the display and Abort Edit Sound if you want to Preload a Song
from Disk.
Owner's Manual
Edit Section
MIDI 4 - 73
EDIT MIDI
EDIT
DISK
PERF
SOUNDS
MIXER
EFF1/2
MIDI
STATUS
SPLITS
ARRAN
CLOCK
PAGE-
PAGE+
This is where you can configure WX’s MIDI channels for the tracks of the current
Performance, its response to incoming MIDI messages, as well as customise those that
the WX sends to other MIDI devices. Some general MIDI controls are also available. For
detailed information about how to use WX in MIDI setups, refer to Chapter 7, “MIDI &
the WX”.
Press the MIDI button in the Edit Section to enter MIDI Edit mode.
Depending on the currently selected mode (Real Time Perf, Style or Song modes),
accessing the MIDI Edit mode shows the channel configuration that relates to the mode.
The above display shows the default situation relating to all Real Time Performances.
If you scroll the tracks and activate them, you’ll see that each track number corresponds
to the same channel number.
Style mode shows situations like this:
Song mode shows:
The one thing in common in all modes is the Drum track: this is assigned MIDI Channel
10 in conformity with General MIDI Standards.
Navigation
Use the cursor diamond’s Left and Right arrows to pass from the left column to the right
and the Up/Down arrows to move the highlighted edit zone vertically.
Rotate the Dial to specify the required value or status.
The TOGGLE can be used to switch from Out 1 to Out 2 and as an On/Off switch where
applicable.
When you exit MIDI mode, WX remembers which page you were working on. The next
time you enter MIDI mode, the same page appears.
Owner's Manual
Edit Section
4 - 74 MIDI
Master and Slave
WX is fully implemented for MIDI operations and can act as a Master controlling unit,
or a Slave device being controlled by an eternal controlling unit. In either case, the tracks
or sections of both units must communicate across the same MIDI channels.
The default MIDI
status.
When you receive your
WX, all the Tracks are
enabled to transmit
MIDI on OUT port 1
and the MIDI relative
channels are set as
follows for the various
modes:
Real Time Perf mode
Track - Channel N°.
1
1
2
2
…
…
5
5
6
6
…
…
9
9
10
10
11
11
…
15
15
16
16
Song mode
Track - Channel N°.
1
Off
2
Off
…
…
5
Off
6
Off
…
…
9
Off
10
Off
11
Off
…
15
Off
16
16
ROM/Prog. Style mode
Track - Channel N°.
1
10
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
In all modes, the WX Drum track is assigned MIDI Channel 10 by default in conformity
with General MIDI Standards.
If you are using WX as a Master and the Slave shows the General MIDI logo on the front
panel, the “Drum” section will undoubtedly be assigned channel 10. If, however, the
slave does not conform to GM, you can programme the MIDI channels of the external
instrument so that they correspond with WX.
Assigning the MIDI Channels and Out port
Pressing MIDI in the Edit section for the first time gains access to the first of three MIDI
pages:
The “CHANNELS” page allows you to assign a MIDI channel and the relative Out port
(Out 1 or 2) to each track of the current Performance. WX is supplied with factory settings
(see margin) but they can be changed to suit any particular requirement.
Procedure:
Select the track with the Up/Down Cursor arrows and rotate the Dial to specify the
required channel (1 - 16) or set the track to “Off”.
Go to the right column with the right cursor arrow to select the Out port and specify Out
1 or Out 2 with the Toggle.
The channel settings are valid for reception as well as transmission.
Memorising the setting
The setting can be memorised for the current Performance by pressing ENT twice. You
can memorise a different setting for each Performance of the currently selected mode.
Owner's Manual
Edit Section
MIDI 4 - 75
A particular setting for all Performances of all modes can be fixed by setting “MIDI
Channel Lock” to “ON” (see “Other” MIDI page discussed further ahead).
What does WX transmit and receive ?
WX transmits and receives the following information:
Note On
Channel Pressure:
Pressing a key affects
the entire MIDI
channel.
Poly Pressure:
Poly affects only the
note to which pressure
is applied.
The control data
identified with the
symbol † is also shared
by the Common
channel.
Data identified with the
double symbol †† is
transits only on the
MIDI Common channel.
Controller 0 transmitted
on the Common channel
is interpreted as Bank
Change data - see Bank
Change data.
message generated by pressing a key. Included in the message is the Note
Number and the Velocity with which the Note is pressed;
Note Off
message generated by releasing a key. Included in the message is the
Velocity with which the Note is released;
Program Change message generated when a sound is changed (the number of the newly
selected sound is transmitted);
After Touch message generated by key after-pressure and used to modify the notes
being played. WX transmits Channel pressure and receives Channel and
Poly pressure;
Pitch Bend Change
message typically generated by the movement of the wheel
using left-right movements. This message alters the Pitch of the note with
an excursion of ±2 semitones;
Control Change message generated when a controller other than a key (e.g. a Wheel,
Pedal, Switch, etc.) is moved in order to modify a sound of a note
(modulation, sustain, volume, etc.). Also included are Bank Change data,
transmitted and received on the MIDI Common. WX generates this type
of data by selecting a Bank and its associated element (Real Time
Performance, Int. Style, etc.).
The control change messages transmitted and received by WX:
(00) Controller 0†
(01) Modulation
(04) Foot controller
(07) Main volume†
(10) Panorama
(11) Expression
(12) Attack GEM
(13) Release GEM
(14) Filter 1 GEM
(15) Filter 2 GEM
(20) Filter 1+2 GEM
(64) Damper
(66) Sostenuto
(67) Soft pedal
The following are not
transmitted, only received
(70) Start/Stop††
(71) Var/Cont††
(72) Intro/End††
(73) Fill/Tap††
(74) Rec†
(75) <<††
(76) >>††
(77) Punch††
(78) Man. Perf.††
(79) Sync††
(80) Tempo fix††
(90) Rotary Slow/
Fast††
WX can generate the data from 00 - 67 and 90 by assigning the relative controller to a
programmable Pedal. Modulation (01) is also generated by the Wheel and the Foot
command (04) is generated by a Pedal connected to the Volume socket on the rear panel.
Owner's Manual
Edit Section
4 - 76 MIDI
The control data from 70 - 80 simulate the Sequencer controls.
Bank Change data transmitted and received ONLY on the MIDI Common channel:
Bank Program Change
08 0 - 23 Real Time Performances
[0 = Perf 1, Bank 1, 1 = Perf 2, Bank 1 … 8 = Perf 9, Bank 2 … 16 = Perf
17, Bank 3, 23 = Perf 24, Bank 3]
16 0 - 7 Songs
[0 = Song 1, 1 = Song 2 … 6 = Song 7, 7 = Song 8]
24 0 - 7 Current Song Performance
[0 = Song Perf 1, 1 = Song Perf 2 … 6 = Song Perf 7, 7 = Song Perf 8]
32 0 - 31 Programmable Styles
[0 = Prog Style 1, Bank 1, 1 = P. Style 2, Bank 1 … 8 = P. Style 9, Bank 2
… 16 = P. Style 17, Bank 3 … 24 = P. Style 25, Bank 4, 31 = P. Style 32, Bank
4]
32 32 - 95 Internal Styles
[32 = Int Style 1, Bank 1, 33 = Int. Style 2, Bank 1 … 40 = Int. Style 9, Bank
2 … 48 = Int. Style 17, Bank 3 … 56 = Int. Style 25, Bank 4 … 64 = Int. Style
33, Bank 5 … 72 = Int. Style 41, Bank 6 … 80 = Int. Style 49, Bank 7 … 88
= Int. Style 57, Bank 8, 95 = Int. 64, Bank 8]
48 0 - 23 Effect 1 Select (Reverb)
[0 = Hall 1, 2 = Hall 2 … 22 = Stereo3_1, 23 = Stereo4_1]
49 0 - 23 Effect 2 Select (Delay, Chorus/Modulation)
[0 = Delay1_1, 1 = Delay1_2 … 22 = PanMix_2, 23 = PanMix_3]
In addition, the WX also receives the following data ONLY on MIDI Common,
generated by the “older” instruments not capable of transmitting Bank Change data. In
this case, the transmission of Bank 0 (controller 0) is optional:
Bank Program Change
00
00
00
00
0 - 23 Real Time Performances
[0 = Perf 1, Bank 1, 1 = Perf 2, Bank 1 … 8 = Perf 9, Bank 2 … 16 = Perf
17, Bank 3, 23 = Perf 24, Bank 3]
24 - 31 Songs
[24 = Song 1, 25 = Song 2 … 31 = Song 8]
32 - 63 Programmable Styles
[32 = Prog Style 1, Bank 1, 33 = P. Style 2, Bank 1 … 40 = P. Style 9, Bank
2 … 48 = P. Style 17, Bank 3 … 56 = P. Style 25, Bank 4, 63 = P. Style 32,
Bank 4]
64 - 127 Internal Styles
[64 = Int Style 1, Bank 1, 65 = Int. Style 2, Bank 1 … 72 = Int. Style 9, Bank
2 … 80 = Int. Style 17, Bank 3 … 88 = Int. Style 25, Bank 4 … 96 = Int. Style
33, Bank 5 … 104 = Int. Style 41, Bank 6 … 112 = Int. Style 49, Bank 7 …
120 = Int. Style 57, Bank 8 … 127 = Int. 64, Bank 8]
For more details, consult the MIDI Implementation chart in the Appendix.
Owner's Manual
Edit Section
MIDI 4 - 77
MIDI Filters
Filters can be very useful in cases where particular MIDI messages are not required.
For example, if WX is slaved to an instrument that sends control messages that may cause
some interference with the instrument, they can be filtered from the incoming MIDI
stream. Similarly, you can filter off messages from the WX MIDI OUT data so that the
receiving unit does not receive the unwanted data.
Filters prove to be particularly useful when MIDI IN data is merged with MIDI OUT
data, using the MIDI MERGE function (see MIDI Merge further ahead).
Press PAGE to access the MIDI FILTERS page:
This page is entirely dedicated to the assignment of up to 6 MIDI IN filters and 6 MIDI
OUT filters to each Track of the current Performance.
The display shows two columns, one for the IN stream and the other for the OUT stream.
The first four messages are fixed and can be made to pass or they can be filtered. The
remaining two items are programmable and allow the specified data to be filtered.
When a Filter is set to “Off”, all data passes.
When a Filter is set to “On”, or in the case of the last two menu items, when specific data
is specified, it is eliminated from the MIDI stream.
The Filter parameters
Poly pressureThis is an Aftertouch message that WX cannot generate but it can receive
through MIDI IN. Filtering this message from the MIDI IN stream
prevents its reception.
In more complex situations, WX can process MIDI data by merging
MIDI IN data with MIDI OUT (using MIDI Merge - discussed further
ahead). In this case, if the merged data being transmitted at MIDI OUT
contains POLY Pressure that might not be required by the receiving unit,
it can be filtered off.
Program Change
Filtering this message could be useful in certain advanced cases
involving three or more instruments and exploiting the MIDI MERGE
function (see MIDI Merge).
After Touch Filtering this message (Mono touch) prevents the relative data from being
received or transmitted. This is particularly useful in cases where a
receiving instrument could interpret Aftertouch information in a manner
that could interfere with the correct operation of the instrument.
Pitch bend Pitch bend data can be filtered from both IN and OUT streams. This is
particularly useful in cases where a receiving instrument could interpret
Pitch Bend information in a manner that could interfere with the correct
operation of the instrument.
Owner's Manual
Edit Section
4 - 78 MIDI
Control ( )
Both these parameters are programmable and allow you to select an MIDI
message or Controller to filter from the MIDI IN or OUT stream.
Simply select the parameter and rotate the Dial to select the data to be
filtered.
For example, instruments of other manufacturers might implement one or more of the
undefined controllers (e.g. 12 - 15) to transmit specific data relating to the instrument that
could give rise to some problems with the WX, owing to the fact that WX implements
the same controllers in a different manner.
The following table lists all the MIDI Messages and Controller numbers that can be
excluded from the MIDI IN and OUT data stream (the list is valid for both MIDI
FILTERS).
MIDI CONTROLLERS
Controllers marked
with the symbol †
transit on the MIDI
Common channel.
*(Sustain)
**(Detune)
(00) Bank Change 0†
(01) Modulation
(02) Breath Controller
(03) Controller 3
(04) Foot Controller
(05) Portamento time
(06) Data Entry MSB
(07) Main Volume†
(08) Balance
(09) Control 9
(10) Panorama
(11) Expression
(12) Attack GEM
(13) Release GEM
(14) Filter 1 GEM
(15) Filter 2 GEM
(16) Gen. purp. Contr. 1
(17) Gen. purp. Contr. 2
(18) Gen. purp. Contr. 3
(19) Gen. purp. Contr. 4
(20) Filter 1+2 GEM
(21... 31) Control 21... 31
(64) Damper Pedal*
(65) Portamento
(66) Sostenuto
(67) Soft Pedal
(68) Control 68
(69) Hold 2
(70...79) Controllers 70...79
Owner's Manual
(80) Gen. purp. Contr. 5
(81) Gen. purp. Contr. 6
(82) Gen. purp. Contr. 7
(83) Gen. purp. Contr. 8
(84...89) Controllers 84...89
(90) Rotary Slow/Fast†
(91) Ext. Effect Depth
(92) Tremolo Depth
(93) Chorus Depth
(94) Celeste Depth**
(95) Phaser Depth
(96) Data increment
(97) Data decrement
(98) Non-Registered Parameter
Number LSB
(99) Non-Registered Parameter
Number MSB
(100) Registered Parameter Number
LSB
(101) Registered Parameter Number
MSB
(102... 120) Control 102... 120
(121) Reset control
(122) Local control
(123) All note off
(124) Omni mode off
(125) Omni mode on
(126) Mono mode on
(127) Poly mode on.
Edit Section
MIDI 4 - 79
The “Special” MIDI controllers
Generalmusic have implemented some of the unused MIDI Controllers of the standard
MIDI protocol as control codes for the respective Edit Sound parameters.
(12) Attack GEM
(13) Release GEM
(14) Filter 1 GEM
(15) Filter 2 GEM
(20) Filter 1+2 GEM
(90) Rotary Slow/Fast
Owner's Manual
affects the Attack sound parameter.
affects the Release sound parameter.
affects the Cut-off 1 sound parameter.
affects the Cut-off 2 sound parameter.
affects both Cut-off 12 and 2 sound parameters.
change of speed slow <–> fast of the Rotary effect (this control
transits on the MIDI Common channel only).
Edit Section
4 - 80 MIDI
MIDI Other
Press PAGE + to pass to the “MIDI Other” page:
This page contains general MIDI functions that influence the instrument as a whole.
CLOCK: selects INT(ernal) or EXT(ernal) Clock.
The CLOCK is a synchronising signal, common to all MIDI equipment. It recognises
START, STOP and TEMPO commands which permit the simultaneous execution of
PLAY and RECORD on two Sequencers (for example, between two WX2s via MIDI).
When this parameter is set to “INT”, the WX Sequencer can start, stop or play an external
sequencer or drum machine by means of the Sequencer controls (START/STOP and <<
or >>). The external device in this case will share the Tempo specified by WX.
If the receiving equipment also receives the Song Position data, WX also transmits the
Song Position Pointer which can arrest an external Sequencer at a very precise point.
When this parameter is set to EXT, the WX sequencer waits to receive a Start message
from the external device.
COMMON CHANNEL: assigns a channel (1-16 or Off).
Assigning a Channel to MIDI Common overrides all Channel settings for all the
Performances. The setting is valid for transmission as well as reception.
The MIDI Common is a “special” channel which transmits and receives messages such
as Bank Change data (the Program changes for the Real Time Performances, the Progr.
Styles, the Songs, etc.), Control Change data relating to the Sequencer functions, (Var/
Cont, Fill/Tap, Rec, >>, <<, Manual Perf, Tempo Fix, etc.) and more.
When MIDI Common is “Off”, WX recognises all connected external MIDI devices
(Master Keyboard, Synthesizer, etc.) as normal MIDI In Sources of events which
converge on the Tracks activated to receive MIDI IN data (see EDIT PERF - Configuration).
When MIDI Common is enabled, it transmits and receives on one channel only (Channel
1 - 16). Data is received at the MIDI IN port and transmitted on one of the specified MIDI
OUT ports (OUT 1 – OUT 2).
Common at MIDI IN
The MIDI Common received at MIDI IN can be used to communicate with the
instrument as a whole, overriding the individual track channel settings. The messages
that transit on the Common channel are regarded by WX as if they originated from its
own keyboard and respective controllers (Pedals, Wheel).
For example, an 88 note Master Keyboard can communicate with WX2 on MIDI
Owner's Manual
Edit Section
MIDI 4 - 81
Common to exploit a wider keyboard range (A0-C8). An instrument with only one MIDI
channel can communicate on MIDI Common and use the WX Keyboard programmed
as several split ranges (each with a different Sound).
WX can receive Control Change data in the form of Bank Change information on the
Common channel (see “Bank Change data” on page 4.77). WX recognises this type of
data from sources that transmit Program Change only (Bank 0 - 127) as well as those
capable of transmitting Bank Change data (e.g. Bank 08, P. Change 0-23 for Real Time
Performances).
Also included is Control Change data that simulates the Sequencer functions (Start/Stop,
Intro/End, Fill/Tap, Var/Cont, Rec, <<, >>, Punch, Manual Perf., Sync, Tempo fix).
Common at MIDI OUT
WX can use the MIDI COMMON to transmit general WX control information to an
external compatible MIDI device or other instrument such as a Sequencer. In such a case,
WX can transmit data such as Bank Change (e.g. Bank 8 P. Change 0-23: Real Time Perf)
and the MIDI Controller (07) Pedal Volume and Rotary Slow/Fast (90).
MERGE: Activates (On) or deactivates (Off) the function.
When merge is “Off”, messages received on MIDI IN are directed to the instrument’s
internal generator (WX Sounds) and redirected to the MIDI THRU in the same form as
they entered. The incoming MIDI data cannot be transmitted on MIDI OUT; it can only
be directed to the WX internal Sound engine.
When “On” Merge directs messages originating from MIDI IN to the MIDI OUT ports,
merging them with the LOCAL source data (originating from the WX keyboard and
controllers) and the Sequencer data (Songs).
Example:
An external Sequencer can be connected to the WX MIDI IN and an expander to the
MIDI OUT.
Local
Track 1
Midi Out
Midi In
When MIDI MERGE is off, the expander can only receive messages originating from
the WX keyboard (Local). The events originating from the external Sequencer communicating with Track 1 can only be directed to the WX sound generator.
If Track 1, for example, is destined to MIDI OUT, by setting Merge to “On”, the
messages generated by the external Sequencer and by the WX Keyboard will be merged
and will then converge on the external expander connected to the WX MIDI OUT.
The MIDI MERGE function is particularly useful when combined with the MIDI filters
which process messages “in transit”. In all cases, this function simplifies MIDI
connections and avoids having to purchase a Thru/Merge box.
Owner's Manual
Edit Section
4 - 82 MIDI
SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE: enables the instrument for System Exclusive
operations (On).
When this parameter is set to Off, System Exclusive operations are excluded.
System Exclusive is the term that describes the interfacing of the WX instrument with
other devices (Sequencer, Host computer, etc.). System messages are not assigned to any
particular MIDI Channel. They are recognised by MIDI receivers regardless of the basic
channel to which they are sent. The messages are Hexadecimal codes and each
instrument’s System Exclusive messages have their own format according to an assigned
manufacturer’s ID number. System Exclusive sends data such as patch parameters,
sampler data, or a sequencer memory bulk dump. A format which is appropriate to the
particular type of transmitter is required.
A typical connection is a WX2 and a computer. In practice, System Exclusive can dump
an entire block of data at high speed; it can be used to transfer, for example, the entire
contents of a WX Bank/Song into a computer and so build a library of Songs.
Another common use of System Exclusive is to programme the instrument by accessing
the Edit environment through a computer which makes use of a program specifically
prepared for this task. This kind of work utilises System Exclusive as the means of
communication between the computer and the instrument.
MIDI CHANNEL LOCK: locks a MIDI channel configuration for
the instrument as a whole.
This function is valid for transmission and reception, fixing a Channel configuration for
all Performances (Real Time, Style and Song), overriding the individual MIDI channel
assignments for the instrument’s Performances.
In practice, MIDI CHANNEL LOCK provides the instrument with a means of communication with all connected units across a “standard” MIDI configuration (programmed
in the MIDI Channel page).
Connecting with MIDI
Accordions
Some instruments may
have incorrect octave
transpositions when
connected to a MIDI
Accordion.
You can correct this
using one of two
solutions:
1. Transpose the
relative WX tracks (Edit
Performance Transpose function).
2. Transpose the
Accordion section
accordingly.
This function is particularly useful in cases that involve, for example, loading a song that
contains complex Performances which could alter your MIDI setup. For example, you
may be in concert and the Song you are about to load may have been produced in a Studio
by a setup consisting of 28 external expanders and a Midi mixer, all piloted by WX - the
result would be destructive to your programmed MIDI setup that may have taken hours
to perfect.
A MIDI Accordion communicating with WX would also require a locked MIDI Channel
configuration. For example, if the MIDI Accordion has to exploit the WX Styles,
program the Styles MIDI Configuration to the required setup then set MIDI LOCK to
ON. The MIDI configuration could be as follows:
WX
Accordion
Drum (Track 1) = [Ch 10] OFF or Ch.10
N/A
Bass (Track 2) = Ch 3
Bass section = Ch 3
Accompaniment (Tracks 3 & 4) = Ch. 2
Chords section = Ch 2
Track 5 = Ch 2
Chords section = Ch 2
Track 6 = Ch 1
Treble section = Ch 1
Owner's Manual
Edit Section
MIDI 4 - 83
WX MIDI COMMON = Ch 2 (for the Chords)
WX Edit Split = set “Lock” (page 1) and CHORD SPLIT B7 (Page 2).
WX MIDI CHANNEL LOCK = ON.
GENERAL MIDI: Affects GS and GM MIDI Standard Files
General Midi, as a standard, stipulates that playing back a Song originating from another
sequencer must bear resemblance to the original to the nearest degree. In fact, General
Midi must ensure the following:
1.
Any Program Change numbers used must call up the same type of sound on the
other unit.
2.
The MIDI Note numbers assigned to the drum and percussion instruments have to
be the same and on the same channel (channel 10).
3.
The polyphony of the other unit must be at least as high as the original one.
4.
The other unit must respond to any MIDI Control Change that have been used, such
as MIDI Volume and Modulation.
In practice, when you load a MIDI Standard File from disk into the WX memory, or
receive data via MIDI, the above stipulations will be respected if the parameter
GENERAL MIDI is ON. Furthermore all the Program Change numbers relating to the
GS Drumkits or GM Percussion sounds received on Channel 10 will be converted and
addressed to the WX Drumkits to guarantee the correct sound on the drum track.
Conversion table for GS or GM Standard transmitted to WX on MIDI Channel 10:
Drumkits
Standard (GM)
Room (GS)
Power (GS)
Electric
TR808
Jazz
Brush
Orch
P. Change
0-0 (incl 1-0 … 7-0)
8-0 (incl 8-0 … 15-0)
16-0 (incl 17-0 … 23-0)
24-0
25-0 (incl 26-0 … 31-0)
32-0 (incl 33-0 … 39-0)
40-1 (incl 41-0 … 47-0)
48-0 ( (incl 49 -0 … 7-0)
WX P. Change
112-1
113-1
114-1
115-1
116-1
117-1
118-1
119-1
All Pr. Changes above 49-0 recall the Standard drumkit 112-1
In transmission, the inverse is also true for Channel 10 when General MIDI is ON. For
example, if you send the WX DKStandard drumkit on channel 10, the receiving unit
receives Program change 0.
Note: Generalmusic has adopted the system where program changes from 0 to 127 are
displayed as 1-128, therefore, the Jazz Drumkit (117-1) displays program change 1182.
Owner's Manual
Edit Section
4 - 84 Arrange
EDIT ARRANGE
EDIT
DISK
PERF
SOUNDS
MIXER
EFF1/2
MIDI
STATUS
SPLITS
ARRAN
CLOCK
PAGE-
PAGE+
The ARRANG function gains access to all the parameters which affect the Styles
(Internal, Programmable and Song Styles).
All the Arranger parameters affect the part of the keyboard dedicated to playing Rhythms
and Arrangements (in Style mode).
You will find explanations of how these parameters affect the Styles in the Internal Styles
Chapter 5.
The Arranger does not affect the Real Time Perfdormances or Song Mode.
The ARRANGE parameters
KEY START
Starts the Style the instant a chord is formed on the part of the keyboard dedicated to
chord playing. When you release the keys, the Style stops (provided that the Memory
function is Off - see below).
If Memory is active, releasing the keys has no effect - the Style continues to play (see
Memory below)
In default, Key Start is “Off”. If you activate “Key Start”, Memory is deactivated
automatically (if active).
CHORD MODE
This parameter provides three options:
ONE FINGER:
FINGERED:
FREE:
recalls the principal chords in a simplified manner;
plays the notes effectively pressed;
allows chord to be recognised across the entire keyboard,
overriding the Chord Split of the Styles.
Summing-up:
If you play note “C” with the ONE FINGER option active, the “C” major chord will be
recognised and the major riff will be played.
With the FINGERED option active, the major chord is recognised and the relative riff
is played. In practice, only the notes effectively pressed are played therefore, if you play
only the note “C”, the Riff will play with sparse accompaniment;
Owner's Manual
Edit Section
Arrange 4 - 85
With the FREE option active, pressing the single note “C” does not provoke a reaction
from the sequencer because at least three notes must be pressed at the same time to
recognise a chord. The novelty lies in the fact that a chord can be recognised in any part
of the keyboard overriding the currently set Chord Split.
BASS FOLLOW
Affects the automatic Bass pattern of a Style
When Bass Follow is “Off”, the automatic bass line of a Style follows the recorded
pattern irrespective of the chords played.
When Bass Follow is “On,” you can change the course of an automatic bass pattern in
real time by changing the lowest note of the chord played.
See the Internal Styles chapter for specific details.
AUTOBACKING
Affects the Style patterns in particular situations.
If Automacking is “Off”, your automatic Styles will play normally with “normal” chord
changes but, if you “provoke” the recorded pattern with quick chord changes, you will
notice “gaps” in the patterns. This is due to the fact that there is not enough time to update
to the new situation before introducing a subsequent one.
You can correct this inconvenience by setting Autobacking to “On”. Each quick chord
change updates the pattern instantly.
See the Internal Styles chapter for more details.
HARMONY
Provides 5 harmonising options for Track 6 in relation to the chord played.
on:
harmonises by adding three notes to each melody note,
keeping in consideration the chord played and the scale
position relative to the note played.
duet:
adds only two notes.
open:
adds three notes but in open position.
octave:
adds one note to the lower octave.
double octave: adds one note two octaves below.
N.B. Harmony only affects Track 6 of all styles.
Owner's Manual
Edit Section
4 - 86 Arrange
MEMORY
Allows the chord played to be maintained in memory.
Memory “on” allows you to release your left hand from the keyboard to affect control
panel changes.
This function is excluded automatically when KEY START is enabled.
Three options are available:
Off
Chords
Chords+Track5:
Memory not active;
Memorises only the Style Chords;
memorises the Style Chords and the notes relating to
Track 5.
Note: The Arranger settings are valid for all Styles (Rom, Prog. and Song Styles).
Owner's Manual
Edit Section
Internal Styles
5-1
CHAPTER 5 - STYLES, SONGS & SEQUENCER
1. Internal Styles
General information
WX provides 64 Internal Styles, also called ROM Styles.
The ROM Styles are arranged in 8 Banks of 8 corresponding to the lower row of the
“Performance & Style Banks” group (Dance, Beat, Rock’n, etc.):
PERF 1
PERF 2
PERF 3
P.SONG
STYLE 1
STYLE 2
STYLE 3
STYLE 4
PERFORMANCES & STYLES BANKS
DANCE
BEAT
ROCK'n
JAZZ
LATIN
FOLK
ETHNIC
POP
What is a Style?
Styles are Drum and Arrangement PATTERNS recorded by the WX Sequencer which
are triggered by playing chords on the left split of the keyboard.
Selecting A Style recalls a Style Performance which is programmed to split the keyboard
automatically.
Note 1:
An attempt to record an
Internal Style by
pressing REC in Int./
Style mode will display
the following warning:
Press ESC to cancel the
display.
The Internal Styles provide factory-programmed Rhythm and Arrangement patterns
which cannot be edited or cancelled. Internal Styles are permanently resident in ROM
and cannot be recorded1.
The Internal Style Performances can, however, be modified and saved for future use.
A Style Performance consists of several distinct “parts” which are appropriately
recorded with WX’s on board Sequencer to provide a perfect simulation of several
musicians playing together:
A Drum track
A Bass track
Two “Accompaniment” tracks
a recorded sequence of percussion sounds;
a recorded sequence of Bass sounds;
two separate recorded arrangement sequences.
Also provided are two tracks not engaged by the sequencer:
Two “Free” tracks
allow you to play up to two sounds in real
time, one for the right hand and one for the left
(programmable).
As an example, the Style Twist from the Rock’n Style Bank shows how the 6 tracks are
distributed:
Track 1
DXStand1
Drum
Track 2
Elecbass
Bass
Track 3
WXGrandP
Arrang
Track 4
Softsax
Arrang
Track 5
Off
Free
Track 6
Trombon1
Free
Note: Styles always engage Tracks 1 to 6.
Owner's Manual
Styles, Songs & Sequencer
5-2
Internal Styles
Chord recognition and the Riff
All the most popular chords are recognised by the instrument’s Arranger. In particular,
the Major, Minor and Seventh chords are exploited to provide musical arrangements
(patterns) adapted for the selected rhythm.
The various patterns generated are called RIFFS; these are musical motifs capable of
repetition which vary in “length” from one to eight bars long.
Up to 18 Riffs, each providing a different pattern, can make up a Style (the Internal Styles
do not exploit all - Prog. Styles are freely programmable).
The Riffs available:
Basic pattern:
Intro pattern:
Fill in pattern:
Ending pattern:
Basic Variation:
Fill Variation:
Major
Major
Major
Major
Major
Major
Minor
Minor
Minor
Minor
Minor
Minor
7th
7th
7th
7th
7th
7th
All recognised chords are displayed in the “Chord box” in the top right corner when a
Style is playing and the current riff being played is monitored in the right part of the
display:
The Chord box
The Riff currently
playing
In practice, pressing only one note plays a Major chord (the “One Finger” function is
active in default). Minor and Seventh chords are recognised by playing two notes (see
“One Finger” further ahead).
NB. If you play a chord (or make a mistake) which the internal computer is unable to
recognise, the Style plays a root bass note with sparse accompaniment to avoid
discordant situations.
Owner's Manual
Styles, Songs & Sequencer
Internal Styles
5-3
How to select an Internal Style
1.
Enter Internal Style mode by selecting one of the ROM Style Banks (Dance, Beat,
Rock’n, etc.) and select a Style with one of the Function Buttons (F1…F8).
The information displayed is already discussed in chapter 3, under the section “A
Rapid Tour of the Main Display” on page 3. 4.
2.
Start the Style with Start/Stop - the Rhythm pattern will play.
3.
Press a note on the left part of the keyboard to hear the Bass and Arrangement
patterns (in default, the “One finger” function is “On” in the Arranger).
4.
If you release the keys, the automatic elements (Rhythm + Arrangements)
continue playing (in default, the “Memory” function is active for “Chords” in the
Arranger).
5.
Change note and listen to how the arranger changes key automatically.
6.
Play the Major, Minor and Seventh chords and listen to how the pattern changes
when you change from Major to Minor to Seventh.
7.
Play with both hands. Note that the “real time” sounds provided by the free tracks
will be split, one on the left and the other on the right hand (if they are both “On”).
NB. You can mute any track (1 - 6) by selecting it with the Up/Down cursor arrow and
hitting the Toggle.
8.
Stop the Style with Start/Stop.
The Style Commands
Note 1:
The other Sequencer
controls (REC, <<, >>)
do not affect Internal
Styles.
START
STOP
FILL
TAP
These commands have been discussed in detail in the “Style and Song commands”
section on page 3.3. To be more precise, these are all Sequencer controls1 which affect
Syles and Songs.
Start/Stop
Fill/Tap
Var/Cont
FILL VAR
CONT
INTRO
END
Intro/End
Owner's Manual
Starts and Stops the Style or Song (Sequencer).
Press this button while a Style is playing for a Fill In.
When a Style or Song in not playing, Tap on the button 4
times (or 3 if 3/4 Time or 6 if 6/8 time) to start the Style or
Song with the playing speed established by “beating time”
on the button.
Press this button while the Style is playing for a Variation
of the Fill In - this will also trigger a variation of the basic
pattern. The basic pattern is restored by pressing Fill/Tap.
“Continue” starts a Song from the point it was stopped.
Press this button when a Style is not playing for an Intro.
Press this button while a Style is playing for an Ending.
Styles, Songs & Sequencer
5-4
Internal Styles
The Style Tempo
When you select a Style, an appropriate memorised Tempo (playing speed) is recalled.
It can be modified in real time while the Style is playing, by rotating the Dial.
The new Tempo setting, displayed in the Tempo “box”, will remain unchanged until it
is modified again, or until the Style is stopped and started again; this restores the
programmed Tempo.
The Tempo-fix, M. Perf. and Sync functions
The “Sequencer & Users” group of buttons below the display contain three functions that
affect the Styles:
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
M.PERF
SONGS
SEQUENCER & USERS
REC
SCORE
TEMPO
SYNC
The Tempo-fix function
The Style Tempo can be “blocked” at any value by activating the “Tempo-Fix” button.
When this button is selected (button illuminated), the Tempo setting specified in real
time will remain fixed for all subsequent Style selections. This will permit you to
maintain the same playing speed while changing Styles.
The Manual Performance function
Note
The MANUAL PERF
function is only
operative in Style and
Song Style modes.
Normally, selecting a Style recalls an appropriate sound for each Track, including those
assigned to the two “free” tracks (5 and 6). When you change Style, the Sound in track
5 and 6 will also change.
If you press the M. Perf button (button illuminated), you can change Styles without
changing the sounds assigned to tracks 5 and 6. This allows you to play in real time with
the same sounds and change Style at will.
The Sync function
The Sync function, when active (button illuminated), permits you to start a Style
(Rhythm and Arrangements) in synchronisation with a touch on the lower part of the
keyboard.
This function is influenced by the status of the Memory function in the Arranger.
When Memory is active (see Edit Arrange), Sync operates as described above.
If Memory is off, Sync starts the Style (Rhythm and Arrangement) but, when you release
the keys, the Arrangements stop while the Rhythm continues to play.
Owner's Manual
Styles, Songs & Sequencer
Internal Styles
Chord Split
EDIT
DISK
PERF
5-5
SOUNDS
The Styles feature a “Chord Split Point” which marks the keyboard division.
MIXER
EFF1/2
MIDI
STATUS
SPLITS
ARRAN
CLOCK
PAGE-
PAGE+
Playing a note or chord below the Chord Split triggers an automatic pattern which
depends on the chord played.
The “Chord Split” is common to all Styles and in default mode, it corresponds to note
C4.
It can be modified on the second page of “Edit Splits” by rotating the Dial or pressing
a key:
Tracks 5 and 6 also have default keyboard extensions which can be modified in the first
page of Edit Splits:
Free and Lock
When “FREE” is selected in the Chord Split page of Edit Splits, you can modify the
Chord Split point (for all Styles) without altering the relative keyboard extensions of
tracks 5 and 6.
If you select “LOCK”, tracks 5 and 6 will be locked to the Chord Split modifications.
Therefore, when you modify the Chord split, the relative track extensions will change
accordingly.
Owner's Manual
Styles, Songs & Sequencer
5-6
Internal Styles
Deactivating the tracks engaged by the Sequencer (SEQ)
You can deactivate a Sequencer track in two ways: by muting it, or by disengaging it
from the sequencer. A disengaged track can be played in real time.
How to Mute a Sequencer track
In all Styles, Tracks 1, 2, 3 and 4 engaged by the Sequencer are displayed with the “SEQ”
status in the left column:
In this condition, these tracks are disconnected from the Keyboard and from reacting
with MIDI IN events - the configuration parameter in Edit Perf confirms this:
To Mute a track, select the one required and press the Toggle. The track is shown as
“OFF”:
For example, you can mute both accompaniment tracks (3 & 4) if you want to play the
Rhythms with Bass accompaniment only.
How to disengage a track and play it in real time
◆
First mute the required track:
◆
Press the Perf button in the Edit section to access the Configuration parameter. The
track is shown to be disconnected from the keyboard and from MIDI IN:
Owner's Manual
Styles, Songs & Sequencer
Internal Styles
◆
Press the Toggle to assign the track to the keyboard:
◆
Return to the Style display and the track is shown active for Local:
5-7
The disengaged track can now be played in real time across the entire keyboard range.
Use Edit Splits if you want to modify the sound’s note range.
Note: You can re-engage the disengaged tracks by pressing the Toggle twice but, you
must also remember to restore the tracks original status. Return to Edit Perf and
disconnect the track from the keyboard.
Save a modified Internal Style Performance
Any modification to an Internal Style Performance (such as the one explained above) can
be memorised using the Save Performance operation - simply press ENTER twice:
Save to SRam or Disk
If you want the modified Style to play as memorised every time you turn on your WX,
you can save the modified Int. Style Performance to SRam or Disk for future loading:
Restore Internal Style Performance
A modified Internal Style Performance can be restored to its original status with the
RESTORE function in the Edit Performance section. This function appears for Internal
Style Performances only:
Press ENT and the Performance will be restored t its original ROM status. Press ESC to
cancel the operation.
Owner's Manual
Styles, Songs & Sequencer
5-8
Internal Styles
The ARRANGER options and how the Styles are affected
EDIT
DISK
PERF
SOUNDS
MIXER
EFF1/2
MIDI
STATUS
SPLITS
ARRAN
CLOCK
PAGE-
PAGE+
How a Style reacts to keyboard solicitations is also determined by the status of the
parameters in the ARRANGE function of the Edit section.
The Arranger parameters all relate to the left part of the keyboard in Style mode (below
the Chord Split), unless otherwise stated. Explanations of how to edit the displayed
parameters are found in the relevant section of the Edit Chapter.
Key Start:
Note 1:
If the Sync function is
“On”, releasing the
keys will only stop the
Arrangements.
Note 2:
“One Finger” Chords
are simplified versions
of the principal chords,
obtained by pressing
one or two notes.
Examples in the key of
C
(the second note is
played above [ab] or
below [bl] C as
indicated):
Chord
Note
C (Maj)
C
C min
C+Eb (ab)
C dim
C+Gb (ab)
C7
A# (bl)+C
C maj7
B (bl)+C
If “On”, the Style (Rhythm and Arrangements) starts by pressing a key
on the part of the manual dedicated to playing chords. If “Memory” is
“Off”, releasing the keys stops the Style1.
In default, Key Start is “Off”.
Chord Mode Provides three options: One Finger, Fingered and Free.
One Finger - recalls the principal chords in a simplified manner2. One note
plays a Major chord and other common chords (Minor, Diminished, Seventh, Major Seventh) are provided by various two finger combinations - see
diagram in margin).
In default,, One Finger is “On”.
Fingered - provides for normal chord playing.
Free - “overrides” the Chord Split and allows Styles to be played by forming
chords anywhere on the keyboard. At least three notes must be pressed for
the Styles to play.
NB. The chords played are displayed in the “Chord box” of the main Style
display. Remember that in Edit Status, you can opt to change from English
to Italian chord notation and vice versa.
Bass Follow When “Off”, the automatic bass line follows the recorded pattern irrespective of the chords played.
If Bass Follow is “On”, you can change the course of an automatic bass
pattern in real time by changing the lowest note of the chord played. The
pattern recognises the lowest note in the first and second cycles of the Riff
and resumes normal playing on all subsequent cycles.
In default, Bass Follow is “Off”.
Example. Try with the Slow Waltz style: while the style is playing, hold
down the chord of C and, with the little finger, change the lowest note in
descending order. Listen to how the Bass pattern “follows” the lowest note
of the chord.
Autobacking Generally, in almost all electronic instruments that provide automatic
arrangements, quick chord changes sometimes create “gaps” in the pre-
Owner's Manual
Styles, Songs & Sequencer
Internal Styles
5-9
recorded patterns because there is a slight delay in updating the pattern
after keying a chord before introducing the new one.
Autobacking (On) is an “auto corrector” which avoids this inconvenience by
updating the pattern as soon as the chord change is keyed.
In default, Autobacking is “On”.
NOTE: In some situations, Autobacking in an enabled status can create
unwanted effects. In such conditions, simply deactivate the function (off).
Harmony
provides 5 real time automatic Harmonising options for the melody line
(track 6) based on the chord played.
On:
adds three notes to each melody note, taking into consideration
the chord played and the level of the scale relative to the melody
note played.
Duet:
adds only two notes.
Open:
adds three notes but in open position.
Octave:
adds one note an octave lower.
Double octave: adds one note two octaves below.
NB. Harmony only affects Track 6 of all styles.
Memory
provides three options - “Off”, “Chords” and “Chords+Tracks”.
When set to “Chords”, all chords played (including the “One Finger” type) are
maintained in memory after releasing the keys. This permits you to liberate your
left hand to effect control panel changes.
When set to “Chords+Tracks”, releasing the keys memorises the notes of Track 5
as well as the chords.
“Off” disables the Memory function.
In default, Memory is set to “Chords”.
NB. This function will be excluded automatically if KEY START is enabled.
Owner's Manual
Styles, Songs & Sequencer
5 - 10 Programmable Styles
2. PROGRAMMABLE STYLES
The Programmable Styles are identical in all respects to the Internal Styles with the
exception that the Rhythm and Arrangement patterns are user-programmable.
You can programme completely new Rhythm and Arrangement patterns by exploiting
the on-board Sequencer and, by using all its related functions in the Edit Sequencer
section, you can edit your patterns to optimise them.
More information about the Sequencer appears in the Song chapter.
Riffs
All Styles are based on the Riff. A “Riff” is a musical motif capable of repetition. It can
also be expressed as a “pattern”, a “phrase”, a “lick” or other, but it is important to
understand that it must be capable of repetition. A Riff can be from one bar up to eight
bars long and, together with the Performance, it is the principal element all the Styles.
When you program a Style, you record the major, minor or 7th Riffs of the basic elements
that make up the Style arrangement patterns, as shown by the following table:
The Riffs available:
Basic pattern:
Intro pattern:
Fill in pattern:
Ending pattern:
Basic Variation:
Fill Variation:
Major
Major
Major
Major
Major
Major
Minor
Minor
Minor
Minor
Minor
Minor
7th
7th
7th
7th
7th
7th
You are not obliged to programme all the Riffs - you can obtain excellent results by
recording, for example, the Major chord of the Basic, Intro, Fill and End Riffs.
Styles can be programmed in three ways:
Real Time recording: the notes you play on the keyboard and the velocities applied will
be captured in the timing that you play. Unlike real time track recording, real time pattern
recording overdubs your playing (the new data is added to the old) as the pattern repeats.
The repeating patterns allow you to record drum patterns, for example, by playing each
drum sound separately.
Step recording captures one note at a time, specifying the note length (minim, quaver,
crotchet, etc.). The velocity applied to the keys is also recorded.
Copy from an existing Style: you can copy a pattern (entirely or partially) from an
existing Programmable style to the one you are programming. You can then apply some
modifications to create your new Style - this is a great time saver.
Note: the styles are
more suited to record a
Rhythm Track (always
Track 1), a Bass track
(Track 2) and two
Arrangement tracks
(Tracks 3 and 4).
The Prog. Style Performance
In practice, you enter Prog. Style mode with copy of the current Performance. For
example, if you want to start programming a new Swing from the Jazz Style Bank, or a
new Rap from the Dance Bank, simply select the required ROM Style and enter Prog.
Style mode.
Owner's Manual
Styles, Songs & Sequencer
Programmable Styles
5 - 11
How to record a Style (Real Time)
Below follows all the steps to take when programming a Prog. Style in Real Time. For
a clearer understanding of this section, only the fundamental functions are explained.
Afterwards, the additional functions which contribute to the perfection of your recordings or which render a more sophisticated use of the Sequencer are explained in the Edit
Sequencer chapter.
Note 1:
It is advisable to assign
a Drumkit to Track 1
because the Styles
“carry” predisposed
parameters that limit
Drumkits to Track 1.
Note 2:
If nothing happens
when you press Start/
Stop, check the Clock in
the Edit MIDI section it could be set to
EXT(ernal): set it to
INT(ernal).
1.
Press one of the four STYLE buttons (Style 1, 2, 3 or 4) in the top row of the
“Performance and Style Banks” and select an “empty’ slot using the Function
Buttons (F1…F8). You will be prompted to create a new Style.
2.
Press REC.
3.
Choose the Riff you want to record (Maj, Min, etc.) using the Function buttons F1,
F2 and F3.
4.
After selecting your Riff, press ENTER to enter “Record Pending” status.
5.
Using the Cursor diamond arrows to navigate, select the first Track to record1 (a
Drumkit) and activate it for recording with the Toggle. Select also the “Length”
function to set the number of bars for the Riff (ignore the “Mode” function at this
stage).
6.
Access the “Master” Track in Edit Sequencer to specify a Time signature (if
different from the default 4/4) and set other parameters as required (Metronome
volume, Tempo, etc.).
7.
Press Start/Stop to start the recording2. The Metronome will tap a one bar “count
down” (or lead) into the recording.
8.
After the one bar lead, start recording the Riff for the specified number of bars.
9.
When you have finished the recording the Riff, press Start/Stop to stop the
recording. Repress Start/Stop to listen to the playback and, if you are satisfied press
the Toggle to assign the recorded track to the Sequencer definitely (the track status
column shows “REC” change to “SEQ”).
If you are not satisfied, there are several operations to choose from to optimise your
recording (see Edit Sequencer further ahead).
10.
Select another track and repeat the procedure from point 7.
11.
When you have finished recording all the Tracks for the first Riff, return to “Riff
select by pressing “Riff” (F1) and repeat the procedure from point 3 (ignore point
5 and 6) to record the tracks for the different Riff.
12.
When you have finished the recording, press ESC to escape Prog. Style Record
mode.
13.
Press Start/Stop to start your new Style and play a chord on the left part of the
keyboard to listen to your recorded arrangement.
You can give the new Prog. Style a name using the NAME function in the Edit Sequencer
(see Name further ahead).
Owner's Manual
Styles, Songs & Sequencer
5 - 12 Programmable Styles
A detailed explanation of each step
This section goes through each step in greater detail and examines all the possibilities at
your disposal when you are recording styles.
1.
Press Style 1, 2, 3 or 4 and select an “empty’ slot using the Function Buttons
(F1…F8).
After pressing “empty”, you will be prompted enter Record mode:
The Style Performance assigned to the Prog. Style you are about to record
takes its origin from the one currently selected at the time of accessing the
Prog. Style mode. This provides a very quick and easy way of programming
a new Style using a copy of one of the ROM Style Performances. You can
therefore programme a new Boogie, for example, using the original Boogie
Style Performance. Simply select the Boogie Rom Style before entering
Prog. Style mode.
What happens if you select “Style 1”
A slight exception to this rule is if you select Bank Style1: the display will
show “STYLE 1” in correspondence with the Function button F1.
Note 1:
When you copy a Style
Performance to another
position, the new
Performance will be
named “Style X”
automatically, where
“X” refers to the
relative Performance
number. With the
“Name” function in the
Edit Sequencer section,
you can give your Prog.
Style a name.
The “Style 1” is merely a means of accessing the selected Prog. Style bank
directly without entering Record mode. This will permit you to create new
Performances by modifying the current one and exploiting the Copy
function in Edit Performance to copy them to the other Prog Style positions1.
To record Style 1 (or any “Style X” after being copied), simply press REC
- in this case you will enter directly into record mode.
2.
Press REC and the display changes to:
3.
Choose the Riff to record using the Function buttons F1, F2 and F3.
Press F1 repeatedly to scroll through the Basic, Fill, Intro and End Riffs. F2
scrolls through the Major, Minor and Seventh riffs. F3 selects the Variation.
For example, the Variation of the Maj Fill Riff will show:
Note: when Var is selected, F1 only provides the Basic and Fill Riffs.
Owner's Manual
Styles, Songs & Sequencer
Programmable Styles
4.
5 - 13
After selecting your Riff, press ENTER.
If you press ESC, you will escape “Record mode” and return to the Prog.
Style display - the “empty” slot will be automatically named (Style 2, 3, 4,
etc.) to indicate that the position has been defined. You can access a defined
position at any time and record the Style by pressing REC.
5.
Use the Cursor Diamond arrows to navigate in the display.
Navigating in this display allows you to select the track to record, the key to
record in, the recording mode (dubb, norm, punch) and the number of bars
(length) for the Riff (length 1-8). You can also change Sound.
The selected Track is activated for recording with the Toggle:
The Track status column on the left of the display shows “REC” to indicate
that the track is in “Record Pending” status.
The KEY function
Note 1:
Generally it is
advisable to record the
following Riffs in the
keys indicated:
MAJ = C,
MIN = D,
7th = G.
The KEY function allows you to record your riffs in preferred keys1.
Your arrangements will achieve musical uniformity using this function, meaning
that changing key when you play your programmed style will provide the correct
transposition for the chord.
The MODE function
The recording mode provides three options: DUBB, NORM and PNCH
Dubb:
refers to “Overdubbing” and is the default recording status. This
mode permits you to add new events to those already recorded.
For example, when you reach the end of the last bar, the recorded Riff
loops back to the beginning and repeats continuously until stopped.
During the repeating stage, you can add new events.
Norm:
refers to “Normal” (also called “replace”). This mode permits you to
replace all the recorded events of the Riff with new events. Use this
method to re-record your Riff if you make a mistake. After the first
cycle, all repeating cycles of the Riff currently being recorded return
to “DUBB” mode automatically.
Note: If no notes are played when the Riff plays the first cycle in
“NORM” mode, all previously recorded events will be erased.
Owner's Manual
Styles, Songs & Sequencer
5 - 14 Programmable Styles
HINT
It is best to program
one of the Logic pedals
for Punch operation
before entering Record
mode. This will save
time and avoid escaping
the mode to set the
function.
Pnch:
refers to “Punch” - this is a typical Sequencer function that permits
you to correct mistakes by “Punching in” a correct note or sequence
of notes into the recorded track with the aid of one of the Pedals
programmed for the relative function.
The LENGTH function
This parameter determines the number of bars for the Riff.
From 1 to 8 bars can be programmed for each Riff. You can also record two
different Riffs with two different bar lengths.
Important:
Riff.
Note:
You can record two
different Riffs, each
with different lengths.
You cannot change the value of this parameter in a recorded
Once you have recorded a Riff with a certain bar length, an attempt to change this
value will display the following message:
CHANGING THE SOUND ASSIGNED TO THE TRACK
Before starting the recording, you can assign a different sound to the Track in record but,
unless you Save the modification (press ENT twice), the playback will recall the original
sound with which you entered recording.
Note 1:
If you change the sound
of a Track of the
recorded Style, you
must SAVE the change
in the Style
Performance (press
ENT twice). If the
modification is not
saved, when you press
Start, the recorded Style
Performance will recall
the Sound with which
the Track was recorded.
You can also change sound during the recording; the Program Change will be recorded
in the Track1, but be careful: the relative Performance modification will not be
recorded therefore, when the riff loops back to the beginning, the original starting sound
will not be recalled because the last change will remain.
You can rectify this by changing back to the original sound at the very last instant, just
before riff loops back to the beginning. The change will be recorded in the track and the
Riff cycle will start with the original sound.
6.
Access the Master Track to specify your required Time Signature and to modify
other parameters.
In Style Mode, the Master Track behaves as a “seventh track” and records general
controls common to all tracks.
SEQ. EDIT
MASTER
COPY
MOVE
ERASE
INS/DEL TRANSP
QUANT
MICRO
NAME
OPTION
UNDO
DEMO
At this stage, before proceeding with your recording, you can change the status of
one or more of the parameters.
Select the parameter with the Cursor Up/Down arrows and use the Dial or Toggle
to change the parameter status.
Owner's Manual
Styles, Songs & Sequencer
Programmable Styles
5 - 15
TIME SIGNATURE (default 4/4):
NOTE:
If the status of the
default parameters in
the Master Track are
satisfactory, all the
operations indicated in
point 6 can be ignored.
This parameter, which measures the number of beats in a bar (the numerator) as
well as the division of a beat (the denominator) provides a selection of different
Time signatures by combining the numerator (range 1…16) with the denominator
(2, 4, 8, 16).
For example, you can record a Style in 3/4 time by selecting 4/4, specifying 3/4
with the “3” key on the keyboard and pressing Master or Esc to return to the record
pending status.
The denominator is activated by selecting the parameter with the right arrow.
Note: The Time Signature can only be changed when the style is “empty”. In other
words, if you try to change the Time Signature of a recorded track, an
appropriate warning will be displayed:
RECORDING TEMPO (default 120):
This parameter defines the recordings running speed (Metronomic Tempo),
measured in beats per minute (BPM). The value memorised in the Master Track
refers to the Tempo with which you start recording.
You can modify this value only before recording (the new value will be automatically memorised).
You can vary the Tempo in real time in playback or during the recording, but this
will not alter the memorised value of the parameter in the Master Track.
COUNT DOWN (default On)
This parameter enables or disables the one bar “lead” into the recording after
pressing Start.
When set to “On”, the Count Down is executed by the Metronome, which starts
to “tick” at the established running speed according to the established Time
Signature.
Note 1:
If you are recording via
MIDI with an external
Sequencer, the WX
Clock should be set to
“EXTERNAL” in order
to sync the WX with the
external Sequencer. In
this condition, the
Count Down will be
disabled automatically WX will Start with an
externally received
message.
Furthermore, the Left and Right Cursor arrows monitor the Tempo by flashing in
time with the beats. The first beat of a bar is flashed on the Left Cursor arrow, while
the remaining beats are flashed on the Right arrow:
BEAT 1
BEAT 2
BEAT 3
BEAT 4
The Count Down can be disabled1 by setting the parameter to “Off”.
Owner's Manual
Styles, Songs & Sequencer
5 - 16 Programmable Styles
METRONOME VOLUME (default 90):
This parameter adjusts the Metronome’s sound level (valid for Record and
Playback).
The parameter value ranges from 10 to 127. The higher the value, the louder the
sound. The lowest limit reduces the sound to its minimum level but does not
eliminate it.
UNDO STATUS (default On):
SEQ. EDIT
MASTER
COPY
MOVE
ERASE
INS/DEL TRANSP
QUANT
MICRO
NAME
OPTION
UNDO
DEMO
This parameter enables and disables the “Undo” function (in Edit Sequencer) for
the Riff recording.
Undo is of immense importance because it permits you to cancel a recorded Riff or
restore a recorded Riff cancelled by mistake.
For example, if you record a Riff and decide that you want to change it, you can repeat the
recording in “Normal” mode - this will cancel the original Riff. Then, listening to the playback
of the “Normal” recording, you may decide that you preferred the previous recording - using
Undo, you can “undo” the “Normal” recording and restore to original Riff.
Undo also “undoes” an undo operation - it can be used as a means of comparing a
modified Riff with the original one - it helps decide which of the two recordings you
prefer.
How to use UNDO - see UNDO in the Edit Sequencer section.
If, after recording a Riff, you want to cancel it, press UNDO - the display will show the
following message:
Press ENTER to confirm the “Undo” or ESC to abort the operation.
To restore the cancelled Riff, press UNDO again but, if you perform another
operation before pressing Undo, you will cancel your Riff definitely.
7.
Press Start/Stop to start the recording.
The Metronome will tap a one bar “count down” (or lead) into the recording.
The one bar lead will also be indicated in the “Bars” box of the display by the
numeric count down starting from bar “O” (0 1, 0 1, 0 2, 0 3, 0 4).
You can disable the Metronome by pressing the relative Function Buttons (F5):
Owner's Manual
Styles, Songs & Sequencer
Programmable Styles
Undo and Free
Memory
When UNDO is enabled
in Record mode, a
memory buffer is
activated which acts as
a “ghost copy” of the
Riff memory - it
occupies the same
amount of RAM as the
recording.
In certain situations,
you might find that
while you are
recording, a message
appears indicating that
you have run out of
memory, even though
the “Free Memory”
indicates the
availability of RAM. In
such a case, you can
disable the Undo
function in order to
reclaim the “ghost
memory” used up by
Important!
thisIffunction.
you are
recording Track 1, it is
advisable to assign it a
Drumkit because Styles
are predisposed for
Drums on track 1.
Should you overlook
this feature, you will
note that the final result
will not play correctly.
For example, if you
record Track 1 with
WXGrandP, the Riff in
playback will play
without touching the
keyboard (as if it were a
Drumkit). Furthermore,
changing key will not
affect the pattern
because Track 1 for all
Styles is disabled for
key transpositions (a
must for Drumkits). You
can correct this by
entering Edit
Performance and
disabling the “Key
Transp” function for
Track 1, but it is more
convenient to limit
yourself to recording
Drumkits on Track 1.
8.
5 - 17
After the one bar lead, start recording the Riff for the specified number of
bars.
After the one bar count down, the Riff starts is cycle, during which you can play
your sequence. As well as the Notes, the velocity applied to the keys will also be
recorded.
As the recording proceeds, the FREE MEMORY
indicates the amount of memory left for the recording.
When the Riff reaches the end of its cycle, it loops back to the beginning and
repeats.
During the repeating cycles, you can add other notes. This is a particularly useful
characteristic when you are programming the Drum track because you can add a
different drum sound in each cycle.
Recording Control Data
During the recording, you can record control data according to the function
assigned to one of the pedals (e.g. Volume, Pitch change, Modulation, Attack,
Release, Filter.). The Wheel movements and Aftertouch (mono) will also be
recorded. All these events can be viewed in the Microscope - see Edit Sequencer
for more details.
9.
When you have finished recording the Riff, press Start/Stop to stop the
sequencer record mode.
Listen to the playback of your Riff by re-pressing Start/Stop and, if you are
satisfied with the recording, press the Toggle to assign the recorded track to the
Sequencer definitely and proceed to point 10 below (the track status column shows
“REC” change to “SEQ”):
Important!! Confirmation of the recorded track (from REC to SEQ) is important
otherwise, if it is remains in REC mode and you proceed to record the next track,
you will record new events to both tracks.
What to do if you are not satisfied with the recording
If you are not satisfied with the recording, you can choose from the following options to
optimise your Riff:
A)
You can repeat the recording in NORMAL mode.
Simply select “NORMAL” while still in REC mode and start to record the Riff.
Play your new Riff - all previously recorded events will be replaced by the new
ones (even if you don’t play any notes, all old events will be cancelled). After the
first cycle, the mode returns to DUBB which permits to add new events to those
recorded.
B)
You can PUNCH IN a correction.
Owner's Manual
Styles, Songs & Sequencer
5 - 18 Programmable Styles
For this function, it is useful if one of the programmable Pedals (Logic) is already
programmed for PUNCH operation before starting the recording, otherwise, you
must escape Record mode and enter Edit Status to programme a pedal accordingly.
If your recorded Riff contains a short sequence of wrong notes, select PNCH in
the Mode function. Start the recording and, an instant before you reach the point
where the wrong notes are about to play, press the punch pedal and play the correct
sequence of notes - they will be inserted in normal (replace) mode, substituting the
events present. When you have played the correct sequence of notes, release the
pedal and the recording will return to DUBB mode.
C)
You can UNDO the recording and start again.
While still in REC mode, press UNDO. The recorded events will be cancelled.
Press Start and start to record the Riff again.
Note: If you Undo the second recording, you will restore the previous one.
D)
You can QUANTIZE the recorded events to optimise the recorded Riff. This
function is discussed in detail in the Quantize section of Edit Sequencer.
Quantize is an auto-correct function which optimises your recording by adjusting
the timing of each recorded event.
Note:Several other Event Edit functions are available in the Edit Sequencer section.
Refer to the relevant chapter for more details.
10.
Select the next track to record.
Use the Down cursor arrow to select the next Track.
Follow the procedures as described from point 7 and repeat them for the other
tracks.
11.
When you have finished recording all the Tracks for the first Riff, select
another one.
F1
Select the required Riff (Intro, Fill, etc.) and record all the remaining Tracks as
already described.
Press F1 to return to
the Riff select mode as
shown on the right
Continue in this way until you have recorded at least:
BASIC Major (or minor or 7th)
FILL Major (or minor or 7th)
INTRO Major (or minor or 7th)
END Major (or minor or 7th)
With these four Riffs, you will at least guarantee a pattern for every chord change.
If you exploit the Minor and Seventh Riffs as well as the Variation option, you can
obtain up to 18 different patterns.
12.
When you have completed the recording, press ESC to escape Record mode.
Owner's Manual
Styles, Songs & Sequencer
Programmable Styles
5 - 19
The display will show all the recorded Tracks with “SEQ” in the left status column,
indicating that they are engaged by the Sequencer. Tracks 5 & 6 will be “OFF”.
These can be activated with the Toggle to play them in real time.
For example, your four recorded tracks will look like something like this:
13.
Press Start/Stop to playback your new Style.
Play a chord on the left part of the keyboard to listen to your recorded arrangement.
Activate the Tracks shown OFF and play them in real time.
You can also mute (Off) the Tracks engaged by the Sequencer (SEQ) with the
Toggle:
Name your Prog. Style
Give the new Prog. Style a name by pressing the NAME button in Edit Sequencer.
The display changes to:
Write your new name in the appropriate space using the keys of the keyboard.
Confirm the new name with ENT or cancel the operation with ESC:
Save your new Prog. Style to SRam or to Disk
If you want to re-use your Programmed Style, you can save it to SRam - when you switch
your WX on again, the Style will be loaded to the Prog. Style banks automatically.
On the other hand, you can save the Style to Disk and load it back to memory any time
you wish.
If you don’t mind losing the Style, when you turn on your WX on a subsequent occasion,
the default status of the Prog. Styles will be restored and the relative Banks will be Empty.
Owner's Manual
Styles, Songs & Sequencer
5 - 20 Programmable Styles
Programming Styles using STEP recording
STEP RECORDING allows you to record notes one by one from the keyboard.
This is useful means inserting a fast sequence of notes in a bar (such as an arpeggio) that
would otherwise be difficult to record in real time.
Step recording can also be used to copy a musical phrase note by note directly from sheet
music, but it is a very laborious way of working.
You can specify the note length and, depending on how hard you strike the keys, the
velocity will also be recorded for each note. If you step record over a bar that already
contains data, the new step events will cancel the old.
Procedure
Note 1:
You can enter into
record mode directly
with a selected track by
selecting STEP. This
eliminates the
activation of the track
(REC) with the Toggle.
1.
Select a track to record after accessing Prog. Style record mode and activate it with
the Toggle1. The display example shows Track 3 (WXGrandP) activated:
F1
2.
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
After specifying the bar length (and any other parameter settings in the Master
Track), access Step Record mode by pressing F6 (STEP):
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
The lower display area shows the type of notes which can be input.
The main display area shows the starting position of the recording (1 1 1 = Start
Song). This is otherwise known as the “Song Pointer” and the three numbers reflect
the first bar, the first beat and the sequencer resolution or “tick” (192 ppq).
Note: If your Riff has already been recorded, the display will show a string of
recorded notes. You can specify the starting point for your recording by selecting
the Song Pointer - more about this later.
3.
Use the Function buttons the specify the required note:
Owner's Manual
Styles, Songs & Sequencer
Programmable Styles
5 - 21
If you press the Function button of the selected note a second time, you will obtain
the dotted note:
NOTE LENGTHS
The length of a note is
based on the bar
resolution which has a
standard value of 768
This value is also
known as the “Step
Time”.
The open note without
the stem - also known as
the “breve”, plays for
one bar in 4/4 time and
has a step time of 768:
all other notes are a
fraction of the open
= 768
note.
Pressing the same button a third time obtains the triplet:
4.
= 384
Now play on the keyboard and enter the first note. If you want to enter a chord,
simply press the required chord.
If your second note has the same value, press a second key on the keyboard.
= 192
Select another note type and enter your third note.
= 96
Continue in this way until you have entered all your notes for the Riff, for the
number of bars required or all those specified. When you reach “END SONG”, you
will not be able to proceed further.
= 48
= 24
= 12
Adding a dot to a note
extends its length by
half as much, therefore,
each note displays the
following step times
when played:
Regardless of the timing with which they are pressed and for how long they are kept
pressed, each note will be recorded for its actual value in terms of length.
Pressing each note on the keyboard will show a string of values across the display
which relate to the song position, pitch name, velocity and, on the extreme right,
the note length, otherwise knows as the “Gate Time”. You can alter the value of
all the recorded parameters in the Microscope (see Microscope in Edit Sequencer
for more details). The display example below shows what you will see after
recording some notes:
= 1152
= 576
= 288
= 144
= 72
= 36
= 18
The “Triplet” changes
the step time by 2/3:
Entering a rest
3
= 512
3
A rest can be entered by pressing ENTER during the Step recording - the rest will
take the value of the note selected. The presence of a rest is deduced by the Song
Pointer values.
= 256
3
= 128
3
= 64
3
= 32
For example, if two consecutive notes have been recorded with a rest in between,
each with the same step time of 96, and the relative Song Pointers show: “1 1 96”
and “1 3 96”. The rest will occupy Song position “1 2 96”.
3
= 16
3
=8
5.
At this point, you can listen to the playback of your recording by returning to real
time mode - press F8 (= REAL) - and press Start.
Owner's Manual
Styles, Songs & Sequencer
5 - 22 Programmable Styles
Modifying the Step recordings
If you make a mistake, you can replace the old events with new ones from any position.
Simply return to the Step recording and use the Up/Down cursor arrows to select the song
pointer.
Position the horizontal reverse-highlight cursor to one note before the starting point and
record the note or sequence of notes required. The new note will substitute the note after
the starting point and all subsequent new notes will follow, replacing all old events.
Use the Toggle to specify a starting point
In cases where there are many events, you can go directly to the beginning of a bar by
hitting the Toggle:
The first value of the Song pointer activates and opens a box where you can specify the
bar required.
Use the black keys corresponding to the numbers 0 - 9 to enter the required value and
confirm with Enter.
NOTE: Step recordings only record notes, not Control data.
If necessary, you can record Control data in Real Time.
Simply return to Real Time record mode (F8) and start the recording (make sure the track
is in REC mode).
Regulate the Track Ball or the Pedal to which a control has been assigned (Volume,
Modulation, Pitch, Filter, etc.). The relative events will be recorded in the Master Track
or the Tracks, depending on the type of data.
Another method makes use of the INSERT function in the Microscope. See “EDIT
SEQUENCER” for more details.
Owner's Manual
Styles, Songs & Sequencer
Programmable Styles
5 - 23
Use COPY to copy a recorded Riff to another
The COPY function in EDIT SEQUENCER allows you to copy a recorded Riff to
another Riff of the same Style (partial copy).
This is a great time saver because you can copy, for example, a recorded Maj Riff to the
Minor and 7th Riffs and then apply slight modifications to both.
The Partial Copy operation is particularly useful when programming the Rhythm track.
You can also copy all the recorded Riffs from one Style to another.
The operation is performed in Style mode - an attempt to Copy in Record mode displays
the following warning:
For details on how to use COPY, refer to the EDIT SEQUENCER chapter.
Other operations available in Prog Style mode
SEQ. EDIT
MASTER
COPY
MOVE
ERASE
INS/DEL TRANSP
QUANT
MICRO
NAME
OPTION
UNDO
DEMO
You can perform several other operations in Prog. Style mode by exploiting the
Sequencer Edit section. All the functions in this section are discussed in detail in the
relevant chapter further ahead but, as a small anticipation of what is available:
QUANTIZE: Use this operation to correct your recordings. Quantize is an
auto-correcting function which “shifts” your recorded events to the
nearest correct “position”, determined by the Quantize value specified. In practice, you can achieve perfect timing with this function.
MICROSCOPE:
This is where you can view all the recorded events
of your recorded Track and intervene by adding or removing a note,
changing it, moving it from one point to another in a bar, changing the
volume, gate time, insert individual control data events and more.
INSERT: With this function you can extend the length of your recorded Riff by
inserting one or more additional empty bars which can be recorded
with new events.
DELETE: This operation can cancel any number of bars from recorded tracks of
a Riff.
MOVE:
Here you can move a recorded bar or event (from a specified beat) to
a new position.
ERASE:
Allows you to cancel a specified set of events from a recorded Riff or
the entire Style.
TRANSPOSE: This function allows you to transpose a specific note or a
sequence of notes that fall within a specified range.
The Edit Sequencer chapter takes you through all the functions that make up the section
and discusses all the relative applications for Prog. Styles, Song Styles and Songs.
Owner's Manual
Styles, Songs & Sequencer
5 - 24 Programmable Styles
Programmable Styles compared with Internal Styles
The Programmable Styles are identical in all respects to the Internal Styles.
They are influenced by the Arranger as already discussed in the Internal Style Chapter.
The tracks engaged by the Sequencer can be muted or they can be disengaged and played
in real time. See the Internal Styles chapter, “Disengaging tracks”.
The Programmable Style can be saved to SRam if you want to use it each time you power
up, or it can be saved to Disk for future loading.
SONG STYLES
The Internal Styles and your Programmed Styles can be recorded to create SONG
STYLES. These exploit the existing patterns (ROM and Programmed) resident in
memory and allow the Tracks 5 and 6 to be recorded to create a 6-track Song.
One useful application of the Song Styles is to record a backing of a Song (recording also
Track 5) and leaving Track 6 to play in real time.
See Song Styles in the next chapter for more details.
Owner's Manual
Styles, Songs & Sequencer
Song Styles
5 - 25
3. SONG STYLES
Song Styles exploit existing structures (Internal and Programmable Styles), permitting
you to record a Chord track as well as the two “free” tracks (5 and 6). The final result is
a Song consisting of 5 or 6 Tracks. The Song Style Performance is identical to the Internal
and Programmable Styles (6 tracks).
Real Time Recording
In practice, when you enter REC mode with a Song Style, you are free to select any
Internal or Programmed Style to record with.
You can choose to record one or both “free” tracks according to your requirements. For
example, you can choose to record Track 5 using the patterns of an Internal Style
(including the Intros, Fills, Variations, etc.) and, in playback mode, play Track 6 in Real
Time.
The advantage of the Song Style lies in the fact that, by exploit existing Rhythm and
Arrangement patterns, you have a very quick and easy way of producing professionally
sounding executions.
Unlike the Programmable Styles where you record the actual patterns (Riffs), Song
Styles record the CHORDS that trigger the patterns. These are recorded in the “CHORD
Track”, provided that the “CHORD” option is selected before starting to record. The
Chord track is shown if you select STEP when both tracks 5 and 6 are OFF, or if they are
engaged by the Sequencer (SEQ). The patterns provide the automatic backing while you
record one or both “free” tracks (5 & 6).
In addition to the notes and respective velocities, the Tracks 5 and 6 record Program
Changes, Controller data, Pitch Bend changes and Aftertouch changes.
You can also choose the record Tempo and/or Volume Changes by activating the relative
TEMPO or VOLUME options. These events are recorded in the Master Track, together
with any Style or Performance changes and use of the style controls (Fill, Fill Var and
Ending) effected during the recording.
The Master Track, regarded as a “ghost” track that records elements common to all
tracks, also permits the recording (by manual insertion) of Effects and Effects Volume
changes.
Step recording
Song Styles can also be Step Recorded.
For example, you can step record all the chords for the backing of a Song, following the
music of a favourite piece, then record Tracks 5 and 6 in real time record mode.
Copying from an existing Song Style
You can exploit the Copy function in the Edit Sequencer section to copy an existing Song
Style (wholly or partially) to a new Song Style. You can then apply some modifications
to the copy to save time.
Copy in Song Style mode gives several options which differ to those in Prog. Style mode.
In practice, you can copy the Master Track, the Chords track, Track 5 & 6 and All Style.
See COPY in the Edit Sequencer function for more explicit details.
Owner's Manual
Styles, Songs & Sequencer
5 - 26 Song Styles
How to record a Song Style (real time)
The recording operations are very similar to those used when recording Prog. Styles.
Note:
The WX instruments are
supplied with 2 Songs
resident in SRam for
demonstration
purposes.
When you power up, the
songs are loaded
automatically into the
instrument’s volatile
RAM.
You can remove the
Songs from the
instrument’s volatile
memory by using the
ERASE function in Edit
Sequencer.
To remove these songs
from SRam, use the
ERASE function in Disk
Edit mode - SRam
operations.
1.
Song Styles reside in the Song Banks: they are accessed by pressing the SONGS
button in the SEQUENCER & USERS section:
2.
Press and “empty”’ position to access the relative Song Bank and the display
shows:
3.
Confirm with REC (Yes):
4.
Use the Down Cursor arrow to select “Song Style” and confirm with ENT.
5.
Select an Internal Style or Prog. Style. e.g. : Blues from the POP Style bank:
The display changes to:
6.
Activate the Master Track to select a preferred Time Signature and configure the
other parameters as required (if necessary):
Refer to the Master Track in Edit Sequencer for specific details.
Owner's Manual
Styles, Songs & Sequencer
Song Styles
7.
5 - 27
At this point, enter into “record-pending” status by choosing one of the following
options:
a)
you can record tracks 5 and 6 (separately or simultaneously).
When you start recording, the Rhythms and Arrangements play but the
chords that trigger the patterns are not recorded.
b)
you can record only the Chord track:
In this case, simply activate the “CHORDS” function (F3) and start recording. The Chord sequence that you play will be recorded in the CHORDS
track.
Use this method if you want to record a song backing, paying Tracks 5 and
6 in real time with the song backing in playback mode.
c)
you can record Tracks 5 and 6 together with the Chords track. Use this
method if you want to record the complete song in one step.
d)
you can choose to step record, following exactly the same steps as explained
in the Programmable Styles chapter.
If you want to record any Tempo changes and Master Volume variations, activate
the relative Tempo Record (F1) and Volume Record (F2) options.
8.
Press Start/Stop and start to record your Song Style. You can also start with the
Intro function.
During the recording, you can use the Fill and Fill Variations at will. These events
will be recorded in the Master Track.
Record Program Changes
You can change Sound (Program Change) in the selected Track by selecting a
Sound Bank followed by the required Sound. The Program Change is recorded in
the relative Track (the relative events can be seen in the Microscope).
Record Style Changes
If you want to change Style Performance, simply select a Style Bank followed by
the relative Style. The Style Change is recorded in the Master Track.
Record Performance Changes
Note 1:
Only if the M.PERF
function is “ON” in the
Master Track.
If you have created some Song Style Performances, press the S.PERF button to
access the Performance Bank and select a different Performance. This will be
recorded in the Master Track1.
Owner's Manual
Styles, Songs & Sequencer
5 - 28 Song Styles
Record Control Data
NB:
Aftertouch data
consume a large
amount of memory.
This type of data is generated by appropriately programmed Pedals, by the Track
Ball (Modulation, Pitch Bend) and the Keyboard (Aftertouch). The relative events
are recorded in the Master Track and the Tracks, according to the type of event.
A recorded Master Track looks something like this:
The Master Track is discussed in detail in the Edit Sequencer section.
9.
If you have recorded only one track and wish to record the remaining one, confirm
the recorded track with the Toggle, select the other track and press Start to start
recording it.
10.
When you have finished your Song, press Start/Stop or Intro/End to stop the
recording.
If you use the Ending to stop your song, press Start/Stop to stop the recording when
the Ending completes its cycle1.
Note 1:
If you use Ending to
stop the recording, the
metronome will not stop
unless you use Stop.
The Ending function is programmed not to stop the recording process when the
pattern cycle ends. This feature can be exploited when recording a chain of songs
(a medley) - see “Recording a Medley” further ahead).
11.
Press ESC to escape Record mode and press Start/Stop to listen to the Song Style
playback.
How to see the Chord track events
When you have finished recording the Chords track, press STEP (F6). The display will
shows something like this:
You can add new Chords in Step mode by selecting the required note lengths and playing
the Chords.
Recording a Medley
You can record a medley (chain song) by changing Style while you are in Song Style
record mode. The Style change will be recorded in the Master track.
If you want each Style to finish with an Ending before proceeding to the next Style, you
can use the Ending and change Style during the Ending’s first cycle. This allows you to
continue recording with the new style without stopping.
If you change style after the ending’s first cycle, the Style stops playing but the record
mode will still be active. Press Start/Stop to stop the recording.
Owner's Manual
Styles, Songs & Sequencer
Song Styles
5 - 29
Give your Song Style a name
Use the NAME function in the EDIT SEQUENCER section to give your Song Style a
name.
Use the same operations as those used to name the Programmable Styles (see page 5-19).
Muting or disengaging recorded tracks
If you have recorded both tracks 5 and 6, your Song Style can only be used as backing
in playback mode. You will not be able to play any tracks engaged by the Sequencer in
real time.
The tracks engaged by the Sequencer (shown as “SEQ”) can be muted (“Off”) or
disengaged from the Sequencer and played in real time.
Use the operations explained to disengage the Internal Style tracks (see page 5-6).
Song Style Performances
Song Styles depend on Internal and Prog. Style Performances. Owing to the fact that each
Style (Int or Prog.) is associated to only one Performance, this limits Song Styles to only
one Performance for each Style change. The M. Perf function in the Master Track
overcomes this limitation.
If the M. Perf function is enabled (ON) in the Master Track of the Song Style, the relative
Song Style Performance is rendered programmable (only tracks 5 and 6) and it can be
copied up to 7 times to create other Song Style Performances. Each copy can then be
modified at will by assigning different sounds to track 5 and 6 for each Performance.
In practice, the M .Perf function in Song Style mode allows the selection of other Song
Style Performances in the Song Bank because the Song Style’s dependence on the Style
Performance is overridden.
If the M. Perf function is Off, any modifications made to the Performance will be
cancelled when you start the Playback.
How to create up to 8 Song Style Performances
Each Song Style can be associated to up to 8 Song Style Performances by exploiting the
M. Perf function.
These are shown by selecting P.SONG and selected by pressing the relative Function
buttons.
Unless you load a Song or Song Style from disk that is associated to more than one Song
Style Performance, you will have to create them. Normally, pressing the P. SONG button
shows one Performance and all other slots “empty”.
The Song Style Performance can only be modified in the two tracks 5 and 6 - the
remaining tracks (1, 2, 3 & 4) rest unchanged. In practice, changing Song Style
Performance changes the sounds of one or both tracks 5 and 6.
Procedure
It’s best to create the Song Style at first without recording any events.
1.
First create the Song Style by entering record mode as already explained.
Owner's Manual
Styles, Songs & Sequencer
5 - 30 Song Styles
2.
Press ESC without recording and the relative Bank Song will be created:
3.
Give your Song Style a Name using NAME in the Edit Sequencer section.
4.
Select MASTER TRACK and set the M. PERF function to “ON”.
5.
With your Bank Song Style selected, press P. SONG to enter the Song Performance bank associated to the current Song Style.
6.
Press PERF in the Edit section.
7.
Select COPY (on page 2).
8.
Set the “From” and “To” parameters to copy the Perf 1 to Perf 2:
9.
Confirm with ENT. The display returns to the Song Performance Bank.
10.
Press PERF in the Edit section and repeat the same operation for as many other
Performance destinations required.
11.
Give each Performance a name using the Name function in Edit Performance.
Confirm each new name with ENT.
When you have finished creating your Performances, you might have something
like this:
12.
Start to modify the tracks 5 and 6 of each Performance as required, not forgetting
to Save each modification with ENT twice.
11.
Press the SONGS button to enter Song Mode.
12.
With your Bank Song selected, press REC to enter record mode and select Song
Style.
13.
Set the recording parameters to those required and press Start to start the recording.
Owner's Manual
Styles, Songs & Sequencer
Song Styles
14.
5 - 31
While you are recording, press P.SONG to access the Song Performance Bank and
select a different Performance. The change will be recorded in the Master Track.
You can also change Performance by assigning the Performance Advance function to one of the Pedals in Edit Status.
15.
Continue as already described to record your Song Style.
Editing Song Styles
Your recorded Song Styles can be edited using all the Event Edit functions available in
the Edit Sequencer section.
Refer to the relevant chapter for detailed explanations of each function.
Save your Song Style to SRam or Disk
To save your Song Styles to Disk or SRam, use the SAVE ALL SONG or SAVE SINGLE
SONG operations.
Saving Song Styles also saves the associated Song Performances, if present.
N.B. Song Styles cannot be saved as MIDI Standard Files. The recorded patterns are not
recognised.
Load Song Styles from WS Songs Disks
The Generalmusic WS Disk library, consisting of over 500 Songs, are all Song Styles
which can be loaded into your WX.
Use the Load WS Song operation in the Disk Utility page (page 4-24).
Owner's Manual
Styles, Songs & Sequencer
5 - 32 Songs
4. SONGS & THE SEQUENCER
About the Sequencer
The principal function of the WX Sequencer is to record and play back multi-track
Songs. Therefore, this section takes a look at the on-board Sequencer before discussing
Song Mode.
The WX Sequencer is a MIDI data recorder; it memorises all the events necessary to
produce the sounds, unlike an audio tape recorder which records the actual sounds. The
principal use of the WX Sequencer is to record Songs, but it is also used to record Song
Styles and Programmable Styles (these are discussed in the relevant chapters).
If you are acquainted with the use of a Computer or hardware Sequencers, you will find
many things in common with these and WX Sequencer.
The ability of being able to capture MIDI events rather than sounds is a great advantage
over the more traditional methods on tape; it permits you to review the same Song an
infinite number of times to change instruments and modify entire parts, without
deteriorating the overall sound quality.
The WX Sequencer also loads MIDI Standard files and saves in the same data format.
The WX Sequencer permits you to record up to 16 tracks and has a total capacity of
approximately 250,000 events.
The Sequencer controls
The principal Sequencer controls are the Start/Stop button and several buttons located
in the Sequencer & Users group below the display:
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
M.PERF
SONGS
SEQUENCER & USERS
REC
REC:
SCORE
TEMPO
SYNC
Accesses the Sequencer record mode (when you are in Prog
Style or Song mode). After confirming the Song record mode with
Enter, you enter the “record pending” status.
>> (Fast forward) << (Fast rewind): These controls advance the playback of
a Song or rewind it for as long as the respective buttons are pressed;
holding them pressed increases the velocity of the action considerably.
These commands can operate in Stop status or Play, but in the latter,
the song in playback will be interrupted for as long as the button is
pressed. In Stop status, the Song can be made to start from the specified
Song Pointer (shown in the playback display as 1 1 1) by pressing
Continue.
SCORE
Owner's Manual
If the Song in play has been recorded with the Score function,
activating this button will activate a facility which permits you to see
the lyrics and chords of the Song. More about this in the relevant
section further ahead.
Songs and the Sequencer
Songs
5 - 33
SONG:
Gains access to the Bank Songs. Each one can memorise one Song and
up to 8 Song Performances
The Sequencer also makes use of the following commands:
START:
Starts the playback of a Song (or Style), or starts the recording when
the sequencer is in record pending status.
STOP:
Interrupts the playback or recording of a Song (or Style); pressed a
second time it “rewinds” the song to its starting point.
CONT.
This button (Var/Cont) starts a Song from a specified Song pointer, or
from any point after being stopped.
START
STOP
FILL
TAP
FILL VAR
CONT
INTRO
END
The Sequencer operating modes
The Sequencer has three distinct operating modes:
PLAYBACK (Start): playback of a Song, Song Style, Prog. Style or Internal
Style. Each mode is discussed in the relevant chapters.
RECORD:
registration of a Song, Song Style or Prog. Style. Song
Styles and Prog. Styles are discussed in the relevant
chapters.
Recordings are carried out in Real Time or Step Time.
About Real Time Recording
There are three ways to real time record:
• Over Dub recording: If you overdub record into a track which already contains
recorded events, the newly recorded data will be combined with the previous data.
• Normal (replace) recording: If you replace record into a track which already
contains recorded events, the data will be rewritten and the data following the point
at which you begin recording will be erased.
• Punch recording
This method of recording allows you to “punch in” a correction into a previously
recorded track in record mode with the PNCH function set in the Mode function.
An instant before reaching the point where the new notes are to be inserted, press
the appropriately programmed Pedal and play the correct notes. The pedal
activates the replace recording mode and allows previously recorded events to be
replaced by the new ones. Release the pedal to deactivate the function and return
to Dubb recording.
About Step Recording
Step Recording allows you to record events into a track note by note from the
keyboard, specifying the length of each note. If you Step Record over a bar which
already contains recorded events, they will be replaced by the newly recorded ones.
EDIT:
Owner's Manual
modification of a recorded Song, Song Style or Prog.
Style. The Edit Sequencer functions allow you to intervene on every track of your recordings and modify the
status of the recorded data. As well as note events, you can
also manually insert and edit control data.
See the Edit Sequencer chapter 6.
Songs and the Sequencer
5 - 34 Songs
SONGS
Something about the Songs and their structure
The WX Sequencer permits you to record up to 16 tracks to create a SONG.
A Song is a complete piece of music consisting of one or more tracks, each with a
different sound. Unlike the Prog. Styles and Song Styles which exploit short patterns that
loop continuously and consist of only 6 tracks, Songs are recordings of 16 polytimbric
parts, or tracks, and the length of all the tracks can vary (unlimited number of bars tied
to the amount of memory available).
The diagram below illustrates the basic structure of a Song.
Master Track
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
TEMPO
PERF. CHANGE
PEDAL VOLUME
PERF. CHANGE
EFFECTS CHANGE
PERF. CHANGE
PERF. CHANGE
Track 1
SYNFRETL
LYLE
OBX2
CHOPPER
Track 2
KANOUN
LYLE
PICCOLO
LYLE
Track 3
SYNBASS 1
WXGRANDP
ELPIANO1
JUMP
Track 4
STRINGS2
JAZZGTR1
JAZZGTR1
STRINGS1
Track 5
FANTASY 3
SOUNDTRK
PCKBASS1
OVERDGTR
Track 6
STOPBASS
ACOBASS2
ELECBASS
BRASSTRPT
Track 7
TIMPANI
WARMPAD
SYNORG2
VIBES 1
Track 8
FILTRES1
BRASSTRPT
FLUGEHOR
DYNTRUMP
Track 9
PULSEHARP
BRASS1
FLUGEHOR
ELECBASS
Track 10
DKHOUSE1
DKJAZZ
DKROOM1
DKSTAND1
Track 11
JUMP
SOFTSAX
FRENHORN
BRTPIANO
Track 12
DYNFLUT1
DYNFLUT1
DYNFLUT1
PULSHARP
Track 13
AZIMUT
AZIMUT
AZIMUT
JUMP
Track 14
CHOPPER
CHOPPER
CHOPPER
ANALOGIC
Track 15
FANTASY1
FANTASY1
FANTASY1
JUMP
Track 16
PULSE 1
LYLE
WXGRANDP
OVERDGTR
Each Track “carries” its individually programmed parameters (Program change,
volume, MIDI channel, etc.).
Each Track can be recorded up to 999 bars long.
Each Song Performance associated to a Song has its own Effects setting (each
Track can be individually configured to play with or without the Effect assigned
to the Song Performance).
Each Track can be configured to be controlled by an external controlling device.
Each Track can be configured to control an external MIDI device.
A “Ghost Track”, called the Master Track, contains information relating to the
Time Signature, recording Tempo, Performance changes, Effects and Tempo
changes, as well as the interventions of the Volume Pedal and Rotary.
The 16 Multi-timbric tracks contain information pertaining to the notes, the
Program Changes, the application of controller data, Pitch Bend and After Touch
data.
Owner's Manual
Songs and the Sequencer
Songs
5 - 35
Where are the Songs stored?
The recorded SONGS reside in the Song Banks which are accessed by pressing the
SONGS button.
The WX is supplied with two Songs loaded into the instrument’s SRam. Turning on the
instrument loads both Songs into RAM and if you press the SONGS button in the
Sequencer & Users section, the display shows the following:
NOTE:
Use the Up/down cursor
arrows to scroll the
tracks.
Each Function button can select a Song Bank consisting of 1 Song and up to 8 Song
Performances.
The Song Performances
The Song Performances; if present, are accessed by pressing the P. SONG button in the
Performance & Style Banks in Song Mode. All Song Performances can be configured
with up to 16 tracks.
Examine, for example, the “DEMOWX” Song - press P.SONG and the display shows
8 Song Performances, 4 of which are used to record the Song.
Every Song Performance can configure each Track independently (see Edit Perf);
it memorises a track’s MIDI channel and Out port;
its destination (internal sound engine and/or MIDI Out);
it’s association with the instrument’s physical controllers;
with the Effects processors;
its Transpose and Tuning status;
and other parameters, as already explained in the previous chapters.
Exploiting the Real Time Performances
To record a Song you can exploit the default Real Time Performances by entering Song
record mode with the currently selected R. T. Performance.
You can also customise the Performances according to your needs and save any
modifications with Enter.
Up to 8 recorded Songs can be stored in the 8 Songs Banks (one in each) and at any time,
Owner's Manual
Songs and the Sequencer
5 - 36 Songs
you can save them to disk for reloading at a later time.
You can also save one or more Songs to SRam in order to have some Songs available after
powering up.
Loading Songs from disk
Before playing a Song from a disk, it must be loaded into the instrument’s internal
memory.
You can load your Songs from Disk using one of the Disk functions (Load operations):
Load all Disk loads all the data present on disk.
MIDI Files
Bear in mind that WX
can also load Standard
MIDI Files from disk.
Note: Preload is only
operative when the
instrument is in Song
mode.
An attempt to Preload a
song in any other mode
will display the
following message:
Press ESC to cancel the
display and select Song
mode to Preload a
Song.
Load All Song loads all Bank Songs present on disk.
Load Single Song loads only one Bank Song which you can select and direct to
any Bank Song location of your choice.
Refer to the Disk chapter for detailed explanations relating to the above procedures.
Preload
You can also choose to load a Song in background using Preload.
This function reduces the amount of operations required for the loading procedure and
is particularly recommended when playing back Songs.
Preload is discussed in detail in the Disk chapter on page 4-13.
Owner's Manual
Songs and the Sequencer
Songs
5 - 37
Song Playback Mode
◆
If a Song is present in RAM, you can select it by pressing the SONGS buttons
followed by the relative Function button (F1…F8).
◆
Press the START button to start the playback.
The display shows the Song name, the current Song Performance, the starting
Tempo and the Time signature.
Before playback, you can modify;
the Sounds assigned to the Tracks;
the Tempo;
the Track volumes, etc.,
HOWEVER, unless you save the modifications in the Performance (press Edit twice),
starting the song will cancel the modifications and recall the original Performance.
You can disengage tracks used by the Sequencer to play them in real time. The procedure
to use is explained in detail in the Internal Styles chapter, page 5-6.
You can also change the Song name by using the NAME function in the Edit Sequencer
section.
Start a Song from any point
You can start your Song from any position by using the >> or << keys to specify a
different value for the Song Position Pointer.
◆
For example, with the song in the above display example, set the Song Pointer to
a value 16 1 1:
◆
Now press the “CONTinue” button to start the Song from the specified position.
START
STOP
FILL
TAP
FILL VAR
CONT
INTRO
END
Owner's Manual
Songs and the Sequencer
5 - 38 Songs
Playing along with a Song in playback
When you press Start in Song mode, the selected Song starts to play.
Normally, at least one track will be active to play while others are engaged
by the Sequencer (shown by “SEQ” in the track status column).
The above display shows a Song in playback and one track (track 1) active
in Local (shown by “KYB” in the track column).
Note 1:
if you modify the
Sounds assigned to the
tracks in playback
mode, the new situation
rests unchanged until a
recorded change is
encountered, or until
the song ends. When
you start the Song
again, the modifications
will be lost if not saved.
In Playback mode you can:
choose to mute tracks (hit the Toggle);
change the sound assigned to tracks1;
modify the Sound parameters (Volume, Attack, Release, Filter 1 & 2) in real time
using the pedals programmed with the relative functions;
change Performance (if present).
Tracks shown “OFF” in Song Mode
Normally, a track showing an “OFF” status can be activated by hitting the Toggle.
In Song Mode, this is not always the case because most songs are recorded with almost
all tracks disconnected for “LOCAL” and “MIDI IN” reactions. You can verify the status
of all tracks shown “OFF” by checking the Configuration parameter in Edit Perf:
The display example shows that track 1 in Song Mode is disconnected for Local and
MIDI IN.
If a track is shown to be disconnected for Local, you can connect it by hitting the Toggle
and returning to Song Mode, where the track will now play in real time.
Sing along with a Song using the SCORE function
The SCORE function is one of the great WX novelties. In fact, selecting SCORE when
an appropriate song is playing permits you to see the lyrics of a song across the display
in synchronisation with the music being played (see also page 3-8).
The display shows several viewing options: All, Lyric, Zoom, Chord.
The option “ALL” shows the Song lyrics, the chords and the music on the staff.
Owner's Manual
Songs and the Sequencer
Songs
5 - 39
Selecting Lyrics shows the lyrics of the Song in small type:
Selecting Zoom shows the Lyrics in large type:
Selecting Chords shows the chord notation:
The GET function
The GET function transfers the recorded notes onto the musical staff.
The operation is discussed in the section dealing with song recording on page 5-46.
Connecting to a domestic TV or colour computer monitor.
WX can interface with a computer monitor or domestic TV, provided both a fitted with
a SCART socket. The cable supplied with the WX is connected to the RGB Video Out
socket on the instrument’s rear panel and the other end (SCART) to the receiving
monitor.
Other connecting possibilities via the Composite Video socket are possible - these are
discussed in the GETTING STARTED chapter 1, on page 1-10.
The images projected by WX can also be controlled in the EDIT STATUS - VIDEO
MONITOR page, discussed in the relative chapter on page 4-33.
Using the SCORE function, you can project the Lyrics of your WX Songs to an external
viewing device and sing along with your friends.
Owner's Manual
Songs and the Sequencer
5 - 40 Songs
SONG RECORD mode
Songs can be recorded in two ways:
Real Time Recording: what you play on the keyboard will be recorded exactly as you
play it, including the keystrike velocity.
Generally, you create a Song by recording one track at a time (first the Drum track
followed by the Bass track and so on...) but you can also record more that one track
simultaneously.
Step Recording: This method allows you to record notes one at a time from the
keyboard, specifying the length of each note. The track also records the velocity of the
notes played.
This method is particularly useful to insert, for example, a fast arpeggio, otherwise
difficult to record in real time without flaws.
Before entering Record mode, prepare your Performance
When you access Song Record mode, the currently selected Performance is “carried”
together with all the memorised track and Performance parameters.
Furthermore, each track you select to record is automatically configured to react only
with the Sequencer. The Local and MIDI IN connections are disconnected when you
confirm Song record.
It is advisable, therefore, to prepare your Performances before recording.
You can configure your Performances using all the functions available in the EDIT
Performance section, as already explained in the relevant chapters.
HOW TO REALTIME RECORD A SONG
1.
Access Song Record mode by pressing an “Empty” location in Song mode:
2.
Press REC (yes):
Owner's Manual
Songs and the Sequencer
Songs
3.
5 - 41
Confirm SONG with ENTER:
If you want to record changes in TEMPO and VOLUME during the recording,
select the relative functions (F1 & F2). The events will be recorded in the Master
Track.
4.
Select the Master Track to configure the relative parameters as required Time
signature, recording Tempo, etc..
These operations are discussed in the Edit Sequencer chapter.
Press MASTER or ESC to close the Master Track.
5.
Select a Track to record.
If your Song includes a Drum Track, it is better to record this first - it helps you
record the remaining tracks in time with the beat.
If you want to comply to GENERAL MIDI standards, assign a Drumkit to track
10 (assigned MIDI channel 10 by default).
6.
Press START and start to record your Drum track for the Song.
7.
When you have finished recording the Track, you can pass to the Edit Sequencer
section to optimise your recording (Quantize, Insert, Delete, etc.).
8.
If you are satisfied with the recording, press the Toggle to confirm the Track, select
another one to record and repeat the operations from point 5:
Owner's Manual
Songs and the Sequencer
5 - 42 Songs
9.
When you have finished recording your Song, press ESC to escape REC mode and,
if you haven’t already done so, give the song a name using the NAME function in
the Edit Sequencer section.
Realtime Record options
The record mode display shows several options in the lower area that you can select with
the relative Function buttons.
METR:
(F5) determines the status of the Metronome.
The Metronome is active when selected (reverse-highlight). You can deactivate it
at any moment by pressing the respective Function button.
TEMPO:
(F1) permits the recording of Tempo variations in record mode.
Rotate the Dial while you are recording the song. All Tempo data is recorded in
the Master Track, together with the starting tempo.
The Tempo events are shown as TEMPO-SET data.
Tempo recordings are always in replace (normal) mode, irrespective of the status
of the normal or overdub options (new events cancel the old).
If you activate the TEMPO-FIX button during the recording, the events will be
recorded in the Master Track as Tempo Fix data.
VOLUME:
(F2) permits you to record Volume variations in record mode.
Use the Master Volume slider, a pedal connected to the Volume real panel socket
or a pedal programmed for the Volume control.
These events are always recorded in Replace mode in the relative Track or the
Master Track and are of the Fade In/Fade Out type.
◆
Recorded in the tracks (Microscope):
If you use a pedal connected to the rear panel Volume socket, the track records
Controller 04 events.
If you use one of the pedals programmed to regulate Volume, the track records
Controller 07 events.
The display example above shows what the Microscope looks like after recording
Controller 04 and 07 events.
◆
Recorded in the Master track:
If you use the Master Volume slider, the events will be recorded as Mast. Vol
events in the Master Track.
Owner's Manual
Songs and the Sequencer
Songs
5 - 43
The display example above shows what the Master Track looks like after recording
Tempo and Master Volume events.
You will observe that “note events” are not recorded in the Master Track.
The Mask option
By using the Mask option, you can choose to mask certain events to reduce the amount
of information displayed.
The Master track and Microscope functions both have the Insert function with which
you can manually insert data, and the Delete function, which can cancel selected events.
See Edit Sequencer - Master Track and Microscope for information about the Mask
option and Insert and Delete.
HOW TO STEP RECORD A SONG
After entering Song Record mode, the display shows the STEP option corresponding to
Function button F6:
Step recording allows you to enter notes into your track one by one from the keyboard,
selecting the length of each note.
1.
2.
Select the track to record when you are in “record-pending” status.
Press STEP.
The display will show the Start Song position (first bar) and, if other tracks have
already been recorded, the bar corresponding to the effective End Song.
3.
Select the note required using the corresponding Function button.
Owner's Manual
Songs and the Sequencer
5 - 44 Songs
A dotted note is obtained by pressing the selected note a second time.
Note Lenths:
Each beat of a bar is
defined by the
sequencer resolution
which is 192 parts or
“ticks” per quarter.
Each note length, or
Step Time, is related to
the sequencer
resolution. Therefore,
the open note which
plays for one bar in 4/4
time has a step time of 4
x 192 = 768. The
quaver (the note with
one ‘tail’) has a step
time corresponding to
half a quarter note (192
÷ 2 = 96).
A triplet is obtained by pressing the selected note a third time.
Return to the normal note by pressing the note once more.
4.
5.
6.
A dotted note changes the step time by 3/2.
A triplet changes a note by 2/3.
Enter the note using the keyboard. To enter a Chord, simply press the chord.
Regardless of the timing with which each they are pressed, each note played until
released will be recorded at the same step.
Pressing a note on the keyboard shows the key on position (the song pointer), the
note name, the note on velocity, key off velocity (standard value 64) and the note
length.
When you release the note or notes, you advance to the next step.
Repeat steps 3 & 4 as many times as necessary.
To enter a Rest, simply press the ENT button. The rest will take the value of the
selected note.
If you make a mistake, use the Up/Down cursor arrows to select the entry one step
before the one to replace and enter the correct note. The note immediately after the
one selected will be deleted.
When you have finished recording, press REAL (F8) to return to realtime record
mode and press Start to listen to the playback of the recording.
NOTE: Step recording does not allow you to record control data. This type of data can
be introduced in real time into the recorded track, or by inserting it manually in the
Microscope and Master Track using the “Insert” function.
Step Recording is also discussed in the Programmable Style chapter, page 5-20.
NOTE:
Aftertouch data
consume large amounts
of memory.
Recording Pitch Bend, After Touch and Controller data
Pitch Bend and Aftertouch data are generated by the Track Ball and keyboard respectively. Controller data is generated by appropriately programmed Pedals.
All three types of events are recorded into tracks in realtime record mode and can be seen
in the Microscope. They can also be inserted manually.
Multi-track recording
Multi-track recording (recording several tracks simultaneously) follows exactly the
same steps as described for single track recording, with the difference that you can select
two or more tracks to record in “’record-pending” status.
Tracks not recorded can be activated and played in real time with the Song in playback .
Owner's Manual
Songs and the Sequencer
Songs
5 - 45
Recording MIDI IN events simultaneously with Track events.
You can record events received on MIDI IN simultaneously with events generated by the
keyboard (Local).
For example, you can program the Configuration parameter of your Performance so that
two or three tracks receive MIDI IN data only (MIDI status), while several other tracks
can be exploited by the sequencer (SEQ). The remaining tracks can be set to Local (KYB)
or mute (OFF).
The following messages received at MIDI IN can be recorded:
note on/off;
pitch bend;
program change;
channel pressure;
poly key pressure;
control change (0 - 101).
Synchronisation with external MIDI devices
External MIDI devices (keyboards, sequencers, accordions, etc.) can be connected via
MIDI to playback in synchronisation with the WX.
External Sequencer controlled by the WX
For example, if you want WX to control an external Sequencer which is going to record
what you play on the keyboard, you must connect the WX MIDI OUT (the Master) to
the Sequencer MIDI IN (the Slave), direct the WX tracks that are going to be recorded
to MIDI OUT and set the WX MIDI CLOCK to INTERNAL. The external Sequencer
will wait to receive the start command from the WX. To stop the recording, press Start/
Stop. WX can also transmit the Song Pointer, therefore, if the external sequencer is able
to recognise the message, you can start it at a precise point.
WX controlled by an external Sequencer
Connect the external Sequencer MIDI OUT (the Master) to the WX MIDI IN (the Slave),
set the Master’s clock source to INTernal (transmit MIDI clock messages) and the
Slave’s (WX) clock to EXTernal (receive MIDI Clock - see MIDI “Other” page) to
synchronise to incoming MIDI clock messages.
All Start and Stop operations are executed on the Master unit.
Create a Performance to communicate with Computers/Sequencers
When you use your WX with a COMPUTER or MIDI SEQUENCER, connect the WX
MIDI OUT to the Computer/Sequencer MIDI IN and the Computer/Sequencer MIDI
OUT to WX MIDI IN. You’ll require at least one Track to send data to the Computer/
Sequencer (to prevent MIDI data from looping) and another Track to receive the
Computer/Sequencer data and direct it to the WX internal Generation.
For this purpose, you should create a Performance with the following characteristics:
Tracks 1 to 14 (for example) connected to receive MIDI IN data only (Local off) and all
directed to the WX SOUNDS internal generation (see Edit Performance - Configuration
parameter).
Owner's Manual
Songs and the Sequencer
5 - 46 Songs
As well as being configured as Tracks 1-14, Track 15 should also be connected to receive
LOCAL data to allow you to hear a sound when you play on the keyboard.
Track 16 should be connected for LOCAL data and the resulting messages directed to
MIDI OUT on OUT port 1 , Channel 1 - MIDI IN must be disconnected and no messages
sent to the WX SOUND generation. This condition is otherwise known as MIDI Local
off. Track 16 can therefore be used to send data to a Computer or Sequencer and prevent
the WX MIDI signal from looping on itself.
The GET function - Create a score of your recording
You can transfer the recorded notes of a track to a musical staff with the GET option of
the SCORE function.
1.
For example, after recording a Track, confirm the recorded Track (SEQ) and
escape Record mode.
2.
Press SCORE and select GET:
3.
Select the track from which the Score is going to be taken and confirm with YES:
4.
After a short while, the display shows:
Repeat the same operations for all the recorded Tracks of your Song.
The Edit Status section provides several options to control the viewing possibilities on
an external screen (TV, computer colour monitor). See page 4-33.
Owner's Manual
Songs and the Sequencer
Songs
5 - 47
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO FOLLOW WHEN PROGRAMMING THE
LYRICS AND CHORDS TRACKS USING A COMPUTER
Programming the Lyrics and Chords track using a computer (or sequencer) requires
special attention in order to ensure good results.
LYRICS TRACK
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
The event recognised by WX to create the track containing texts is the LYRIC
event. Therefore, all sequencer software or score writing programs which control
this type of event are suitable for the purpose of creating the LYRICS track.
(example: ATARI: Notator / MAC: Notator Logic and others).
All ASCII Standard characters that fall between 33 and 127 are recognised. All
letters already accented are excluded. To create a letter with an accent, use the
symbol normally used to obtain an apostrophe (’).
The character used to syllabize a word is the “under-score” (_). Therefore, to
syllabize a word with the scope of Synchronising it with the corresponding notes,
the word “instrument” for example, should be written as: “in_stru_ment”.
A free space inserted between two syllables is recognised as “end-word” (simply
use the space bar).
Up to eight characters can be used for each note of a melody. All characters that
exceed the limit will not be seen.
The “pipe” symbol (¶) is used to indicate the end of a paragraph.
WX is capable of displaying a maximum of 20 characters per line when using the
“BIG” font. It is not permitted to start a new paragraph (insertion of the “pipe”
symbol “¶”) between two syllables positioned under the same note (example:
ra¶an_).
CHORDS TRACK
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
To programme the CHORDS track, in other words the chord symbols, you must
use TEXT type events.
Chord symbols are written using the international notation (A, B, C, etc.).
Insert a space between the letter corresponding to the chord symbol and the
abbreviation of the same chord. For example, C minor seventh = C(space)min7.
N.B. In order that WX can recognise and, therefore, display all the various chords,
they must be written as shown in point 5 below.
It is also possible to add an extension to a chord symbol (divided chord: for
example C Major with bass G).
In this case, use the “slash” symbol (/) after the chord symbol and the note: example
C / G.
Chords recognised by WX:
C (major)
C min
C7
C min7
C aug
C dim
C min7_5b
C sus4
C min_7#
C maj7
C add9
C 5b
C 7_5b
C maj7_5b
C 7_5#
C sus4_7
C6
C min6
C 7_9
C maj7_9
C min7_9
C 7_9b
C min_ad9
C 6_9
Owner's Manual
Songs and the Sequencer
5 - 48 Songs
Working with Standard MIDI Files
Create Standard MIDI Files
The Songs you record on your WX can be saved in MIDI Standard File format, making
it possible to play your WX sequence data on other equipment regardless of the
manufacturer (provided that the equipment conforms to this MIDI standard).
The conversion is performed through the Save Single MIDI File option in the DISK
operations.
NOTE:
IMPORTANT
The Songs supplied by
Generalmusic with
Scores (Lyrics tracks)
are protected from
being converted to
MIDI Standard Files.
Refer to the DISK chapter (4), page 4-16 for information on how to Save Standard MIDI
Files.
Load Standard MIDI Files
WX can load sequence data from floppy disks regardless of the source equipment or
manufacturer (provided it conforms to this MIDI standard).
Refer to the DISK chapter 4 page 4-11 for information on how to Load Single MIDI Files.
General MIDI and Standard MIDI Files
If you want your saved Standard MIDI files to be converted in conformity with General
MIDI, you should set the GENERAL MIDI option to ON in the MIDI OTHER page.
This will convert all program changes on MIDI Channel 10 to GS or GM Standard
Drumkits.
The relative conversion table appears in the MIDI chapter on page 4-83.
If the GENERAL MIDI option remains OFF, your converted Standard MIDI File will
retain the original program changes on MIDI channel 10.
If you load a Standard MIDI File from floppy disk, the GENERAL MIDI option should
be ON if the file conforms to GENERAL MIDI, or to GS.
This will direct all program changes on MIDI Channel 10 to the WX Drumkits, as per
the conversion table referred to above.
In same cases, Standard MIDI Files “carry” a GM “Flag”. In such cases, the status of the
WX General MIDI option in the MIDI Other page will be irrelevant.
Owner's Manual
Songs and the Sequencer
Sequencer
6-1
CHAPTER 6 - SEQUENCER EDIT MODE
The EDIT SEQUENCER section groups all the Event Edit functions that allow you to
edit your musical data and Song parameters.
All the functions are valid for Songs, Song Styles and Prog. Styles, therefore, reference
is made to Songs throughout this chapter, unless otherwise indicated.
In this mode, the keyboard will play the selected track of the current Song or Style.
MASTER TRACK
This is where information common to all tracks is stored. The Master Track can be
considered as a “ghost” track which records events common to all tracks, such as Tempo
variations, Performance changes, Master Volume changes, etc..
Pressing MASTER in Song mode shows:
The Song Styles show a slight variation:
The Prog. Styles show:
Songs and Song Styles also show a second Master Track page which records the events
common to all tracks. See “Master Track Event Edit” further ahead.
The Master Track parameters - First page
The following parameters are common to all modes (Styles and Song).
TIME SIGNATURE
The Master Track allows you to specify the Time Signature
for the Song, but it is not possible to set two different Time
Signatures for two different Tracks of the same Song.
The Time Signature determines the number of beats in a bar (the upper number)
as well as the division of a beat (the lower number).
Rotate the Dial to specify the first value, select the second part and specify the
required value. Value range: 1/2.... 15/16.
Owner's Manual
Edit Sequencer
6-2
Sequencer
You can program all common and not so common Time signatures because both
parameters (numerator and denominator) are programmable.
Important
The Time Signature can only be changed if the Song is empty (before Record). It cannot
be altered if a song has been recorded, nor during playback.
An attempt to change the Time Signature of a recorded song will provoke the following
warning:
TEMPO
This parameter determines the song’s running speed (Metronomic time), measured in beats per minute (BPM).
The value shown refers to the starting tempo of the Song. Value range: 20... 250.
You can modify this parameter only before record start.
The Song’s speed can also be varied in real time by rotating the Dial but this will
not alter the Master Track’s Tempo parameter value.
Songs and Song Styles record real time Tempo variations in the Master Track,
provided the TEMPO Record function is selected before record start. The relative
data are shown as Tempo Set events.
Song Styles also record the activation of the Tempo-Fix button, shown as
TEMPO-FIX events.
Programmable Styles cannot record real time Tempo changes.
COUNTDOWN
Enables (On) or disables (OFF) the one bar lead into the
recording after pressing Start.
Deactivating the Metronome does not eliminate the countdown bar.
NB: If the EXTernal clock is selected (in the “MIDI Other” page), the countdown
will be excluded.
METRONOME VOL
Adjusts the Metronome sound level (valid for Playback and
Record mode). Value range: 40... 127.
The higher the value, the louder the sound. The lowest limit softens the sound but
does not eliminate it.
UNDO
Enables (On) or disables (Off) the Undo function for the Edit
Song and Song Record modes.
Undo permits you to cancel a recorded sequence or restore portions of a cancelled
Song. Undo also restores an Edit Sequencer operation to the status prior to
confirmation. See “UNDO” further ahead.
Owner's Manual
Edit Sequencer
Sequencer
6-3
For Song Styles only:
START STYLE
determines the Style with which you start your recording.
You can scroll through all the Internal and Programmable
Styles present in memory. The Prog. Styles will appear with
the user-programmed name.
START PERF
determines the starting Performance. If you have programmed
some Song Style Performances, you can select the one to start
recording with here.
START M. PERF
determines the status of the Manual Performance button at
record start.
If this parameter is On, you will be able to select your Song Style Performances,
provided that there are any present in the Song Style Bank.
If this parameter is Off, you will only be able to record your Song Style with the
specified Performance in “Start Perf”.
For Songs only:
START PERF
determines the starting Performance. If you have programmed
some Song Performances, you can select the one to start
recording with.
KEY
this parameter is associated to the SCORE function and
determines the key (sharp [#] or flat [b]) of the Score captured
when you use the GET function.
You can play your Song in the key of C and capture the relative Score on the staff
in the specified key. Clockwise rotation of the Dial obtains Sharps, anticlockwise
rotation provides flats. For example, if you specify the key of C#, the relative Score
captured with GET will show:
MINOR
operates in conjunction with the Key function above, also
associated to the SCORE function. It determines the minor
key of the Score captured when you use the GET function.
For example, if you specify the key of C Minor, the relative Score captured with
GET will show:
Owner's Manual
Edit Sequencer
6-4
Sequencer
For Songs and Song Styles:
STOP BAR
specifies any bar of the current song to act as the effective
song end. The song will stop at the end of the specified bar.
You can use this function to stop a recording at a precise point without “dirtying”
the following bar.
SONG LOOP
This function finds its
use in Song with a
repetitive Chord cycle.
You can record a
sequence of Chords for
the first cycle then, with
the song in playback
and Song Loop set to
ON, play other tracks in
real time while the
playback repeats
continuously.
SONG LOOP
When it is “on”, the Song in will play back repeatedly.
The currently selected song will play through to the end, loop back to the starting
point and repeat. The song will continue repeating until the Stop button is pressed.
Looped songs do not interfere with sustained notes; if sustained notes are present
when the song goes into loop, these notes continue decaying without being
“chopped”.
Navigation
◆
Scroll through all the events recorded with the Up/Down cursor arrows.
◆
Select each part of the recorded events with the Left/Right cursor arrows.
◆
Use the Dial to change the value of a selected parameter or to move a selected Song
Pointer to any other location.
◆
If you press the Toggle at the Song Pointer position, you will activate a small
window where you can specify a required Song position.
◆
Press ENT to go directly to the position required.
NOTE:
The MASTER TRACK
does NOT record note
events.
Master Track Event Edit
Master Track Event Edit allows you to modify, insert or delete individual events from
the data in the Master Track.
The operation is available for Songs and Song Styles which show a second Master Track
page where the events common to all tracks are recorded.
A typical example of a recorded Master Track is shown below:
Owner's Manual
Edit Sequencer
Sequencer
6-5
Here you can see some Master Volume events, a Program Change and some Tempo Set
events in the left part of the display.
The events show the Song position (Bar, Beat and Sequencer resolution), the name of the
recorded parameter and its relative value.
The right part of the display is where you can specify data to insert or delete.
This function is not available for Programmable Styles.
How to edit Master Track events
Use the following procedure to edit the events shown, including those inserted manually
with the INSERT function explained below.
1.
Move an event from one Song position (bar) to another by rotating the Dial.
Example: You can move from 1 3 128 to 4 1 192.
2.
Move an event from one beat to another within the same bar by selecting the second
pointer value with the Right cursor arrow and rotate the Dial.
Example: You can move from 1 3 128 to 1 2 128.
3.
Move an event from one defined point to another within the same beat by changing
the sequencer resolution value with the Dial.
Example: if you have three events recorded at positions 1 3 128, 1 3 135 and 1
3 137, you can move the first event to position: 1 3 140.
4.
You can change the value of the parameter listed under “STATUS” by selecting
its relative value (listed under “VAL”) and rotating the Dial.
Create an event with INSERT
The INSERT function allows you to create an event at the cursor location.
1.
With the Right cursor arrow, select the “INSERT” parameter field.
2.
Rotate the Dial to select the required parameter.
3.
Return to the first value of the Song Point with the Left cursor arrow.
4.
Press the Function button corresponding to INSERT (F6) to enter the selected
event at the specified position.
For SONGS, you can choose from the following events to insert:
Performance change
Owner's Manual
Inserts a Performance change event with a default value of 0.
Value range 0 - 7.
Edit Sequencer
6-6
Sequencer
Tempo Set
Inserts a single Tempo event, shown as Tempo Set, with a
default value of 120. Value range 0 - 250.
Master Volume
Inserts a single Master Volume event with a default value of
64. Value range 0 - 127.
Effect 1
Inserts a single Effect 1 event from the corresponding Eff 1
processor with a default value of 0. Value range 0 - 63. Each
value corresponds to an Effect Type from the respective
Effect Processor.
Effect 2
Inserts a single Effect 2 event from the corresponding Eff 1
processor with a default value of 0.. Value range 0 - 63. Each
value corresponds to an Effect Type from the respective
Effect Processor.
Effect 1 Vol.
Inserts a single event of Effect 1 Volume with a default value
of 0. Value range 0 - 127.
Effect 2 Vol.
Inserts a single event of Effect 2 Volume with a default value
of 0. Value range 0 - 127.
Rotary
Inserts a single event of the Rotary effect with a default status
set to “OFF”. Value range: ON/OFF. Activates the passing
from Slow to Fast or vice versa.
For SONG STYLES, you can insert the following events in addition to those shown
above:
Select Style
Fill Base
Fill Var
Ending
NOTE
You cannot erase
indispensable
information from the
Master Track. The
Master Track always
records the initial
Tempo, the starting
Performance and other
vital information as
song point 1-1-1. You
can modify these
parameters but cannot
erase them at the
starting position
because they relate to
indispensable
information that defines
the song.
M. Perf
Tempo Fix
Inserts a Style change event with a default value corresponding to the first Style in the Prog Style Bank 1.
Inserts an event corresponding to the activation of the Fill In,
shown as ON. The inserted event is immediately followed by
the OFF event to correspond with the end of the Fill pattern.
Inserts an event corresponding to the activation of the Fill
Variation, shown as ON. The inserted event is immediately
followed by the OFF event to correspond with the end of the
Fill Var pattern.
Inserts an event corresponding to the activation of the Ending.
Inserts an event corresponding to the activation of the Manual
Performance button (ON). This is useful if you want to start
recording any Song Style Performances present in the Song
Style Bank, otherwise not possible if M. Perf is Off.
Inserts an event corresponding to the activation of the Tempo
Fix button, important if you want to introduce the event in
order to fix your playing Tempo to a preferred setting.
DELETE EVENTS
1.
Select the corresponding Song pointer of the event you wish to cancel.
2.
Press the Function button corresponding to DELETE (F8) to cancel the event at the
specified position.
Owner's Manual
Edit Sequencer
Sequencer
6-7
The Master Track MASK function
The MASK option allows you to isolate events of the same type in situations where a
large amount of data is present. This helps you to select the position of the event required
much faster. The Song Mask shows a shorter list of events.
1.
Press MASK (F7).
The display shows that all events recorded will be displayed:
Important
You cannot attempt to
insert events in an
Empty Song. An attempt
to do so will display the
following warning:
2.
With the Cursor arrows, select an event to mask.
3.
Hit the Toggle to mask the selected event:
Press ESC to cancel the
display and record
some events.
The disappearance of the symbol “√” shows which event is masked. Press the
Toggle again to make the symbol re-appear.
4.
Repeat for all the other events that you wish to mask.
5.
Press ENT to return to the Master Track. If you press ESC, your Mask setting will
be ignored.
Note: Song Style show a Mask with a greater number of parameters.
Press MASTER or ESC to escape from the Master Track.
Owner's Manual
Edit Sequencer
6-8
Sequencer
COPY
This function allows you to copy a Track, a specified bar or range or bars, or an entire
Song to the same Song or to another one.
This operation is also valid for Prog. Styles and Song Styles, although the elements in
the display relate to the respective modes.
From Song
selects the source Song to copy from.
From Track
selects the source Track to copy from.
If you are in Song mode, you can select the following elements to copy to a
recorded song:
◆
From tracks 1 - 16 (depending on which have been recorded)
◆
Master Track
◆
Chords Track
◆
Lyrics Track
◆
Score Track
◆
All Tracks
If you are in Song Style mode, you can select:
◆
Tracks 5 and 6
◆
Master Track
◆
Chords Track
◆
All tracks
If you are in Prog. Style mode, you can also select the recorded Riffs and copy one
to any Track from 1 to 4.
To Copy an entire Song, specify “ALL”. This allows you to copy all the tracks
of the Song to another destination song.
From Bar
specifies the area of the source Song to copy from. You can
specify the start bar and end bar.
◆
If you are copying to another recorded Song, you can only copy all the bars
of the selected Track.
◆
You cannot specify the bars to copy if you are copying to an “empty” Song.
You can also copy to the same Song: for example, you can copy a repeating
sequence to a destination bar of the same song to save time. You can also specify
how many times the copy is to be copied.
Owner's Manual
Edit Sequencer
Sequencer
6-9
To Song
selects the destination Song (the Song to which the track will
be copied to). You can choose to copy to the same Song, to
another recorded Song or to an “empty” one.
To Track
selects the destination track (the track into which the data will
be copied).
To Bar
specifies the destination start bar (only if you are copying
within the same Song).
Copy mode.
selects the manner in which the data will be copied.
Replace:
the copied data substitutes the data already present at destination.
Merge:
the copied data is combined with the data already present at destination. You can use this application to copy, for example, a pattern of bongo drums
from one track to a pattern of toms and snare on another track.
If you are copying to the same track, you can only select Replace mode.
Copy Time.
specifies the number of source copies which will be copied
to the destination track.
To effect the Copy, press ENT.
The display will show a message that relates to the operation being performed.
If you are copying an entire Song to a recorded Song:
If you copy an entire Song to an empty Song:
If you copy a Track to a another:
If you press ESC, or COPY, you will return to the main display without effecting the
operation.
Owner's Manual
Edit Sequencer
6 - 10 Sequencer
MOVE
This function allows you to move all the events within a specified range of bars of a track
to another position within the same track:
Song
specifies the Song in which you wish to move events.
Track
determines which track to work on.
Bar
selects a range of data by specifying the bars within which the
data lies. You can also specify a single event.
Start Bar
selects the destination bar which will receive the moved data.
Press ENT to confirm the operation. “Are you sure?” appears, asking you to confirm the
operation definitely:
Press Esc if you want to abort the operation.
Use UNDO to restore the original status if you make a mistake.
If the recorded song does not contain a sufficient number or bars to accept the move, the
display will shows the following:
In such a case, use INSERT BARS to extend the number of bars and repeat the operation.
MOVE can be effective when you use it to compensate for sounds that have a slow attack.
For example, Strings often play with a slower attack rate than other sounds, such as
Piano, and will appear to be lagging behind even if the note on messages are simultaneous. In such a case, use Move to “shift” the Strings Song pointer a little earlier in time
so that the Strings sound begins to play slightly before other sounds, giving the
impression of perfect timing. This application requires that you select your range of
events and anticipate their entry with the Start Bar.
Owner's Manual
Edit Sequencer
Sequencer
6 - 11
ERASE
This operation erases all events of a specified type from a specified range of bars. You
can perform this operation on a Track, on the Master Track or you can Erase all the Song:
Song
specifies the Song from which events are being erased.
Track
selects the track to erase from.
You can choose from:
NOTE:
ERASE ALL provides
two options:
to Erase the Song only,
leaving intact the Song
Performance (or
Performances if others
are present),
OR,
to Erase the entire
Bank/Song - the Song
and all Performances leaving an EMPTY
BANK:
◆
1 - 16
◆
Master track (Songs and Song Styles)
◆
Chords Track (Songs and Song Styles)
◆
Lyrics (Song only)
◆
Score (Song only)
◆
All (the entire song)
Bar
determines the range of bars (start and end) from which the
specified events will be erased.
ERASE EVENTS
this edit zone allows you to specify a particular event to erase.
◆
If you are erasing from a Track, you can erase Note events, Pitch Bend data, Mono
Touch and Poly Touch data, Dynamic release data, Program Change data and
control data (from 0 to 127).
◆
If you are erasing from the Master Track (specified in the Track parameter), you
can specify a particular event or All.
◆
If you are erasing from the Chords track, you can only erase Chords.
◆
If you are erasing from the Lyrics track, you can only erase Lyrics.
◆
If you are erasing from the Score track, you can only erase the Score.
Press ENT to execute the operation.
Use UNDO to restore the original status if you make a mistake.
Press ESC or ERASE to leave the function without performing the operation.
NOTE:
You cannot erase indispensable information from the Master Track. The Master
Track always records the initial Tempo, the starting Performance and other vital
data at song point 1-1-1. You can modify these parameters but cannot erase them
at the starting position because they relate to indispensable information that
defines the song.
Owner's Manual
Edit Sequencer
6 - 12 Sequencer
INSERT/DELETE
INSERT
Insert allows you to insert as many “empty” bars into your Song from any starting point
(bar). You can also insert bars with a different Time signature.
Song
selects the Song to work on.
Bar
specifies the insertion point (the start bar).
Number of Bars
specifies the number of bars to insert.
Bar Time
specifies the Time Signature of the bars to be inserted. You
can use Insert to create a song with two (or more) different
time signatures.
Press ENT to confirm the operation.
Use UNDO to restore the original status if you make a mistake.
Press ESC or INS/DEL to leave the function without performing the operation.
Once inserted, you can record the inserted bars with the different time signature. Go into
Rec mode, specify the starting point and start recording with “Cont”. Record the inserted
bars and stop when you reach the end. You can also indicate the last bar to avoid recording
more than those specified using “Stop bar” in the Master Track.
DELETE
Press Page + to go to the Delete page.
The Delete operation cancels a specified number of bars from all the recorded tracks of
a Song starting at a specified point. All the bars that follow will move to fill the gap.
Song
selects the Song to work on.
Bar
specifies the point to delete from.
Number of Bars
specifies the number of bars to delete.
Press ENT to confirm the operation.
Use UNDO to restore the original status if you make a mistake.
Press ESC or INS/DEL to leave the function without performing the operation.
Owner's Manual
Edit Sequencer
6 - 13
Owner's Manual
6 - 14 Sequencer
DYNAMIC
Press PAGE + to go to the Dynamic page.
This operation modifies the velocity values (note on) in the specified area by the
specified intensity.
Song
Selects the Song to work on.
Track
Specifies the track in which to modify the velocities.
Bar
Specifies the first and last bar where the velocity modification will take place.
Mode
Specifies the mode in which the velocity modifications will
be effected.
Two options are available:
1.
Normal - adds or subtracts the specified value from the recorded values.
2.
Fixed - modifies all the recorded velocities to the specified value.
Change Dynamic
Specifies the amount by which the velocity values will
change.
Press ENT to confirm the operation.
Use UNDO to restore the original status if you make a mistake.
Press ESC or TRANSP to leave the function without performing the operation.
This is a great option if, for example, you want to open the Filters of a sound that is
sensitive to dynamic variations, otherwise not possible unless you repeat the recording
with the modified Sound.
Owner's Manual
Edit Sequencer
Sequencer
6 - 15
QUANTIZE
This operation corrects the timing of each event in the specified range to the nearest
interval (quantization) of the specified value.
How does Quantize
work?
The following diagram
shows how a track
recorded in real time
and played with
incorrect timing can be
corrected by quantizing
with the values 1/4 and
1/8.
Song
Selects the Song to work on.
Track
Specifies the track in which to Quantize the events.
Bar
Specifies the first and last bar to be quantized.
Note Quantize
Specifies the Quantize value.
This parameter determines the timing interval to which the
notes will be quantized.
You can select the values 1/4, 1/8, 1/12, 1/16, 1/12, 1/32, 1/
48, 1/64, 1/96 and Free.
The top line represents
an unquantized real
time recording of one
bar, showing events out
of time with respect to
the “grid” resolution of
1/16.
The second line shows
the same events
quantized with a value
of 1/4. The events are
shifted to the nearest
values.
The third line shows the
same events quantized
with a value of 1/8.
Note: Quantize does not
destroy recorded note
data.
Free returns tracks precisely to their real time recorded status, cancelling the
Quantize value used (if any).
Quantize “shifts” the notes to the nearest specified interval. For example, if the
shortest note value should be a 16th note, specify 1/16. Music that contains Triplets
requires Quantize values such as 1/12, 1/24 or 1/48.
Press ENT to confirm the operation.
Use UNDO to restore the original status if you make a mistake.
Press ESC or QUANT to leave the function without performing the operation.
Note: Quantize corrects Note On positions but the note lengths remain the same. Other
type of data is not affected by Quantize (e.g. control data, pitch bend, etc.).
Quantize Procedure in Record mode
1.
After recording a Track, press Quant.
2.
Select a quantize value and press ENT to execute the operation.
3.
Start the playback of the track and listen to the result.
4.
If the recording is not satisfactory, select a different Quantize value and confirm
again with ENT.
5.
Listen to the playback and continue confirming different values until the recording
is satisfactory.
Owner's Manual
Edit Sequencer
6 - 16 Sequencer
MICROSCOPE (Event Edit)
A single step of musical data is called an “event”. The Microscope Event Edit operations
permit you to modify, insert or delete individual events from the data in a Track. Insert
also allows you to insert Control Data not otherwise possible in Realtime record mode.
Since event edit allows direct access to sequence data, careless editing can modify your
recorded data so that it can no longer be restored to its original state. You are advised,
therefore, to use caution.
A description of the display elements shown:
Bar
song pointer which defines the position of the event.
Status
indicates the type of event recorded:
◆
◆
◆
◆
◆
◆
Note
Program Change
Pitch Bend
Controllers
Mono Touch
Poly Aftertouch
1V, 2V, 3V
these parameters assume values according to the type of
event shown in Status.
GT
indicates the note length (gate time). This parameter only
applies to the notes and is ignored by all other events.
Navigation
◆
Use the Cursor arrows to move up down and across the display.
◆
If you scroll with the Up/Down arrows, each note will be played.
◆
Use the Dial to modify the selected parameter
◆
Use the Toggle to access a parameter value and specify a new value using the keys
on the keyboard corresponding to the numbers 0 - 9.
When Status = Note:
1V specifies the note number with values C-1...G9.
If you rotate the Dial when the cursor is at the song pointer’s Bar location, you can
hear all the recorded notes in order of appearance.
If you rotate the Dial when the note number is selected, you can hear all the notes
selected.
Owner's Manual
Edit Sequencer
Sequencer
6 - 17
2V specifies the Key On velocity of the note in 1V with values 0... 127.
Perhaps you discover that you didn’t place enough emphasis one or two notes of
your recording. You can increase their respective Dynamic values to raise their
loudness.
If the sound of a track incorporates a dynamic switch, by modifying the dynamic
value you can switch from one sound level to the other.
3V specifies the Key Off velocity of the note in 1V with values 0... 127.
Some sounds have an incorporated sensitivity to variations in the Key Off
Envelope rate. Modifying this parameter affects this sound parameter only in cases
where the sound has a non-zero value for the Key off rate dynamic sensitivity
parameter.
GATE specifies the note length and takes the values 0... 65535.
The Gate parameter only applies to the notes.
In order to make it possible for a note to be held almost indefinitely WX has a very
high Gate time, equivalent to the possibility of holding down a note for approximately 85 bars (for a time signature of 4/4).
Considering that a quarter note has a sequencer resolution of 1/192, a whole note
consists of 192 x 4 = 768 units; 65535 ÷ 768 = 85,33 bars.
To move a note event:
1.
Select the Bar pointer and rotate the Dial to move the event to any song position.
2.
Select the Beat pointer and rotate the Dial to move an event within a bar.
3.
Select the sequencer resolution and rotate the Dial to move an event from one beat
resolution to another.
When Status = Program change:
1V specifies the first number of a Program change with values 1... 128 (normal or
extended Bank Select format).
Modify this value to specify a new Program change. You will most probably have
to modify the 2V value if you are working with Bank Select numbers.
2V specifies the second number of a Program change with values 1... 128 - second
program change number of the Bank Select format.
You can emit any value up to 127 for the second Program change number,
particularly useful if the track also transmits to an external MIDI device capable
of receiving Bank Select data.
For example, the external device could contain a sound with Program Change
number 6-46, unlike the WX Generation which has a maximum capacity of 6-3 for
the standard value 6.
3V does not apply.
Owner's Manual
Edit Sequencer
6 - 18 Sequencer
When Status = Control Change:
1V specifies a MIDI Controller number with values 0... 127.
1 = Modulation, 7 = Main Volume etc. - see Table III, MIDI CONTROLLERS,
Appendix B.
You can create Controller data at any point of the track using the Insert function
(see below) - you would then have to give a value for the 2V parameter to render
the controller effective.
2V specifies the data value of the Controller number with values 0... 127.
If, for example, the Controller events relate to Panorama changes (Controller 10)
carried out with a programmed Pedal, by adjusting the 2V value, you can alter the
Pan position of the track.
3V does not apply.
When Status = Bend:
1V specifies Pitch Bend data with values 0... 127 (LSB).
However, varying this first value of a Pitch Bend event will not affect the track.
You must intervene on the second value (2V) to produce a pitch variation. For the
Pitch Bend event, this first value corresponds to the Least Significant Byte and
normally takes the value “0”.
2V specifies the Pitch Bend excursion with values 0... 127 (MSB).
Adjusting this value modifies the Pitch Bend excursion; the “normal” value for
Pitch Bend (without effect) is 64, values above correspond to “positive” pitch
variations while those below relate to “negative” ones.
3V does not apply.
When Status = Mono Touch:
1V specifies the Mono Touch intensity with values 0... 127.
You could introduce this event to apply vibrato, for example, to all the notes played
at the specified song position.
Introduce the value 0 to deactivate the Mono Touch effect.
2V does not apply.
3V does not apply.
When Status = Poly Touch:
1V specifies the note to which Poly Aftertouch is applied with values A0... C8.
Here you can specify which note will be affected by a variation in the Aftertouch
value (effected in the 2V parameter). Introducing this event is very useful when
you want to apply an Aftertouch modification to a single note to “polish up” your
recording.
Owner's Manual
Edit Sequencer
Sequencer
6 - 19
2V specifies the value of the Aftertouch event applied to the note in 1V with values
0... 127.
For example, Aftertouch can add more or less Tremolo effect (if enabled) to a
sound.
Introduce the value 0 to deactivate the Poly Touch effect.
Note: WX does not create Poly Aftertouch events from the Keyboard. You can create
them manually with Insert or the events can be received at MIDI IN.
3V does not apply.
The Microscope functions
Three functions are available in the Microscope: MASK, INSERT and DELETE.
MASK
Hides specified events in order to simplify the process of
searching for particular data in order to modify it.
1.
Select the event to mask with the Up/Down cursor arrows.
2.
Press the Toggle to mask the event, shown by the disappearance of the
symbol “√”. Press the Toggle again to make the symbol re-appear.
3.
Press ENT to confirm the operation or ESC to escape the function.
INSERT
Note: you cannot insert
events in an “empty”
song.
If, for example, you
activate Song Edit and
access the Microscope
without at first
recording some events
in one or more tracks,
the insert option will
not allow you to insert
the displayed event.
An attempt to insert the
available event will
display the following
message:
Selects a type of MIDI event to insert. The event selected will
be created at the selected song pointer. You can use this
function to create Control data otherwise not possible with
the keyboard’s physical controllers.
1.
With the Right cursor arrow, select the Insert edit zone.
2.
Rotate the Dial to select the required event.
3.
Return to the Song pointer.
4.
Press INSERT (F6) to execute the event insertion.
5.
Modify the event according to your requirements.
DELETE
Cancels the data at the selected song position. The cancellation is immediate without the need to confirm with Enter.
In case you delete data accidentally, restore it with UNDO.
Owner's Manual
Edit Sequencer
6 - 20 Sequencer
NAME
This function allows you to give your recorded songs a name:
In the above display situation, the keyboard activates as an alphanumeric source.
Song mode allows you to specify:
Song File name
here you can enter an abbreviated name - this is the name that
will appear in the display and disk files;
Song Title
here you can enter the Song’s full title;
By
here you can specify the Song’s composer;
Ed
here you can specify the name of the group or body who own
the rights of the lyrics and Song.
Use the Up/Down cursor arrows to move from zone to zone.
Song Styles and Programmable Styles allow you to specify the Song File name only.
How to use the keyboard
The letters, the numbers and other symbols are silk-screened under the keyboard and they
are entered into the active zone by pressing the relative keys. The flashing cursor moves
one step to the right after each entry.
Several functions are provided on the extreme left side of the keyboard.
◆
Press “Shift” to write capital letters;
◆
Use “Space” to create a space;
◆
Use “Delete” to cancel the entry at the flashing cursor position;
◆
Use the arrow “left arrow” (<—) to cancel the last entry;
◆
Use the “back space” (§ ) to move the cursor backwards.
◆
Other symbols (apostrophe, comma, etc.) are located on the extreme right
side of the keyboard.
A File name consisting of up to 8 characters can be written.
All other name writing zones in Song mode allows up to 24 characters.
Press ENTER to confirm the name.
Press ESC to escape the function and cancel all entries.
Owner's Manual
Edit Sequencer
Sequencer
6 - 21
UNDO
Undo is of immense importance because it permits you to cancel a recorded sequence,
restore portions of a cancelled Song, restore a modified event setting before being
modified, etc..
It can be considered as a “note book” that follows you while you work, conserving data
that you might not want to throw away.
How to use UNDO
1.
If you want to cancel a recorded track or an event edit, press UNDO.
The following dialogue window is shown:
2.
Press ENTER to confirm UNDO or Exit to annul the operation.
3.
If you want to restore the Song cancelled by Undo, or the event modification, press
UNDO again.
4.
You can continue “undoing” your last Undo indefinitely, and so use this system
as a means of comparing one recorded situation with another.
UNDO and FREE MEMORY
With Undo “on” in Record mode, a memory buffer is activated which acts as a
“ghost copy” of the song memory - it occupies the same amount of RAM as the
recorded sequence.
You might also find that, while you are recording, you run out of memory, even
though the Free memory indicates the availability of RAM.
In such a case, you can deactivate Undo in order to reclaim the “ghost memory”
used up by this function.
Owner's Manual
Edit Sequencer
6 - 22 Sequencer
OPTION
This function gains access to User Program software loaded from floppy disks.
Generalmusic will implement new functions in the future which, not being able to exploit
the software of the machine, will require a special software the can be loaded with a User
Program.
For the moment, no user programs are available and your display will show the following
message when you press OPTION:
Press ESC to escape from the display.
Owner's Manual
Edit Sequencer
APPENDIX
WX ROM SOUNDS
WX ROM DRUMKITS
WX PERCUSSION SAMPLES
MIDI IMPLEMENTATION CHART
MIDI CONTROLLERS
WX SPECIFICATIONS
GLOSSARY
xx
The WX ROM Drumkits, resident in Banks 2
and 3 of the Drums family, have keymaps
which place the various percussion sounds
according to GENERAL MIDI Standard, as
well as other standards now in common use.
This will facilitate the passing of a Song from
one instrument to another without laborious
remappings. The following tables list the
sounds that correspond to each note, shown
every octave as the Note name (C2, C3, etc.)
as well as the MIDI Note Number ( 36, 48,
etc.). Where applicable, the same percussion
sounds with different tunings are shown with
H (high), M (middle) and L (low).
Owner's Manual
Appendix
i
WX ROM SOUND MAP (Families)
Piano
NOTE:
All Sounds marked with
an asterisk (*) correspond to "SINGLE
OSCILLATOR" Sounds
with 32 note polyphony.
Drumkits and Sound
Patch sounds are
marked with a cross (†).
Organ
WXGrandP*
BrtPiano
OctPiano
ElGrand1
ElGrand2
ElGrand3
Honky
DetPiano
Western
ElPiano1*
Rhodx†
ElPiano4*
ElPiano2*
ElPiano3
ElPiano5
Harpsi1*
Harpsi2*
Harpsi3*
Clavinet
SynClav
WowClav
1-1
2-1
2-3
3-1
3-2
3-3
4-1
4-2
4-3
5-1
5-2
5-3
6-1
6-2
6-3
7-1
7-2
7-3
8-1
8-2
8-3
Chrom Percussion
Celesta
CelestPlk*
CeleSynt
Glocken
SweepGlk
SweepPg
MusicBox
WineGls1
WineGls2
Vibes1*
Vibes2
SynVibes
Marimba1*
Marimba2
KissVibe
Xylophn1*
Xylophn2*
XyloPerc
TubBells*
SharpBell*
OohLalaa
Dulcimer
BarChime*
DrunkChs
Owner's Manual
9-1
9-2
9-3
10-1
10-2
10-3
11-1
11-2
11-3
12-1
12-2
12-3
13-1
13-2
13-3
14-1
14-2
14-3
15-1
15-2
15-3
16-1
16-2
16-3
TheatOrg
Organ1
Organ2
JazzOrg1
JazzOrg2
JazzOrg3
RockOrgn
SynOrg1
SynOrg2
PipeOrg1
PipeOrg3
Organ3
PipeOrg2
Organ4
Organ5
Accord1*
Accord2*
Accord3*
Harmon1*
Harmon2*
Harmon3*
Bandneo1
Bandneo2
OrganFlo
Bass
17-1
17-2
17-3
18-1
18-2
18-3
19-1
19-2
19-3
20-1
20-2
20-3
21-1
21-2
21-3
22-1
22-2
22-3
23-1
23-2
23-3
24-1
24-2
24-3
Guitar
NylGuit
SoloGtr
VocalGtr
SteelGtr
12StrGtr
HawaiGtr
JazzGtr1
JazzGtr2
OctGuit
ElectrGt
ChorusGt
BrightGt
MuteGtr1*
MuteGtr2*
DynGuit†
OverdGtr
WhaGtr1
WhaGtr2
DistGtr1
DistGtr2
HeavyGt
HarmGtr1
HarmGtr2
HarmGtr3
AcoBass1
AcoBass2
AcoBass3
ElecBass
DynBass1†
FmBass
PckBass1*
DynBass2†
PckBass2
Fretless
SynFrtl*
AcidBas1
SlapBas1
DynBass3†
AcidBas2
SlapBas2
WxBass
StoBass
SynBas1
SynBas3
SynBas5
SynBas2
SynBas4
SynBas6
33-1
33-2
33-3
34-1
34-2
34-3
35-1
35-2
35-3
36-1
36-2
36-3
37-1
37-2
37-3
38-1
38-2
38-3
39-1
39-2
39-3
40-1
40-2
40-3
String
25-1
25-2
25-3
26-1
26-2
26-3
27-1
27-2
27-3
28-1
28-2
28-3
29-1
29-2
29-3
30-1
30-2
30-3
31-1
31-2
31-3
32-1
32-2
32-3
Violin1*
Violin2*
Violin3*
Viola1
Viola2
ViolaPad
Cello1*
Cello2*
Cello3*
ContrBas*
ContrWha*
Staccato
Tremolo1
Tremolo2
SynTrem
PizzStr1*
PizzStr2
EchoPizz*
Harp
PulsHarp
SpaceHar
Timpani*
TalkTimp*
DynOrch†
41-1
41-2
41-3
42-1
42-2
42-3
43-1
43-2
43-3
44-1
44-2
44-3
45-1
45-2
45-3
46-1
46-2
46-3
47-1
47-2
47-3
48-1
48-2
48-3
Appendix
ii
Ensemble
NOTE:
All Sounds marked with
an asterisk (*) correspond to "SINGLE
OSCILLATOR" Sounds
with 32 note polyphony.
Drumkits and Sound
Patch sounds are
marked with a cross (†).
Strings1
StrGlock
PanGlock
Strings2
OrchStrg
SynStrg
SynStrg1
SynStrg3
SynStrg5
SynStrg2
SynStrg4
Strings3
Choir
VoiceUuh
SlowUuh
VoiceOoh
VoiceAah
SlowAah
SyntVox1
SyntVox2
Vocoder
OrchHit†
Symphony
SymphOrc
Reed
49-1
49-2
49-3
50-1
50-2
50-3
51-1
51-2
51-3
52-1
52-2
53-3
53-1
53-2
53-3
54-1
54-2
54-3
55-1
55-2
55-3
56-1
56-2
56-3
Brass
Trumpet*
FlugeHor*
MuteHorn
Trombon1*
Trombon2
WowTromb
Tuba
ShorTuba
WowTuba
MuteTrp1*
MuteTrp2
DynTrump†
FrenHorn*
BrassRip*
BrassTrp
Brass1
Brass2
Brass3
SynBras1
SynBras2
SyntHorn
TotoHorn
SlowHorn
AttkHorn
Owner's Manual
SoprSax*
SoprSolo*
SoprFilt*
SoftSax*
SoftSolo*
SoftFilt*
TenorSax*
TenSolo*
TenFilt*
BaritSax*
BaritDet
BaritFilt*
Oboe*
OboeSolo*
OboeFilt*
EnglHorn*
EnglSolo
HornFilt
Bassoon*
BassnSol*
Bassooft*
Clarinet*
ClarSolo*
ClarFilt*
Synth Lead
65-1
65-2
65-3
66-1
66-2
66-3
67-1
67-2
67-3
68-1
68-2
68-3
69-1
69-2
69-3
70-1
70-2
70-3
71-1
71-2
71-3
72-1
72-2
72-3
Pipe
57-1
57-2
57-3
58-1
58-2
58-3
59-1
59-2
59-3
60-1
60-2
60-3
61-1
61-2
61-3
62-1
62-2
62-3
63-1
63-2
63-3
64-1
64-2
64-3
Piccolo
HardFlt1
HardFlt2
Flute*
DynFlut1†
DynFlut2†
Record1
Record 2
Bubbler
PanFlut1*
PanFlut2
DynPan†
Bottle1*
Bottle2
Tube*
Shakuhac
ShakuPad
ShakuOoo
Whistle1*
Whistle2
Whistle3
Ocarina
OcaPan
OcaSynth
Pulse1
Pulse2
Pulse3*
OBFilter
Sinus
Lyle
Arp26000
Azimut
SynLead1
Chopper
Digital
SynLead2
Jump
SoundTrk
Analogic
FiltRes1
FiltRes2
Slope
Decay1
Decay2
Decay3
OBX1
OBX2
OBX3
81-1
81-2
81-3
82-1
82-2
82-3
83-1
83-2
83-3
84-1
84-2
84-3
85-1
85-2
85-3
86-1
86-2
86-3
87-1
87-2
87-3
88-1
88-2
88-3
Synth Pad
73-1
73-2
73-3
74-1
74-2
74-3
75-1
75-2
75-3
76-1
76-2
76-3
77-1
77-2
77-3
78-1
78-2
78-3
79-1
79-2
79-3
80-1
80-2
80-3
NewAge
PPG
Machiner
WarmPad
WaveAura
AnlgPad
Fantasy1
Fantasy2
Fantasy3
VocBells
OcBreat
Angels
Prophet1
Prophet2
Prophet3
Bright1
Bright2
Bright3
Slave
Atmosphe
Airline
Waiting
BudWeis
Tibet
89-1
89-2
89-3
90-1
90-2
90-3
91-1
91-2
91-3
92-1
92-2
92-3
93-1
93-2
93-3
94-1
94-2
94-3
95-1
95-2
95-3
96-1
96-2
96-3
Appendix
iii
Synth Effects
NOTE:
All Sounds marked with
an asterisk (*) correspond to "SINGLE
OSCILLATOR" Sounds
with 32 note polyphony.
Drumkits and Sound
Patch sounds are
marked with a cross (†).
NoiseRes
Submarin
BigRoom
MoonWind
SynRain
EkoEndls
Wind
Jets
Sprinklr
Shot1
Shot2
Smak
Resonanc
WithGas
On/Off
NGravity
Popup
UnderWat
Synthex1
Synthex2
Synthex3
Synthex4
Synthex5
Synthex6
97-1
97-2
97-3
98-1
98-2
98-3
99-1
99-2
99-3
100-1
100-2
100-3
101-1
101-2
101-3
102-1
102-2
102-3
103-1
103-2
103-3
104-1
104-2
104-6
Ethnic
Sitar
SynSitar
Banjo
Shamisen
SynSham
Kanoun
Koto
TrptClar†
Kalimba
SaxTrump†
BagPipe
BrassEns†
Fiddle
Shanai
105-1
105-3
106-1
107-1
107-3
108-1
108-2
108-3
109-1
109-3
110-1
110-3
111-1
112-1
Drums
Bells
DKStand1†
DKStand2†
Drop
Water
Voice1
Voice2
Voice3
VoxHhCl
VoxTap
VoxTip
CarHorn
Dooor
RaspRide
113-1
113-2
113-3
113-4
113-5
113-6
113-7
113-8
113-9
113-10
113-11
113-12
113-13
113-14
Owner's Manual
BabyVox
DollyVox
Agogo
DKRoom1†
DKRoom2†
Kitchen
LogDrum
NoisePerc
CongAccn
Conga
CongaSlap
CowBell
Bongos
DarbukHi
DarbukLo
Guiro
QuicaHig
QuicaLow
Steel
DKPower1†
DKPower2†
VibrSlap
Castanet
Tambourn
Tambales
Cabasa
BDElet
BDGate
BDHard
BDJazz
BDDrum1
BDDrum2
HardKick
Snap1
Woodblk
DKElect1†
DKElect2†
Snap
SnrDrum1
SnrDrum2
SnDRim1
SnDRim2
ConcSnDr
RimShot
SDElet1
SDElet2
SDBrush1
SDBrush2
BrushLng
Brush
Taiko
DKHouse1†
DKHouse2†
Roll
SyntSnDr
SnDrGate
Tom
GatedTom
113-15
113-16
114-1
114-2
114-3
114-4
114-5
114-6
114-7
114-8
114-9
114-10
114-11
114-12
114-13
114-14
114-15
144-16
115-1
115-2
115-3
115-4
115-5
115-6
115-7
115-8
115-9
115-10
115-11
115-12
115-13
115-14
115-15
115-16
116-1
116-2
116-3
116-4
116-5
116-6
116-7
116-8
116-9
116-10
116-11
116-12
116-13
116-14
116-15
116-16
117-1
117-2
117-3
117-4
117-5
117-6
117-7
117-8
Empty
HouseBD
HouseSD
HousHHat
HousRide
HousClap
HHClose1
HHOpen1
TomSolo
DKJazz†
DKM1†
HHClose2
HHOpen2
HHPedal
Ride
RideCup
Crash
China
Splash
TrianLng
TrianShr
Stick
Claves
GrndTimp
SynDrum
DKBrush†
DKSY77†
WhaWha1
WhaWha2
WhaWha3
WhaWha4
Scratch2
Scratch3
StringTp
BrasCymb
RevCymb
DKOrch†
DKWS2†
117-9
117-10
117-11
117-12
117-13
117-14
117-15
117-16
118-1
118-2
118-3
118-4
118-5
118-6
118-7
118-8
118-9
118-10
118-11
118-12
118-13
118-14
118-15
118-16
119-1
119-2
119-3
119-4
119-5
119-6
119-7
119-8
119-9
119-10
119-11
120-1
120-2
120-3
Samples
GtFreet*
GtWhaWha*
Breath*
Zapp*
SeaShore*
TickTack*
Birds
Scratch1*
Telephn1*
Telephn2*
Helicopt
SynPerc1
Applause
SynPerc2
GunShot*
SynPerc3
121-1
121-2
122-1
112-2
123-1
123-2
123-1
124-2
125-1
125-2
126-1
126-2
127-1
127-2
128-1
128-2
Appendix
iv
THE WX ROM DRUMKITS
DKStand1
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Door
Vox Tip
Voice 1
Darbuklo
Castanet
Vox HiHat Closed
Triangle Short
Quica Hi
Claves
Guiro Hi
Snap 1
Agogo Low
Timbale Low
Conga Hi
Bongos Low
Vibraslap
Cowbell
Tambourine
RideHi
CrashHi
HiHat Open1
HiHat Closed 2
HiHat Closed 1
HouseClap
RimShot
BabyVox
Bass Drum Elec
Scratch1Hi
ZappHi
ZappLow
China
DKStand2
C8 Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
C7 BabyVox
Raspyride
Carhorn
Vox Tap
Water
Drop
Darbukhi
C6 Barchime
Celesta
Triangle Long
Quica Low
Woodblock Low
Woodblock Hi
Guiro Low
C5 Whistle 1 Low
Whistle 1 Hi
Cabasa
Agogo Hi
Timbale Hi
Conga Low
Conga Accnt
C4 Bongos Hi
Ride Low
Crash Low
Splash
Ride Cup
China
Tom Hi
C3 Grand Timp Hi
Tom Med
Grand Timp Med
Tom Low
Grand Timp Low
Snare Drum Rim1
Snare Drum 1
C2 Bass Drum 1
Bass Drum2
RimShot
Stick
Scratch1Low
Kitchen
ZappMed
C1 Roll
Crash
A0 Applause
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Door
Vox Tip
Voice 1
Darbuklo
Castanet
Vox HiHat Closed
Triang Short
Quica Hi
Claves
Guiro Hi
Snap 1
Agogo Low
Timbale Low
Conga Hi
Bongos Low
Vibraslap
Cowbell
Tambourine
RideHi
CrashHi
HiHat Open 2
HiHat Pedal
HiHat Closed 2
HouseClap
RimShot
BabyVox
Bass Drum Elec
Scratch1Hi
ZappHi
ZappLow
WX2 Extension 61 keys
China
C8 Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
C7 BabyVox
Raspyride
Carhorn
Vox Tap
Water
Drop
Darbukhi
C6 Barchime
Celesta
Triangle Long
Quica Low
Woodblock Low
Woodblock Hi
Guiro Low
C5 Whistle 1 Low
Whistle 1 Hi
Cabasa
Agogo Hi
Timbale Hi
Conga Low
Conga Accnt
C4 Bongos Hi
Ride Low
Crash Low
Splash
Ride Cup
China
Tom Solo
C3 Tom Solo
Tom Solo
Tom Solo
Tom Solo
Tom Solo
SnareDrRim1
Concert SnareDr 1
C2 Bass Drum 1
Bass Drum 1
RimShot
Stick
Scratch1Low
Kitchen
ZappMed
C1 Roll
Crash
A0 Applause
WX400 Extension 88 keys
Owner's Manual
Appendix
Rom Drumkits
DKRoom1
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Door
Vox Tip
Voice 1
Darbuklo
Castanet
Vox HiHat Closed
Triang Short
Quica Hi
Claves
Guiro Hi
Snap 1
Agogo Low
Timbale Low
Conga Hi
Bongos Low
Vibraslap
Cowbell
Tambourine
RideHi
CrashHi
HiHat Open 1
HiHat Closed 2
HiHat Closed 1
HouseClap
RimShot
BabyVox
Bass Drum Elec
Scratch1Hi
ZappHi
ZappLow
China
C8 Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
C7 BabyVox
Raspyride
Carhorn
Vox Tap
Water
Drop
Darbukhi
C6 Barchime
Celesta
Triangle Long
Quica Low
Woodblock Low
Woodblock Hi
Guiro Low
C5 Whistle 1 Low
Whistle 1 Hi
Cabasa
Agogo Hi
Timbale Hi
Conga Low
Conga Accnt
C4 Bongos Hi
Ride Low
Crash Low
Splash
Ride Cup
China
Tom Solo
C3 Tom Solo
Tom Solo
Tom Solo
Tom Solo
Tom Solo
Snare Drum Rim 2
SnareDrum Rim 1
C2 Bass Drum 2
Bass Drum 1
RimShot
Stick
Scratch1Low
Kitchen
ZappMed
C1 Roll
Crash
A0 Applause
Owner's Manual
v
DKRoom2
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Door
Vox Tip
Voice 1
Darbuklo
Castanet
Vox HiHat Closed
Triang Short
Quica Hi
Claves
Guiro Hi
Snap 1
Agogo Low
Timbale Low
Conga Hi
Bongos Low
Vibraslap
Cowbell
Tambourine
RideHi
CrashHi
HiHat Open 2
HiHat Pedal
HiHat Closed 2
HouseClap
RimShot
BabyVox
Bass Drum Elec
Scratch1Hi
ZappHi
ZappLow
China
C8 Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
C7 BabyVox
Raspyride
Carhorn
Vox Tap
Water
Drop
Darbukhi
C6 Barchime
Celesta
Triangle Long
Quica Low
Woodblock Low
Woodblock Hi
Guiro Low
C5 Whistle 1 Low
Whistle 1 Hi
Cabasa
Agogo Hi
Timbale Hi
Conga Low
Conga Accnt
C4 Bongos Hi
Ride Low
Crash Low
Splash
Ride Cup
China
Tom Solo
C3 Tom Solo
Tom Solo
Tom Solo
Grand Timpani
Grand Timpani
Snare Drum Gate
Concert Snare Drum
C2 Bass Drum Hard
Bass Drum 1
RimShot
Stick
Scratch1Low
Kitchen
ZappMed
C1 Roll
Crash
A0 Applause
Appendix
vi
DKPower1
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Door
Vox Tip
Voice 1
Darbuklo
Castanet
Vox HiHat Closed
Triang Short
Quica Hi
Claves
Guiro Hi
Snap 1
Agogo Low
Timbale Low
Conga Hi
Bongos Low
Vibraslap
Cowbell
Tambourine
RideHi
CrashHi
HiHat Open1
HiHat Closed 2
HiHat Closed 1
HouseClap
RimShot
BabyVox
Bass Drum Elec
Scratch1Hi
ZappHi
ZappLow
China
C8 Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
C7 BabyVox
Raspyride
Carhorn
Vox Tap
Water
Drop
Darbukhi
C6 Barchime
Celesta
Triangle Long
Quica Low
Woodblock Low
Woodblock Hi
Guiro Low
C5 Whistle 1 Low
Whistle 1 Hi
Cabasa
Agogo Hi
Timbale Hi
Conga Low
Conga Accnt
C4 Bongos Hi
Ride Low
Crash Low
Splash
Ride Cup
China
Gated Tom
C3 Gated Tom
Gated Tom
Gated Tom
Gated Tom
Gated Tom
Concert SnareDrum
SnareDrum Gate
C2 Hard Kick
Bass Drum 2
RimShot
Stick
Scratch1Low
Kitchen
ZappMed
C1 Roll
Crash
A0 Applause
Owner's Manual
DKPower2
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Door
Vox Tip
Voice 1
Darbuklo
Castanet
Vox HiHat Closed
Triang Short
Quica Hi
Claves
Guiro Hi
Snap 1
Agogo Low
Timbale Low
Conga Hi
Bongos Low
Vibraslap
Cowbell
Tambourine
RideHi
CrashHi
HiHat Open2
HiHat Pedal
HiHat Closed 2
HouseClap
RimShot
BabyVox
Bass Drum Elec
Scratch1Hi
ZappHi
ZappLow
China
C8 Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
C7 BabyVox
Raspyride
Carhorn
Vox Tap
Water
Drop
Darbukhi
C6 Barchime
Celesta
Triangle Long
Quica Low
Woodblock Low
Woodblock Hi
Guiro Low
C5 Whistle 1 Low
Whistle 1 Hi
Cabasa
Agogo Hi
Timbale Hi
Conga Low
Conga Accnt
C4 Bongos Hi
Ride Low
Crash Low
Splash
Ride Cup
China
Gated Tom
C3 Gated Tom
Gated Tom
Gated Tom
Gated Tom
Gated Tom
Snare Drum Elect 2
Snare Drum Elect 1
C2 Bass Drum Gate
Bass Drum 2
RimShot
Stick
Scratch1Low
Kitchen
ZappMed
C1 Roll
Crash
A0 Applause
Appendix
vii
DKElectric1
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Door
Vox Tip
Voice 1
Darbuklo
Castanet
Vox HiHat Closed
Triang Short
Quica Hi
Claves
Guiro Hi
Snap 1
Agogo Low
Timbale Low
Conga Hi
Bongos Low
Vibraslap
Cowbell
Tambourine
RideHi
CrashHi
HiHat Open 1
HiHat Closed 2
HiHat Closed 1
HouseClap
RimShot
BabyVox
Bass Drum Elec
Scratch1Hi
ZappHi
ZappLow
China
C8 Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
C7 BabyVox
Raspyride
Carhorn
Vox Tap
Water
Drop
Darbukhi
C6 Barchime
Celesta
Triangle Long
Quica Low
Woodblock Low
Woodblock Hi
Guiro Low
C5 Whistle 1 Low
Whistle 1 Hi
Cabasa
Agogo Hi
Timbale Hi
Conga Low
Conga Accnt
C4 Bongos Hi
Ride Low
Crash Low
Splash
Ride Cup
Reverse Cymbal
Synthetic Drum
C3 Synthetic Drum
Synthetic Drum
Synthetic Drum
Synthetic Drum
Synthetic Drum
Snare Drum Gate
Snare Drum Elect 1
C2 Hard Kick
Bass Drum 1
RimShot
Stick
Scratch1Low
Kitchen
ZappMed
C1 Roll
Crash
A0 Applause
Owner's Manual
DKElectric2
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Door
Vox Tip
Voice 1
Darbuklo
Castanet
Vox HiHat Closed
Triang Short
Quica Hi
Claves
Guiro Hi
Snap 1
Agogo Low
Timbale Low
Conga Hi
Bongos Low
Vibraslap
Cowbell
Tambourine
RideHi
CrashHi
House Ride
House Hat
House Hat
HouseClap
RimShot
BabyVox
Bass Drum Elec
Scratch1Hi
ZappHi
ZappLow
China
C8
C8 Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
C7 BabyVox
Raspyride
Carhorn
Vox Tap
Water
Drop
Darbukhi
C6 Barchime
Celesta
Triangle Long
Quica Low
Woodblock Low
Woodblock Hi
Guiro Low
C5 Whistle 1 Low
Whistle 1 Hi
Cabasa
Agogo Hi
Timbale Hi
Conga Low
Conga Accnt
C4 Bongos Hi
Ride Low
Crash Low
Splash
Ride Cup
China
Synthetic Drum
C3 Synthetic Drum
Synthetic Drum
Synthetic Drum
Synthetic Drum
Synthetic Drum
Synthetic Snare Drum
Snare Drum 1
C2 Bass Drum Electric
Bass Drum 1
RimShot
Stick
Scratch1Low
Kitchen
ZappMed
C1
C1 Roll
Crash
A0 Applause
Appendix
viii
DKHouse1
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Door
Vox Tip
Voice 1
Darbuklo
Castanet
Vox HiHat Closed
Triang Short
Quica Hi
Claves
Guiro Hi
Snap 1
Agogo Low
Timbale Low
Conga Hi
Bongos Low
Vibraslap
Cowbell
Tambourine
RideHi
CrashHi
House Ride
House Hat
House Hat
HouseClap
Snare Drum Elect 1
BabyVox
Bass Drum Elec
Scratch1Hi
ZappHi
ZappLow
China
C8 Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
C7 BabyVox
Raspyride
Carhorn
Vox Tap
Water
Drop
Darbukhi
C6 Barchime
Celesta
Triangle Long
Quica Low
Woodblock Low
Woodblock Hi
Guiro Low
C5 Whistle 1 Low
Whistle 1 Hi
Cabasa
Agogo Hi
Timbale Hi
Conga Low
Conga Accnt
C4 Bongos Hi
Ride Low
Crash Low
Splash
Ride Cup
China
House Bass Drum
C3 House Bass Drum
House Bass Drum
House Bass Drum
House Bass Drum
House Bass Drum
Concert Snare Drum
House Snare Drum
C2 House Bass Drum
Bass Drum 2
RimShot
Stick
Scratch1Low
Kitchen
ZappMed
C1 Roll
Crash
A0 Applause
Owner's Manual
DKHouse2
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Door
Vox Tip
Voice 1
Darbuklo
Castanet
Vox HiHat Closed
Triang Short
Quica Hi
Claves
Guiro Hi
Snap 1
Agogo Low
Timbale Low
Conga Hi
Bongos Low
Vibraslap
Cowbell
Tambourine
RideHi
CrashHi
HiHat Open 1
HiHat Closed 2
HiHat Closed 1
HouseClap
RimShot
BabyVox
Bass Drum Elec
Scratch1Hi
ZappHi
ZappLow
China
C8 Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
C7 BabyVox
Raspyride
Carhorn
Vox Tap
Water
Drop
Darbukhi
C6 Barchime
Celesta
Triangle Long
Quica Low
Woodblock Low
Woodblock Hi
Guiro Low
C5 Whistle 1 Low
Whistle 1 Hi
Cabasa
Agogo Hi
Timbale Hi
Conga Low
Conga Accnt
C4 Bongos Hi
Ride Low
Crash Low
Splash
Ride Cup
China
Synthetic Drum
C3 Synthetic Drum
Synthetic Drum
Synthetic Drum
Synthetic Drum
Synthetic Drum
Snare Drum Rim 1
Snare Drum Brush 2
C2 Bass Drum Electric
Bass Drum 1
RimShot
Stick
Scratch1Low
Kitchen
ZappMed
C1 Roll
Crash
A0 Applause
Appendix
ix
DKM1
DKJazz
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Door
Vox Tip
Voice 1
Darbuklo
Castanet
Vox HiHat Closed
Triang Short
Quica Hi
Claves
Guiro Hi
Snap 1
Agogo Low
Timbale Low
Conga Hi
Bongos Low
Vibraslap
Cowbell
Tambourine
RideHi
CrashHi
HiHat Open 2
HiHat Pedal
HiHat Closed 2
HouseClap
RimShot
BabyVox
Bass Drum Elec
Scratch1Hi
ZappHi
ZappLow
China
C8 Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
C7 BabyVox
Raspyride
Carhorn
Vox Tap
Water
Drop
Darbukhi
C6 Barchime
Celesta
Triangle Long
Quica Low
Woodblock Low
Woodblock Hi
Guiro Low
C5 Whistle 1 Low
Whistle 1 Hi
Cabasa
Agogo Hi
Timbale Hi
Conga Low
Conga Accnt
C4 Bongos Hi
Ride Low
Crash Low
Splash
Ride Cup
China
Tom
C3 Grand Timpani
Tom
Grand Timpani
Tom
Grand Timpani
Snare Drum Brush 2
Snare Drum Brush 1
C2 Bass Drum Jazz
Bass Drum2
RimShot
Stick
Scratch1Low
Kitchen
ZappMed
C1 Roll
Crash
A0 Applause
Owner's Manual
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
C8 Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
C7 Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
C6 Empty
Roll
Raspy Ride
Niose Percussion
Timbales
Timbales
C5
Darbukhi
Bongos
House Clap
Ride Cup
China
C4
Tambourine
House Ride
House Hat
Gated Tom
Gated Tom
C3
RimShot
House Snare Drum
Snare Drum 1
House Bass Drum
Bass Drum Hard
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
C2
Concert Snare Drum
Snare Drum Rim 2
Door
Noise Percussion
Triangle Long
Triangle Short
Conga
Conga
Darbuklo
Bongos
Vox Hi Hat Closed
Cabasa
Ride
Crash
House Hat
Hi Hat Open 1
Hi Hat Pedal
Hi Hat Closed 1
Tom
Tom
Tom
Snare Drum Gate
Snare Drum Electric 1
Snare Drum Rim 1
Snare Drum 2
Bass Drum Gate
Bass Drum Electric
Bass Drum 1
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
C1 Empty
Empty
A0 Empty
Appendix
x
DKBrush
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Door
Vox Tip
Voice 1
Darbuklo
Castanet
Vox HiHat Closed
Triang Short
Quica Hi
Claves
Guiro Hi
Snap 1
Agogo Low
Timbale Low
Conga Hi
Bongos Low
Vibraslap
Cowbell
Tambourine
RideHi
CrashHi
HiHat Open 1
HiHat Closed 2
HiHat Closed 1
Snare Drum Brush 1
RimShot
BabyVox
Bass Drum Elec
Scratch1Hi
ZappHi
ZappLow
China
C8 Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
C7 BabyVox
Raspyride
Carhorn
Vox Tap
Water
Drop
Darbukhi
C6 Barchime
Celesta
Triangle Long
Quica Low
Woodblock Low
Woodblock Hi
Guiro Low
C5 Whistle 1 Low
Whistle 1 Hi
Cabasa
Agogo Hi
Timbale Hi
Conga Low
Conga Accnt
C4 Bongos Hi
Ride Low
Crash Low
Splash
Ride Cup
China
Tom
C3 Grand Timpani
Tom
Grand Timpani
Tom
Grand Timpani
Brush Long
Brush
C2 Bass Drum 1
Bass Drum2
RimShot
Stick
Scratch1Low
Kitchen
ZappMed
C1 Roll
Crash
A0 Applause
Owner's Manual
DKSY77
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Voice 1
Voice 1
Voice 1
Voice 1
Voice 1
Voice 1
Voice 1
Voice 1
Voice 1
Vibraslap
Darbukhi
Kitchen
Tubular Bells
Ride Cup
Roll
Tambourine
Cabasa
House Clap
RimShot
Snare Drum Rim 1
Snare Drum 2
House Bass Drum
Tom
Bass Drum Gate
Bass Drum Hard
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
C8 Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
C7 Empty
Voice 1
Voice 1
Voice 1
Voice 1
Voice 1
Voice 1
C6 Voice 1
Voice 1
Voice 1
Voice 1
Voice 1
Voice 1
Voice 1
C5 Bottle 1
Bottle 1
Darbuklo
Kitchen
Tubular Bells
Tubular Bells
Ride
C4 Crash
Hi Hat Open 1
Hi Hat Closed 1
Cow Bell
Gated Tom
Snare Drum Electric 1
Gated Tom
C3 Gated Tom
Gated Tom
Bass Drum 2
Tom
Tom
Tom
Bass Drum Electric
C2 Bass Drum 1
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
C1 Empty
Empty
A0 Empty
Appendix
xi
DKOrch
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Door
Vox Tip
Voice 1
Darbuklo
Castanet
Vox HiHat Closed
Triangle Short
Quica Hi
Claves
Guiro Hi
Snap 1
Agogo Low
Timbale Low
Conga Hi
Bongos Low
Vibraslap
Cowbell
Tambourine
Timpani
Timpani
Timpani
Timpani
Timpani
Castanet
RimShot
BabyVox
Bass Drum Elec
Scratch1Hi
ZappHi
ZappLow
China
C8 Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
C7 BabyVox
Raspyride
Carhorn
Vox Tap
Water
Applause
Darbukhi
C6 Barchime
Celesta
Triangle Long
Quica Low
Woodblock Low
Woodblock Hi
Guiro Low
C5 Whistle 1 Low
Whistle 1 Hi
Cabasa
Agogo Hi
Timbale Hi
Conga Low
Conga Accnt
C4 Bongos Hi
Ride Low
Crash Low
Splash
Timpani
Timpani
Timpani
C3 Timpani
Timpani
Timpani
Timpani
Timpani
Snare Drum Rim1
Snare Drum Rim1
C2 Timpani
Bass Drum2
RimShot
Stick
Scratch1Low
Kitchen
ZappMed
C1 Roll
Crash
A0 Applause
Owner's Manual
DKWS2
C8
C7
Vox Tap
Vox HiHat Closed2
Vox HiHat Closed1
Voice 1
Noise Perc
C6
Triangle Long
Timbale Low
Quica Low
Conga Accent
Bongo Low
C5
China
Crash
Splash
Ride Cup
Ride
C4
HiHat Open
HiHat Pedal
HiHat Closed1
Brush
Brush Long
C3
Cowbell
Tambourine
Cabasa
Snare Drum Rim2
SnareDr Elet2
C2
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
C1
A0
DollyVox
Carhorn
Vox Tip
Voice 2 Hi
Voice 2 Low
Voice 3
House Side Drum
House Bass Drum
Whistle 1
Agogo
Timbale Hi
Guiro
Conga Low
Conga Slap
Bongo Hi
Snap 1
Vibraslap
Gated Tom Low
Gated Tom Med
Gated Tom Hi
Snare Drum 2
Bass Drum 1
House Clap
Woodblock
Tom Low
Tom Med
Tom Hi
Snare Drum Brush1
Bass Drum Jazz
Rimshot
Tom Solo Low
Tom Solo Med2
Tom Solo Med1
Tom Solo Hi
SnareDr Elet1
Bass Drum Gate
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Empty
Appendix
xii
PERCUSSION SAMPLES
This Table lists the note or notes
that provide the most optimum
timbres of the percussion Samples
memorised in ROM.
Each Percussion Sample was
sampled on a definite note, and on
that particular note, the percussion
sound will appear to sound more
realistic. As you move away from
the sample note, the Sample will
assume different characteristics and
the quality will gradually decay.
The use of some Samples on different notes can be useful in cases
where certain instruments, such as
Toms and Cymbals, require tuning,
or with percussion sounds of synthetic origin (Door, Logdrum,
Noise_Perc and others).
In a Drumkit, Samples are transposed until they arrive at the optimum Sample note, or the most
suitable note to obtain a particular
effect.
Timpani
Whistle_1
Drop
Water
Voice_1
Voice_2
Voice_3
Vox_HH_Cl
Vox_Tap
Vox_Tip
Car_Horn
Door
Raspy_Ride
Baby_Vox
Dolly_Vox
Kitchen
Logdrum
Noise_Perc
Agogo
Conga_Acc
Conga
Conga_Slap
Cowbell
Bongos
Darbuka_Hi
DarbukaLow
Guiro
Quica_High)
Quica_Low
Vibraslap
Castanets
Tambourine
Timbales
Cabasa
Bdrum_Elet
Bdrum_Gate
Bdrum_Hard
Bdrum_Jazz
Bass_Drum1
Owner's Manual
E4
E4
G4
E4
E4
E4
E4
E5
C4
C4
C4
G4
G4
E4
C4
E4
C4
C5
G4-C5
E4
C4
E4
G4
G4-C5
E4
C4
E4
C4
C4
E4
E4
C5
E4
E5
B4
E4
E4
E4
E4
Bass_Drum2
Woodblock
Claves
Fingersnap
Stick
Snr_Drum1
Snr_Drum2
Sdrum_Rim1
Sdrum_Rim2
Concert_Sd
Rimshot
Snare_El_1
Snare_El_2
Sd_Brush_1
Sd_Brush_2
Brush_Long
Brush
Roll
SynthSnare
Tom
Gated_Tom
Tom_Room
HouseBdrum
HouseSdrum
House_Hhat
House_Ride
House_Clap
Hh_Closed1
Hh_Open_1
Hh_Closed_2
Hh_Open_2
Hh_Pedal
Ride
Ride_Cup
Crash
China
Splash
Trian_Long
TrianShort
C4
C4
C4
E5
E4
E5
E5
C5
E5
B4
C4
G4
G4
E4
E4
C4
C5
E4
E4
E4
G4
E4
C4
E4
E5
E5
C4
E5
E5
E5
E5
E5
E5
E5
E5
E5
E5
E5
E5
Appendix
xiii
MIDI Implementation Chart
MANUFACTURER:
Generalmusic Spa
FUNCTION
Transmitted
Recognised
Basic
Channel
Default
Changed
1-16
1-16
1-16
1-16
Mode
Default
Messages
Altered
Mode 3
X
**********
Mode 3
X
X
Note
Number
0-127
**********
0-127
True Voice
Velocity
Note ON
Note OFF
O
O
O
O
After
Touch
Key's
Ch
X
O
O
O
O
O
Pitch Bender
Control
Change
Program
Change
0
1
4
7
10
11
12
13
14
15
20
64
66
67
Bank Change
Modulation
Foot Controller
Volume
Pan
Expression controller
Attack time
Release time
Filter 1 cutoff freq.
Filter 2 cutoff freq.
Filter 1+2 cutoff freq.
Damper pedal
Sostenuto
Soft pedal
0 Bank Change
1 Modulation
4 Foot Controller
7 Volume
10 Pan
11 Expression controller
12 Attack time
13 Release time
14 Filter 1 cutoff freq.
15 Filter 2 cutoff freq.
20 Filter 1+2 cutoff freq.
64 Damper pedal
66 Sostenuto
67 Soft pedal
70† Start/Stop
71† Var/Cont
72† Intro/End
73† Fill/Tap
74† Rec
75† <<
76† >>
77† Punch
78† Manual Perf
79† Sync
80† Tempo-Fix
90† Rotary Slow/Fast
0-127
**********
0-127
System Exclusive
O
O
System
Song Position
Song Select
Common Tune
O
X
X
X
X
X
System
Clock
Real Time Commands
O
O
O
O
Aux
Local On/Off
Messages All notes Off
Active Sensing
Reset
X
O
O
X
X
O
O
X
True Number
Remarks
1 MIDI IN, 1 THRU, 2 OUT
EXTRA COMMON CHANNEL
true voice depends
on selected sound
Bank change recognised
on common channel:
Bank P.Change
00†
00†
00†
00†
0-23 Real Time Perf
24-31 Songs
32-63 Prog. Styles
64-127 Int. Styles
08† 0-23
Real Time Perf
16† 0-7
Songs
24† 0-7
Song Perf
32† 0-31 Int. Styles
32† 32-95 Prog. Styles
48† 0-23
Effect 1 select
49† 0-23
Effect 2 select
On common channel change:
0-23 Real Time Perf
24-31 Songs
32-63 Prog. Styles
64-127 Int. Styles
†: This information travels on the Common channel only
NOTES
O: Yes
DATE: 15/09/1993
Version 1.00
MODEL: WX2/WX400
X: No
Owner's Manual
Appendix
xiv
MIDI CONTROLLERS
WX recognises the MIDI Controllers shown below. Those listed from 00 to 67 are transmitted and received on
all MIDI Channels, while those from 70 to 90 are transmitted on MIDI Common only.
The data from 00 - 15 are continuous controls which affect parameters for the duration that the
controllers are applied. The data
from 64 - 67 and 90 are "switch"
controls which remain active until
they are switched off by the same
Controller.
(00) Bank Select†
Modulation (01) is also generated
by the Track Ball using Up/Down
movements.
Main Volume (07) is generated by
the Master Volume slider and only
travels on MIDI Common.
Pitch Bend data is generated by the
Track Ball using Left/Right movements.
(01) Modulation
(04) Foot controller
The following are not, transmitted,
only recevied on MIDI Common
(07) Main volume†
(70) Start/Stop††
(10) Panorama
(71) Var/Cont††
(11) Expression
(72) Intro/End††
(12) Attack GEM
(73) Fill/Tap††
(13) Release GEM
(74
(14) Filter 1 GEM
(75) <<††
(15) Filter 2 GEM
(76) >>††
(20) Filter 1+2 GEM
(77) Punch††
(64) Damper
(78) Man. Perf.††
(66) Sostenuto
(79) Sync††
(67) Soft pedal
(80) Tempo fix††
Rec†
(90) Rotary Slow/Fast††
Owner's Manual
Appendix
xv
WX SPECIFICATIONS
Keyboard
WX2 - 61 Keys (C2-C7)
WX400 - 88 Weighted Keys (A0 - C8)
Both with Dynamics and Aftertouch sensitivity (channel)
Sound Generation method PCM, Wavetables, Multiloop, Crossfade Multiwave and Subtractive Synthesis
Polyphony
32 Notes, 32 Oscillators (single mode); 16 Notes, 32 Oscillators (double mode)
Memory
6 Megabytes ROM, 256 KByte Static RAM (Ni/Cd battery-backed)
2 Megabyte RAM DISP (optional) for PCM Samples
Effects
Two digital multi-effects processors with Effects editor for custom effects
Sounds
472 ROM Sounds arranged in 16 Families (344 Sounds, 112 Percussion sounds, 16
Drumkits), up to 1472 user-programmable Performance Sounds and 184 userprogrammable Performance Drumkits
48 additional PCM Samples with optional Sample RAM DISP
Performances
184 Performances (24 Real-Time in 3 Banks, 64 Internal Style in 8 Banks, 32
Programmable Style in 4 Banks, 64 Song/Song Style in 8 Banks)
Sequencer section
16 Tracks, 16 timbres (dynamic voice allocation),1/192 quarter note resolution,
250,000 events, 8 Songs, 64 Internal Styles + Variation, 32 Programmable Styles +
Variation, Background Song Loading, Realtime and Step record modes, full Event
Edit facilities (Master Track, Copy, Move, Erase, Insert/Delete, Transpose/Dynamic,
Quantize, Microscope, Name, Undo)
Style/Sequencer controls
Start/Stop, Intro/End, Fill/Tap, Var/Cont, REC, >> (fast forward); << (fast rewind),
Tempo-Fix, Sync
Score
Possibility of displaying Melody-Chords-Lyrics, Chords only, Lyrics only (Zoom
edit), Get from Track function
Panel controls
Master Volume slider, Dial, Function Keys (F1…F8), Cursor Diamond (Up/Down/
Left/Right arrows) with Toggle (On/Off key), Track Ball (Modulation and Pitch
Bend)
Display
Graphic, Liquid Crystal, neon-backlit, 240x64 pixel resolution, Contrast control
Edit section
Disk, Performance, Sound, Mixer, Effect 1/2, MIDI, Status, Splits, Arrange, Clock
Floppy Disk Drive
3.5" 2DD/2HD Disk/SRam operations (for Sound/Drumkit/Effects/Performance
parameters/Sequence data/MIDI data, and for Standard MIDI Files), Load User
program, Preload, Load WS songs (WS SOFTWARE COMPATIBLE)
Miscellaneous
Backlit panel keys, resident Demo Song, Option facility for use with User Programs
Connections
Volume Pedal (fixed), Damper Pedal, Pedal 1, Pedal 2 (all programmable and polarity
reversible), Audio In Left-Right/Mono (mic-line), Output Left/Right, External Send/
Return, MIDI (In, Thru, Out 1 - Out 2), Pedalboard, Headphones, Video Out (RGB/
TV)
Amplification
WX2: 20W+20W Stereo
WX400: 40W+40W Stereo, 3 way, 6 Speakers
Dimensions
WX2: (HxLxW) 120x1090x370 mm - 4.7x42.9x14.5 inches
WX400: (HxLxW) 842x1440x470 mm - 33.2x56.7x18.5 inches
Weight
WX2: 13 kg (28.6 lbs)
WX400: 76 kg (167.5 lbs)
Owner's Manual
Appendix
xvi
GLOSSARY
After Touch: MIDI message activated by applying pressure after a note on event. Its action is graduated (128
steps), and is directly proportional to the pressure
applied. WX generates Mono Aftertouch - pressing a
note affects all notes of the same MIDI channel.
Bypass: To ignore, “go around”.
Common: See MIDI Common.
Controllers: Sound controlling devices (Wheels, Pedals,
Function Controllers).
Cutoff Frequency: Central Frequency of the intervention
band of a Filter. Around the vicinity of the Cutoff
Frequency, the action of a Filter gradually becomes
less marked, creating a “bell” in the audio band.
Destination: Refers to all that to which a MIDI message
generated by a Track can be directed. WX can direct
MIDI messages to the internal Sound Generation, to
MIDI Out and to the Sequencer.
Dial: The Data Entry wheel to the right of the Display.
Increases or decreases Data value by large amounts
(continuously). Also used to move the reverse-highlighted Edit zone in almost all applications.
Dynamics: MIDI message always coupled to the activation of a note. Dynamics controls the sound’s intensity, proportionally to the keystrike velocity.
Directory: “Catalogue” of the contents of a floppy disk.
WX allows you to see the directory of a disk inserted
in the driver, the data contained in the RAM or SRam.
Display: The “small” Liquid Crystal Display incorporated
in the front panel of WX. The Display permits you
monitor all information relating to the instrument’s
means of control (sound generation, commands, connections). Its high resolution permits you to communicate with the musical instrument through pages rich
with graphics which are easily understood.
Disk Drive: Device that “reads” a floppy disk. The disk
drive is built-in and has a capacity of 1.44 Megabytes.
It uses 3.5” HD and 3.5” DD disks (the latter in MSDOS format for Standard MIDI Files).
Drum Kit: Refers to the layout of the percussion sounds
across the keyboard. A Drum Kit permits you to use
only one Track for all the drum sounds, or for a part of
them. Each note of the scale corresponds to a percussion instrument sound. The WX Drum Kits can be
freely user-configured, by means of the Sound Patch.
A series of Drum Kits are available as ROM Sounds.
DSP: (Digital Signal Processor). An integrated circuit
contained in WX which modifies the sound produced
by the Oscillators, adding Reverb, Delay/Echo, and
Modulations. Many different types of DSP units are
commercially available, also known as Multi Effects
units.
Edit: Modify. Refers to the entire Operating System of the
WX User Interface, and includes Edit Performance,
Edit Sound, Edit Sequencer, Edit Effect, and others.
Envelope: Term that graphically represents the change in
the characteristics and quality of a Sound with time.
Erase: Cancel, Eliminate. A command found within the
Disk, Edit Performance and Edit Sequencer environments. Destroys a set of data permanently (a Disk file,
a Track, a part of a Song).
Floppy Disk: A magnetic Data support. It consists of a
disk, protected by a plastic container, in which data
Owner's Manual
can be memorised - as in any other computer - in
numeric form. The data can be created, restored,
cancelled or updated at any moment.
Headphones: Set of Stereo sound propagating devices that
can be used for private listening. These are connected
to WX by means of the appropriate socket located
underneath the Trackball panel.
Load: A command found in the Disk environment. Copies
data from a floppy disk into the Ram, and becomes
available to be modified or used for other purposes (a
Song, a Style, a Standard MIDI File, a User Program...).
Loop: Cyclic repetition. A function found in the Edit
Sequencer environment, to repeat a specified number
of bars of a Song.
Master Keyboard: A controlling device (keyboard). Usually, a MK is a generator of MIDI events, incapable of
generating Sounds. It is connected to the MIDI IN port
of an external Sound generating device (an Expander),
or another MIDI compatible musical instrument. The
Master Keyboard’s utility is its capacity of supplying
advanced control functions, centralised in a single
system of controllers. WX can also operate as an
advanced Master Keyboard, with functions such as
Split, Merge and the generation of the MIDI Controllers. WX400 is also supplied with a larger keyboard
(88 keys).
Menu: List of items. In Edit situations, you can access
single functions or proceed to others from a list (menu)
of different items, by moving the reverse-highlighted
zone with the Dial.
Merge: The act of “fusing” events together, use in Edit
Sequencer to “mix” recorded events from one track
with those in another track. See also MIDI Merge.
Microscope: Refers to a particular function of the WX
Sequencer, in which every recorded MIDI event can
be individually modified in terms of Song position as
well as value.
MIDI: (Musical Instrument Digital Interface). A system
of communication between different digital musical
instruments. MIDI is based on the connection via three
types of ports: IN, OUT, THRU. The MIDI system
renders all electronic digital instruments completely
programmable at a distance (e.g. from a computer).
The MIDI data provides the receiving instrument with
all information necessary to produce sounds.
MIDI Common: A programmed MIDI channel to, (1)
simulate the WX keyboard on a connected Master
Keyboard, (2) send control messages (Bank change,
Performance change, Style Change, Effect Change...)
from an WX-Series instrument to another instrument
of the same series.
MIDI Controllers: MIDI messages which transmit information relating to performance parameters (Modulation, Main Volume, Damper Pedal...).
MIDI Merge: The function which “mixes” MIDI signals
originating from different Sources, sent by the WX
MIDI processor to the MIDI OUT. In cases relating to
signals arriving from a MIDI In Source, the MIDI
processor acts as a redirecting device, given that a
MIDI signal is usually directed to the MIDI THRU
and not MIDI OUT.
MIOS: (Musical Instrument Operating System). Refers to
the WX Operating System, that is, the program that
Appendix
xvii
makes the instrument work. MIOS is resident in ROM
and cannot be modified, but it can be expanded by
means of User Programs.
Modulation: Dynamic modification over time. Modulation can affect Amplitude (Tremolo), Pitch (Vibrato)
and the Filter. It is activated by the TrackBall using
Up/Down movements or by a MIDI message.
Move: A function of the Edit Sequencer environment,
allowing you to move recorded events from one position to another.
Operating System: This is the programme – called MIOS
– which makes WX work. It is resident in ROM and
cannot be modified; it is, however, expandable by
means of User Programs.
Option: A space predisposed for the User Programs.
Oscillator: The chip which produces the sound. WX
utilises one or two oscillators per polyphonic voice.
The oscillator reads a Waveform resident in the sound,
which can be modified with the Sound Edit parameters.
Pan: Abbreviation for Panorama. The Pan is the position
of the Sound between two Stereo audio outputs.
Pedal: Programmable continuous physical controlling
devices that can be connected to the appropriate sockets on the back panel of WX.
Performance: The configuration of Tracks and all memorised parameter settings that, when selected, configure
the instrument automatically for any playing mode
(Real Time, Style or Song modes).
Pitch: Intonation, frequency.
Pitch Bend: Dynamic modification of the intonation. It is
activated by the TrackBall (left/right movements) or
by a MIDI Message.
Playback: The term that describes the Sequencer’s capability of reproducing a Song. Also the name given to
the display which is seen when you press the Song
button in the Edit section.
Preload: “Background” Song loading while the Sequencer
in playing another Song (the machine is not blocked
by Preload).
Program Change: A MIDI Message which changes the
Sound in a Track. The Program Change can be sent by
the Data Entry section to the Internal Sound Generation, or sent via MIDI OUT to an external musical
instrument. It can also be recorded in a Song.
Quantize: Correction of imperfect timing errors committed during Song recordings (including Rhythm patterns).
RAM: (Random Access Memory). A part of the WX
Memory which can be updated and in which new data
can be loaded. WX is provided with 2 Megabytes of
RAM dedicated to all user-programmed data (Styles,
Songs, Performances, Sounds, etc.). An optional 2
Megabytes of Sample RAM are available for the
specific purpose of storing Samples loaded from Disk
as well as user-programmed ones. RAM is cancelled
when the instrument is turned off.
RGB: (Red, Green, Blue) The signal emitted by the output
of the same name and generated by WX for the
purpose of projecting the display images and Song
lyrics to an external monitor (a colour computer or
domestic TV).
ROM: (Read Only Memory). A part of the WX memory
Owner's Manual
which cannot be modified, and in which factory programmed data is conserved, such as the 472 ROM
Sounds and the Operating System MIOS. ROM
memory is not cancelled when the instrument is
switched off.
Sample: Refers to a portion of the sound recorded in
numeric form. In WX it is also called the Waveform.
The WX Sounds have a waveform “header” which can
be edited with the Sound Edit parameters.
Save: Memorise. This is a command found in the Disk
environment as well as the Normal (Save Performance). Save renders all the modifications carried out to
particular data permanent, or renders a set of data
available for future use. The same command is also
used to create a Standard MIDI File for use by other
equipment capable of reading Sequencer data generated by the WX sequencer.
Scart: The connector through which a domestic TV or
colour computer monitor can receive the WX display
data, including the Lyrics and Music Score of the WX
Songs.
Score: The WX function which permits you to see the
Lyrics and Music Score across the display. WX can
also transmit the data to an externally connected
domestic TV or colour computer monitor, both fitted
with the SCART connector.
Search: The function found in the Sound Library which
permits you to “look for” a Sound by specifying two
or more letters that are contained in the Sounds name.
Sequencer: A system of recording MIDI data. The
Sequencer permits you to record a polyphonic song
sound by sound, and so reproduce the song after
carrying out any necessary corrections. The quality of
a recording made with a Sequencer is maintained and
does not decay, even after recording a large quantity of
data and after many recordings: the Sequencer does
not record sound, it records MIDI data.
Song: A piece of music, recorded or reproduced (played
back) by the Sequencer. WX can store 8 Songs in
RAM, each one with its own Bank of 8 Performances.
Sound: In WX, the Sound is the final part of the Sample
(Waveform) on which modifications of the Envelopes, Filters, Pan, etc. have been performed, in order
to render the sound musically useful.
The Sounds are controlled by the Sound Library. 472
Sounds are in ROM, other Samples can be loaded
from floppy disk, provided that WX is fitted with the
optional Sample RAM.
Sound Map: The configuration of the Sound in the Sound
Library. Each Sound corresponds to a Program Change.
Sound Patch: A layout of different sounds for each key, or
two different sounds separated by a dynamic threshold. In the first case, sounds are assigned to various
zones of the keyboard (maximum of 128 zones) and a
typical use is a Drumkit. In the second case, two
different Sounds can be assigned on two different
dynamic levels, so that the second sound is triggered
by varying the velocity (dynamics) with which a note
is struck.
Source: A provider of MIDI events that can be directed to
the WX Tracks. The sources of MIDI events are; the
keyboard (local), the MIDI In and the Sequencer.
Static RAM: The part of WX memory which is backed by
a small Nickel/Cadmium rechargeable battery and
which can contain user-programmed data that re-
Appendix
xviii
quires frequent use. Each time the WX is turned on, the
SRam data is automatically loaded into RAM for
immediate use. The battery recharging takes place
when the instrument is on.
Store: Memorise. A command associated to the Edit
Sound and Edit Effects environments which store the
user-programmed elements in the current Performance.
Track: A multitimbric part of a Song. A Track has its own
programming and timbric characteristics. In WX, the
Track is also the “elaborating centre” for MIDI data
originating from the Sources (keyboard, MIDI In,
Sequencer): this data is then redistributed to the destinations (internal Sound Generation, MIDI Out and
Sequencer).
TrackBall: The physical controller on the extreme left of
the WX control panel which is permanently programmed for Modulation and Pitch Bend. Modulation
is produced by Up/Down movements and Pitch Bend
by left/right movements. Each track of every Performance can be individually programmed for TrackBall
interventions.
Transpose: The change in pitch of a note with respect to
a standard value. Transpositions of the entire keyboard above or below a note can be effected in the
Status Edit, or individual Track transpositions can be
carried out within the Edit Performance environment.
The Key Transpose can be enabled or disabled for
each Track. The Edit Sequencer also has the Transpose function to shift events from one note to another.
Tweak: A term that describes the slight modification of
one or more of a Sound’s parameters. You can tweak
a sound in real time, for example, using the programmable pedals to which the Edit Sound parameters have
been assigned (Filter, Attack, Release, etc.).
User Interface: All that which appears within the Display.
The means with which the user communicates with
the musical instrument - that is, the availability of
information relating to the status of the data - and in
general with all computers. The WX User Interface is
a graphic system of superimposable windows containing parameters in graphical and text form.
Undo: Annul. A command available within the Edit
Sequencer environment that cancels the last recording. Undo can also cancel an undo operation, restoring
an annulled track to its original status.
User: Generally, this term indicates all that can be programmed by the operator.
User Programs: software programs that are loaded into
the WX from a disk. These types of programs expand
the WX Operating System and are commercially available through the normal Generalmusic channels of
distribution. They are produced both by Generalmusic
as well as external developers.
Waveform: In WX the Waveform is always the Sample;
a portion of the sound recorded in numerical form and
incorporated in the sound’s “header”. The Edit Sound
parameters intervene on the Sample “header” of the
Sounds.
Owner's Manual
Appendix
FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there
is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this
instrument does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception,
which can be determined by turning the instrument off and on, the user is
encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following
measures:
- Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
- Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver.
- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which
the receiver is connected.
- Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
GENERALMUSIC Code 270969
Specifications are subject to change without prior notice.
PRINTED IN ITALY
Sales Division: I -47048 S.Giovanni in Marignano (FO) – Via delle Rose, 12 – tel. +39 541 957336 – tlx 550555 GMUSIC I – fax +39 541 957404
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising